Audi Birmingham - Rivesrives.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/10/Audi-Bham-Project...Section 10 1101 Visual Display Boards Section 10 1400 Signage Section 10 2113.13 Metal Toilet Compartments

Project Manual

for

Audi Birmingham Birmingham, Alabama

owner:

Sonic Automotive Inc.

architect:

Praxis3 LLC

1776 Peachtree Road

Suite 400 South

Atlanta, GA 30309

(404) 875-4500

Project No. 13036

Date: ???? 2014

Released for Bid and Permit

Copyright © 2014 – Praxis3 LLC

All reports, plans, specifications, computer files, field data, notes and other documents and

instruments prepared by Praxis3 LLC shall remain the property of Praxis3 LLC. Praxis3 LLC shall

retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights including copyright thereto.

This project manual and the associated drawings are not to be reproduced or copied in whole

or in part. They are only to be used for the project and sites specifically identified herein and

are not to be used on any other project unless approved in writing by Praxis3 LLC.

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 00 0002-1 BIRMINGHAM, ALABAMA TABLE OF CONTENTS PRAXIS 3-13036 ???? 2014

TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION NO. TITLE DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 2100 Allowances Section 01 3000 Administrative Requirements Section 01 3001 Responsibility Chart Section 01 3002 Submittal Cover Sheet Section 01 4000 Quality Requirements Section 01 4150 Special Inspections Section 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 6000 Product Requirements Section 01 7000 Execution and Closeout Requirements Section 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal Section 01 7800 Closeout Submittals DIVISION 3 CONCRETE Section 03 0505 Underslab Vapor Barrier Section 03 3000 Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03 3511 Concrete Floor Finishes – Polished Concrete Section 03 3511.14 Concrete Floor Finishes – Ashford Formula DIVISION 4 MASONRY Section 04 2000 Unit Masonry DIVISION 5 METALS Section 05 1200 Structural Steel Framing Section 05 2100 Steel Joists Framing Section 05 3100 Steel Decking Section 05 4000 Cold Formed Metal Framing Section 05 5000 Metal Fabrications Section 05 5100 Metal Stairs DIVISION 6 WOOD, PLASTICS and COMPOSITES Section 06 1000 Rough Carpentry Section 06 4100 Architectural Wood Casework DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 1400 Fluid-Applied Waterproofing Section 07 1616 Crystalline Waterproofing Section 07 2100 Thermal Insulation Section 07 2110 Board and Batt Insulation Climate Zone Table Section 07 2119 Foamed-In-Place Insulation Section 07 2500 Weather Barriers Section 07 4113 Metal Roof Panels Section 07 4230 Textured Metal Plate Wall Panels Section 07 5423.10 Thermoplastic-Polyolefin Roofing – 60 mil Section 07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Section 07 7100 Roof Specialties


Section 07 7200 Roof Accessories Section 07 8400 Firestopping Section 07 9005 Joint Sealers DIVISION 8 OPENINGS Section 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 08 1416 Flush Wood Doors Section 08 3013 High Speed Roll-Up Door Section 08 3100 Access Doors and Panels Section 08 3323 Overhead Coiling Doors Section 08 3326 Overhead Coiling Grilles Section 08 4413 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls Section 08 7100 Door Hardware Section 08 8000 Glazing Section 08 8300 Mirrors Section 08 9200 Louvered Equipment Enclosures DIVISION 9 FINISHES Section 09 2116 Gypsum Board Assemblies Section 09 3000 Tiling Section 09 5100 Acoustical Ceilings Section 09 5470 Metal Plank Ceiling System Section 09 6500 Resilient Flooring Section 09 6800 Carpeting Section 09 6813 Tile Carpeting Section 09 7200 Wall Coverings Section 09 9000 Painting and Coating Section 09 9110 Paint Schedule Section 09 9600 High-Performance Coatings DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES Section 10 1101 Visual Display Boards Section 10 1400 Signage Section 10 2113.13 Metal Toilet Compartments Section 10 2800 Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories Section 10 4400 Fire Protection Specialties Section 10 5100 Lockers DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS Section 12 2113 Horizontal Louver Blinds Section 12 2492 Motorized Roller Shades Section 12 3600 Countertops Section 12 4840 Foot Grid Entrance Systems DIVISION 14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT Section 14 2400 Hydraulic Elevators DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK Section 31 3116 Termite Control


DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Section 32 3113 Chain Link Fences and Gates End of Table of Contents

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 01 2100-1BIRMINGHAM, AL ALLOWANCESPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 01 2100ALLOWANCES

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Cash allowances.B. Inspecting and testing allowances.C. Payment and modification procedures relating to allowances.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 2000 - Price and Payment Procedures: Additional payment and modification

procedures.1.03 CASH ALLOWANCES

A. Costs Included in Cash Allowances: Cost of product to Contractor or subcontractor, lessapplicable trade discounts, less cost of delivery to site, less applicable taxes.

B. Costs Not Included in Cash Allowances: Product delivery to site and handling at the site,including unloading, uncrating, and storage; protection of products from elements and fromdamage; and labor for installation and finishing.

C. Architect Responsibilities:1. Consult with Contractor for consideration and selection of products, suppliers, and

installers.2. Select products in consultation with Owner and transmit decision to Contractor.3. Prepare Change Order.

D. Contractor Responsibilities:1. Assist Architect in selection of products, suppliers, and installers.2. Obtain proposals from suppliers and installers and offer recommendations.3. On notification of which products have been selected, execute purchase agreement with

designated supplier and installer.4. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. Arrange for delivery.5. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and defects. Submit

claims for transportation damage.E. Differences in costs will be adjusted by Change Order.

1.04 INSPECTING AND TESTING ALLOWANCESA. Costs Included in Inspecting and Testing Allowances: Cost of engaging an inspecting or testing

agency; execution of inspecting and tests; and reporting results.B. Costs Not Included in the Inspecting and Testing Allowances:

1. Costs of incidental labor and facilities required to assist inspecting or testing agency.2. Costs of testing services used by Contractor separate from Contract Document

requirements.3. Costs of retesting upon failure of previous tests as determined by Architect.

C. Payment Procedures:1. Submit one copy of the inspecting or testing firm's invoice with next application for

payment.2. Pay invoice on approval by Architect.

D. Differences in cost will be adjusted by Change Order.1.05 ALLOWANCES SCHEDULE

A. Section 08 7100: Include the stipulated sum of $450 for purchase and delivery of per door leafhardware.

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 01 2100-2BIRMINGHAM, AL ALLOWANCESPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

B. Contingency Allowance: Include stipulated sum/price included in the Bid Forms for use uponthe Owner's instructions.

C. Section 01 5000-TEMPORARY FACILITES AND CONTROLS: Include the stipulated sum of$$1,000.00 for purchase and delivery of the Project Sign. If the Project Sign is included in theDrawings this allowance is void..

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 01 3000-1BIRMINGHAM, AL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 01 3000ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS


A. Electronic document submittal service.B. Progress meetings.C. Construction progress schedule.D. Progress photographs.E. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.F. Number of copies of submittals.G. Submittal procedures.H. Punch List.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Document 00 7200 - General Conditions: Dates for applications for payment.B. Section 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedule: Form, content, and administration of

schedules.C. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements.D. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL SERVICE

A. All documents transmitted for purposes of administration of the contract are to be in electronic(PDF) format and transmitted via TANGENTWORKS500, an Internet-based submittal servicethat receives, logs and stores documents, provides electronic stamping and signatures, andnotifies addressees via email.1. Besides submittals for review, information, and closeout, this procedure applies to

requests for information (RFIs), progress documentation, contract modification documents(e.g. supplementary instructions, change proposals, change orders), applications forpayment, field reports and meeting minutes, and any other document any participantwishes to make part of the project record.

2. Contractor and Architect are required to use this service.3. It is Contractor's responsibility to submit documents in PDF format.4. Subcontractors, suppliers, and Architect's consultants are to be permitted to use the

service at no extra charge.5. Users of the service need an email address, Internet access, and PDF review software

that includes ability to mark up and apply electronic stamps (such as Adobe Acrobat,www.adobe.com, or Bluebeam PDF Revu, www.bluebeam.com), unless such softwarecapability is provided by the service provider.

6. Paper document transmittals will not be reviewed; emailed PDF documents will not bereviewed.

7. All other specified submittal and document transmission procedures apply, except thatelectronic document requirements to not apply to samples or color selection charts,oversized submittals (too large to be scanned and transmitted via TANGENTWORKS 550)and samples.

B. The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect a list of names and email addresses for any partythat should have access to the project website. This includes people within their company plusany Subcontractors working on the project requiring access to project information. The cost for


Taangentworks is not a cost to the Contractor so the Contractor is encouraged to provide allnames and email addresses.

C. Project Closeout: Architect will determine when to terminate the service for the project and isresponsible for obtaining archive copies of files for Owner.

3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGSA. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly

intervals.B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at

meetings.C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner,

Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.D. Agenda:

1. Review minutes of previous meetings.2. Review of Work progress.3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.6. Maintenance of progress schedule.7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.8. Planned progress during succeeding work period.9. Maintenance of quality and work standards.10. Maintenance of Close Out and Record documents.11. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.12. Other business relating to Work.

E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with twocopies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULEA. Within 10 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned

operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work.B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days.C. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete

schedule for review.1. Include dates for all submittals.2. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed

schedule.D. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule.E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.

3.04 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHSA. Provide photographs of site and construction throughout progress of Work.B. In addition to periodic, recurring views, take photographs of each of the following events:

1. Completion of site clearing.2. Excavations in progress.3. Foundations in progress and upon completion.4. Structural framing in progress and upon completion.5. Enclosure of building, upon completion.6. Final completion, minimum of ten (10) photos.

C. Views:


1. Provide non-aerial photographs from four cardinal views at each specified time, until Dateof Substantial Completion.

2. Consult with Architect for instructions on views required.3. Provide factual presentation.4. Provide correct exposure and focus, high resolution and sharpness, maximum depth of

field, and minimum distortion.D. Digital Photographs: 24 bit color, minimum resolution of 1024 by 768, in JPG format; provide

files unaltered by photo editing software.1. Delivery Medium: Via email.2. File Naming: Include project identification, date and time of view, and view identification.3. PDF File: Assemble all photos into printable pages in PDF format, with 2 to 3 photos per

page, each photo labeled with file name; one PDF file per submittal.E. Photographer Quality Prints: Full color; three prints of each view.

1. Glossy; smooth texture; white tint; single weight; contrast grade 4, extra hard.2. Size: 8 x 10 inch (200 x 250 mm); mounted for binder and tabs.3. Identify each print on back. Identify name of Project, contract number, phase, orientation

of view, date and time of view, name and address of photographer, and photographer'snumbered identification of exposure.

4. Deliver prints with each Application for Payment with transmittal letter specified in thissection.

3.05 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEWA. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:

1. Product data.2. Shop drawings.3. Samples for selection.4. Samples for verification.

B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for general conformance withinformation given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.1. CAD files may be obtained from the Architect for an administrative fee of $500.00 per

drawing per subcontractor and execution of a Standard Hold Harmless/IndemnificationAgreement specified in this section. NOTE: These files remain the property of theArchitect and may not be used for other projects. Contact the Architect's Project Managerfor more information and to order CAD files.

C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 7800 - CLOSEOUTSUBMITTALS.

3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATIONA. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information:

1. Design data.2. Certificates.3. Test reports.4. Manufacturer's instructions.5. Manufacturer's field reports.6. Other types indicated.

B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. No action will betaken.

3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUTA. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout:

1. Project record documents.


2. Operation and maintenance data.3. Warranties.4. Bonds.5. Other types as indicated.

B. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion.3.08 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS

A. Documents: Submit one electronic copy in PDF format; an electronically-marked up file will bereturned. Create PDFs at native size and right-side up; illegible files will be rejected.1. Unless the submittal is a phsical sample, all submittals must be provided in electronic

format utilizing TANGENTWORKS 500. The General Contractor will upload submittals,including all subcontractor submittals, in PDF format and notify the Architect. TheArchitect will review and markup the electronic submittals and notify the GeneralContractor when complete.

B. Extra Copies at Project Closeout: See Section 01 7800.C. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be

retained by Architect.1. After review, produce duplicates.2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated.

3.09 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURESA. Transmit each submittal with a copy of approved submittal form.B. Transmit each submittal with approved form.C. Group submittals required to evaluate a complete installation or color selection.D. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a

sequential alphabetic suffix.E. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and

specification section number, as appropriate on each copy.F. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of

Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination ofinformation is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

G. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items.H. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor.I. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be

detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.J. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.K. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.L. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to

comply with requirements.M. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.N. Include submittal requirements from each specification section with indication submittal is

complete.O. Contractor submittals that have obviously not been reviewed will be returned without action by

the Architect.END OF SECTION

Audi Birmingham

NOTE: Some items shown below are NOT in the scope of this project. Disregard if not applicable.

See end of chart for a list of abbreviations used

Items Designed or Furnished by: Installed by: Notes

Selected by:

Design Document Contractor Owner Contractor Owner

EXTERIOR

GENERAL It is the responsibility of the General

Contractor to provide a complete scope of

work for all incoming utilities. If a

discrepancy is found or a trade is not

coordinated between the civil engineer

and the MEP engineer this must be

brought to attention during the bid in the

form of an RFI. If no RFI's are asked you

are acknowledging that you have

coordinated all trades and are providing a

complete package of work.

Site preparation CE CE X X

Drives and Parking Lot CE CE X X

Site lighting including landscape and

entrance and all lamps

EE / LA EE X X

Exterior electrical outlets EE / LA EE X X

Empty conduits for future electrical EE EE X X

Building Signage SC A / SC / EE X X X X Electrical by Contractor, In-wall blocking

by Contractor. Signs and installation of

sign by Sign Contractor. (Final electrical

connection by GC).

Ground mounted signs SC A / SC / EE X X X X Electrical by Contractor. Signs, foundation

and installation of sign by Sign

Contractor. (Final electrical connection by

GC).

Architectural Paving / Sidewalks

adjacent to buildings

A A X X

Sidewalks other than above CE CE X X

Vehicle Display Pads CE CE X X

Landscaping Irrigation System LS LS X X

Landscaping CE CE X X

Hose Bibbs CE / ME CE / ME X X

Landscape Maintenance Equip. O O X X

Lot Sweeper O O X X

Dumpster O O X X

Dumpster Enclosure CE CE X X

Underground conduit for CATV if any. O / AV CE / EE X X Civil Engineer and Electrical Engineer to

coordinate w/ Owner on needs of facility.

EE will indicate empty conduit from ROW

to building if within scope.

Blocking for satellite dish if any. O / AV EE X X Electrical Engineer to coordinate w/

Owner on needs of facility.

Page 1 of 5

Audi Birmingham




Selected by:


Electrical Transformer EE CE / EE X X

Gas Meter ME CE / ME X X

Water Meters ME CE / ME X X

Oil Water Separator ME CE / ME X X

INTERIOR

Interior Display Millwork MV MV X X Owner Furnished, Contractor to

coordinate installation by Manufacturer's

Vendor. Provide electrical as indicated and

make final connections.

Wall, base, floor, and ceiling finishes A A X X

Vinyl wall covering A A X X

Doors and frames A A X X

Door Hardware A / C C X X Contractor to include an allowance and

provide submittal to Architect for review.

Door keying information O O / C X X Contractor to coordinate with the Owner

on keying patterns

Key registry and key cabinet A A X X

Carpeting and pad A A X X

VCT floors A A X X

Tile Floors A A X X

Epoxy Floors A A X X

Whiteboards, tackboards, etc. A A X X

Public restroom vanities A A X X

Millwork A A X X

Furniture including sofas, tables,

desks and chairs

O A / FS X X Architect to show basic furniture layout.

Owner specifies furniture pieces.

Contractor responsible for coordination of

electrical with final furniture location and

type.

Furniture including file cabinets. O FS X X

Small Office Machines O O X X

Electrical wiring for office machines O EE X X

High Density Filing System O A X X Architect to show basic furniture layout.

Owner and Furniture Vendor specifies

furniture pieces. Contractor to coordinate

installation with Vendor.

Page 2 of 5

Audi Birmingham




Selected by:


Parts storage units O ES X X Parts Storage Units by Owner. GC shall

coordinate lighting and sprinkler layout

with approved Storage Unit layout from

Owner.

All fixtures, trim accessories including

vanities, toilet partitions, and non-

decorative mirrors

A A X X

Toilet Accessories A A X X

Manufacturer Signage and Graphics

including banners, displays, large wall

graphics.

O O X X Signage and Graphics by Owner, Elec by

GC. Final connection of electrical by GC.

Room Signage as indicated on door

schedule.

A A X X

Room Signage for Offices, etc O O X X (none at this time)

Vending Machines A A X X Architect to show general layout only.

Contractor to provide all necessary

electrical connections.

Kitchen Equipment including,

microwaves, coffee makers

A O X X Architect to show general layout only.

Contractor to provide all necessary

electrical and water connections.

Kitchen Equipment (built-in) including

refrigerators, dishwashers, garbage

disposals, undercounter icemakers or

undercounter refrigerators if any.

A A X X GC to provide equipment as specified in

the Project Manual. Provide electrical as

required and coordinate all dimensions

with the Millwork Sub.

Cash registers O O X X Cash Registers by Owner. Electrical by

GC.

Televisions, VCRs, etc. A / AV AV X X Architect to show general layout only. AV

Consultant to specify equipment.

Contractor to provide wall blocking,

support brackets and electrical as

required.

Conduit for Televisions, VCR, conduits

for satellite dish connection, etc.

AV EE X X Electrical Engineer to locate TV's on plan.

Contractor to provide empty conduits with

pullstrings and boxes for Owner's vendor

to use.

TV Brackets A A X X Contractor to provide TV / VCR brackets

as identified on the drawings.

Flat Panel TVs A A X X Contractor to coordinate installation

requirements with Owner equipment. This

includes blocking and location for

electrical and CATV boxes.

Telephones O EE X X X X Electrical Engineer to locate telephones on

plan. Contractor to provide empty

conduits with pullstrings and boxes for

Owner's vendor to use.

Page 3 of 5

Audi Birmingham




Selected by:


Computer Outlets O EE X X X X Electrical Engineer to locate computers on

plan. Contractor to provide empty

conduits with pullstrings and boxes for

Owner's vendor to use.

Security System O O X X Conduit by Alarm System Subcontractor,

Electrical service by Contractor to one

location. Contractor to coordinate

scheduling with Owner's vendor for their

installation of conduit.

Sound / Public Address systems AV AV X X Electrical power to Tel/Data closet by

Contractor. Wiring for speakers by

Owner's AV subcontractor. EE will indicate

locations for open ceilings which may

require empty conduit for vendor provided

cabling.

Wiring for sound system and public

address systems

AV AV X X

Key Machines (if any) O A X X Architect to show general layout only.

Electrical as required by Contractor

Shop Equipment including

compressors, tool boxes, etc.

O / ES ES / EE X X Architect to show general layout only.

Electrical as required by Contractor. The

2" empty PVC conduit from the inground

lift to the wall is by the Equipment

Supplier.

Above-ground Lifts O / ES ES / EE X X Equipment installer to furnish and install

above-ground lifts. Contractor to

coordinate the installation.

In-ground alignment rack O / ES ES / EE X X X X Contractor to install recessed pit with

drain, edge angle and conduit to/fm pit.

Owners equipment vendor will provide

equipment and install equipment. GC

shall coordinate installation with Owner's

vendor.

Compressed Air Drops O/ES ES X X Owner's vendor to provide all compressed

air piping.

Water in shop O / ES ES / ME X X

Above Ground Carbon Monoxide

Exhaust System

ME ME X X CO system by GC. Final electrical

connections by GC. GC to also coordinate

installation including all wall and / or roof

penetrations.

Oil, Waste Oil, and ATF distribution

system

O / ES ES / EE X X Contractor to provide electrical service as

indicated. Owner's vendor to provide all

equipment and installation.

Final Electrical Connections to

Equipment, Signs, Fixtures, etc.

X X Contractor to make all final connections to

all electrical devices.

Page 4 of 5

Audi Birmingham




Selected by:


Shop ventilation, AC, fresh air make-

up

ME ME X X

Plumbing fixtures including sinks,

toilets, showers, mop sinks and eye

washes

ME ME X X

Janitor closet hardware including mop

racks.

A A X X Mop rack by Contractor. Shelving by

Owner.

Light fixtures including lamps A / EE EE X X

Dimmer system for public areas (if

any)

A / EE EE X X

Emergency Lighting EE EE X X

Employee Lockers A A X X

Security grills and fire shutters A A X X

Fire protection system ME C X X Design-build based on Mechanical

Engineers specifications.

Fire Extinguishers A A X X

First Aid Cabinet and Supplies O O X X

Time Clock O O / EE X X Electrical as required by Contractor

Stainless steel countertops A A X X

Closet shelving A A X X

Interior Plants and Planters O O X X

Decorative Concrete Coating A A X X

Car Wash underground Tanks ME ME X X

Key Drop Box A A X X

Abbreviation

Owner O

Contractor C

Architect A

Structural Engineer SE

Mechanical Engineer ME

Electrical Engineer EE

Civil Engineer CE

Landscape Architect LA

Landscape Supplier LS

Signage Contractor SC

Audio Visual Contractor AV

Furniture Supplier FS

Equipment Supplier ES

Manufacturer Vendor MV

End of Chart

Page 5 of 5

JOB NAME Audi Birmingham

JOB NUMBER 13036

ARCHITECT Praxis3

CONTRACTOR

OWNER Sonic Automotive

SUBCONTRACTOR/VENDOR

SPECIFICATION SECTION

ITEM

SUBMITTAL NUMBER

SUBMITTAL DATE

ARCHITECT STAMP CONTRACTOR STAMP

CONSULTANT STAMP

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 01 4000-1BIRMINGHAM, AL QUALITY REQUIREMENTSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 01 4000QUALITY REQUIREMENTS


A. References and standards.B. Quality assurance submittals.C. Mock-ups.D. Control of installation.E. Tolerances.F. Testing and inspection services.G. Manufacturers' field services.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Document 00 3100 - Available Project Information: Soil investigation data.B. Document 00 7200 - General Conditions: Inspections and approvals required by public

authorities.C. Section 01 2100 - Allowances: Allowance for payment of testing services.D. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures.E. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C1021 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants;

2008.B. ASTM C1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates

for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation; 2013a.C. ASTM C1093 - Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Masonry; 2012.D. ASTM D3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the

Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction;2012a.

E. ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing,or Special Inspection; 2013c.

F. ASTM E543 - Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; 2009.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Testing Agency Qualifications:1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names

of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer.2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction

Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum ofremedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.

B. Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purposeof assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in thecontract documents, or for Owner's information.

C. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect andto Contractor.1. Include:

a. Date issued.b. Project title and number.


c. Name of inspector.d. Date and time of sampling or inspection.e. Identification of product and specifications section.f. Location in the Project.g. Type of test/inspection.h. Date of test/inspection.i. Results of test/inspection.j. Conformance with Contract Documents.k. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results.

2. Test report submittals are for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for thelimited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design conceptexpressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information.

D. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by themanufacturer and Contractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data.1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit

supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be

acceptable to Architect.E. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed

instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for theOwner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring specialattention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.

F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator orfor Owner.1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information

given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.G. Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for

Owner.1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information

given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.2. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by Architect

or Owner.1.05 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not includedin the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of thestandard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicablecodes.

B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, exceptwhere a specific date is established by applicable code.

C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until

Substantial Completion.E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification

from Architect before proceeding.F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor

those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inferenceotherwise in any reference document.

1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIESA. As indicated in individual specification sections, Owner or Contractor shall employ and pay for

services of an independent testing agency to perform other specified testing.


B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work inaccordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

C. Contractor Employed Agency:1. Testing agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM E329, ASTM E543, ASTM C1021,

ASTM C1077, and ASTM C1093.2. Inspection agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM D3740 and ASTM E329.3. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in the State in which the Project is located.4. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services.5. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals either by NIST or using an NIST

established Measurement Assurance Program, under a laboratory measurement qualityassurance program.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, andworkmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from

Architect before proceeding.D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent

tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more preciseworkmanship.

E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the

manufacturer.G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand

stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.3.02 MOCK-UPS

A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respectiveproduct specification sections.

B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices,flashings, seals, and finishes.

C. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work.D. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification

sections to be removed, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so.3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work.Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.

B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with ContractDocuments, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.

C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.3.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. See individual specification sections for testing required.B. Testing Agency Duties:

1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.


2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor inperformance of services.

3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specifiedstandards.

4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.5. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of

Work or products.6. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect.7. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.

C. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority:1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor.4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.

D. Contractor Responsibilities:1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be

used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs.2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to

manufacturers' facilities.3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:

a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected.b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be

tested/inspected.c. To facilitate tests/inspections.d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.

4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiringtesting/inspection services.

5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additionalsamples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.

6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspectionsrequired by Contractor beyond specified requirements.

E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performedby the same agency on instructions by Architect.

F. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for byContractor.

3.05 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICESA. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or

manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions ofsurfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust andbalance of equipment and other work as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.

B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that aresupplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.

3.06 DEFECT ASSESSMENTA. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will

direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment.END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 01 5000-1BIRMINGHAM, AL TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 01 5000TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS


A. Temporary utilities.B. Temporary telecommunications services.C. Temporary sanitary facilities.D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing.E. Security requirements.F. Vehicular access and parking.G. Waste removal facilities and services.H. Project identification sign.I. Field offices.

1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIESA. Provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting, water, heating and cooling, and ventilation

required for construction purposes.B. Existing facilities may not be used.C. New permanent facilities may not be used.D. Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water.

1.03 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICESA. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project

mobilization.B. Telecommunications services shall include:

1. Windows-based personal computer dedicated to project telecommunications, withnecessary software and laser printer.

2. Telephone Land Lines: One line, minimum; one handset per line.3. Internet Connections: Minimum of one; DSL modem or faster.4. Email: Account/address reserved for project use.5. Facsimile Service: Minimum of one dedicated fax machine/printer, with dedicated phone

line.6. Facsimile Service: Fax-to-email software on personal computer.

1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIESA. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization.B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.

1.05 BARRIERSA. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas

that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protectexisting facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations anddemolition, if any.

B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for publicrights-of-way and for public access to existing building, if any..

C. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.1.06 FENCING

A. Construction: Contractor's option.


B. Provide 6 foot (1.8 m) high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestriangates with locks.

1.07 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURESA. Provide temporary insulated weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate

acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating andmaintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections,and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardwareand locks.

1.08 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES (ONLY FOR RENOVATIONS WITH OWNER OCCUPANCY DURINGCONSTRUCTION)A. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as indicated to separate work areas from

Owner-occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner-occupied areas,and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment.

B. Construction: Framing and reinforced polyethylene sheet materials with closed joints andsealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces:1. STC rating of 35 in accordance with ASTM E90.2. Maximum flame spread rating of 75 in accordance with ASTM E84.

1.09 SECURITYA. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from

unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.B. Coordinate with Owner's security program. (For renovation projects with owner occupying the

building)1.10 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING

A. Comply with regulations relating to use of streets and sidewalks, access to emergency facilities,and access for emergency vehicles.

B. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner.C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.D. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets.E. Designated existing on-site roads may be used for construction traffic.F. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is

not adequate, provide additional off-site parking.1.11 WASTE REMOVAL

A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean andorderly condition.

B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site weekly.C. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable

non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structureunless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.

1.12 PROJECT IDENTIFICATIONA. Provide project identification sign of design and construction if indicated on Drawings.B. If not on the drawings, provide one eight by eight plywood sign on four by four posts. Sign

graphic design will be provided by the Architect. Include an allowance of on thousand dollars forthe plywood and graphic design production. Intallation and four by four post will are not includedin the allowance and are the contractor's sole responsibility.

C. Erect on site at location established by Architect.D. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law.


1.13 FIELD OFFICESA. Office: Weathertight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling equipment, and equipped

with sturdy furniture, drawing rack and drawing display table.B. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 6 persons.C. Locate offices a minimum distance of 30 feet (10 m) from existing and new structures, if

possible.1.14 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS

A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completioninspection.

B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet (600 mm). Grade site asindicated.

C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition.E. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 01 6000-1BIRMINGHAM, AL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 01 6000PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS


A. General product requirements.B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection.C. Product option requirements.D. Substitution limitations and procedures.E. Procedures for Owner-supplied products.F. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures prior

to bid date.B. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition

Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments andSupplements.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of

manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.1. Submit within 15 days after date of Agreement.2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards.

B. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy toidentify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers'standard data to provide information specific to this Project.

C. MSDS: Do NOT submit MSDS sheets. Submittal including MSDS sheets may be returnedwithout action.

D. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electricalcharacteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service forfunctional equipment and appliances.

E. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, withintegral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the

manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 NEW PRODUCTS

A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.B. DO NOT USE products having any of the following characteristics:

1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's.2. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber.

C. Where all other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that:1. Are extracted, harvested, and/or manufactured closer to the location of the project.2. Have longer documented life span under normal use.3. Result in less construction waste.


4. Are made of vegetable materials that are rapidly renewable.D. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacture for components being replaced.E. Motors: Refer to Section 22 0513, NEMA MG 1 Type. Specific motor type is specified in

individual specification sections.F. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes,

and materials indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box.G. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot (2 m) cord and plug including grounding connector for

connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual specificationsections.

2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONSA. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting

those standards or description.B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the

manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions:

Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.2.03 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified inindividual specification sections.

B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

A. Requests for substitutions will not be considered during the Bid period. Bidders can listsubstitutions for consideration on the Bid Form in the Alternatives sections. Substitutions willnot be included in the BASE BID.

B. Architect will consider requests for substitutions only within 15 days after date of Agreement.C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution

with Contract Documents.D. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:

1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the qualitylevel of the specified product.

2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the

Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become

apparent.5. Will reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with

re-approval by authorities.E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or

product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will requirerevision to the Contract Documents.

F. Substitution Submittal Procedure:1. Substitution Submittals will be transmitted using TANGENTWORKS 550.2. Submit one copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one

proposed substitution.3. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed

product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer.4. The Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request.


3.02 OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTSA. Owner's Responsibilities:

1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, toContractor.

2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site.3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor.4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient

items.5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections, and service.

B. Contractor's Responsibilities:1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with

Owner.3. Handle, store, install and finish products.4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt.

3.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLINGA. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site

storage time and potential damage to stored materials.B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of

surrounding areas.D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are

correct, and products are undamaged.E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage.F. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.

3.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTIONA. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to

installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due toexcessive materials handling and misapplication.

B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment

favorable to product.E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.F. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or

protection.G. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to

prevent condensation and degradation of products.H. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with

foreign matter.I. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.J. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage.K. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify

products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 01 7000-1BIRMINGHAM, AL EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 01 7000EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS


A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal,

and/or remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances.C. Cutting and patching.D. Surveying for laying out the work.E. Cleaning and protection.F. Starting of systems and equipment.G. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel.H. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures.I. General requirements for maintenance service.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures.B. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures.C. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures.D. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary interior partitions.E. Section 01 5100 - Temporary Utilities: Temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating facilities.F. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance

data, warranties and bonds.G. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations;

2013.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey

work.1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work.2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and

locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents.3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record.

C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects:1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.

D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities.1.05 QUALIFICATIONS

A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is locatedand acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurancecoverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate.


B. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specificservice on Project, licensed in the City and in the State in which the Project is located.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Use of explosives is not permitted.B. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain

pumping equipment.C. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site

from soil erosion.D. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent

accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.E. Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage

from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation.1. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time.2. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water flow.3. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or

clays.4. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly

apply corrective measures.F. Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects

from damaging the work.G. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil,

water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced byconstruction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.

1.07 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to

ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements,with provisions for accommodating items installed later.

B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible

with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilitiesfor installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical workthat are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, andconduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spacesefficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within theconstruction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work

and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner'sactivities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS

A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patchingand extending work.

B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products wherenecessary, referring to existing work as a standard.


C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitutiondescribed in Section 01 6000.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work.Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work beingapplied or attached.

C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize

waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication.E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct

locations.F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements

subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work,assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching meansacceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to

applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the siteprior to commencing work of the section.

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section.C. Notify Architect seven days in advance of meeting date.D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:

1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures.2. Review coordination with related work.

E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with twocopies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORKA. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered.C. Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points.D. Control datum for survey is that established by Owner provided survey.E. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points

during construction.F. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required

because of changes in grades or other reasons.G. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes

without prior written notice to Architect.H. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.


I. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similarappropriate means:1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement;

utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations.2. Grid or axis for structures.3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations.

J. Periodically verify layouts by same means.K. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.

3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTSA. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and

horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.

3.06 ALTERATIONS (ONLY APPLICABLE FOR RENOVATION PROJECTS)A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and

existing record documents only.1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Keep areas in which alterations are being conducted separated from other areas that are stilloccupied.1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction specified in

Section 01 5000 in locations indicated on drawings.C. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for

replacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage.1. Where openings in exterior enclosure exist, provide construction to make exterior

enclosure weatherproof.2. Insulate existing ducts or pipes that are exposed to outdoor ambient temperatures by

alterations work.D. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.

1. Remove rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replacewith new construction specified.

2. Remove items indicated on drawings.3. Relocate items indicated on drawings.4. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch,

and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish ifnecessary for successful application of new finish.

5. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damagedsurfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible, minimumrequirements will be not visible from a distance of 10 feet.

E. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, andTelecommunications): Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate newconstruction.1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to

equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access orprovide access panel.


2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents requirereactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution, and equipmentas required.

3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with newservices, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and readyfor service.a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize

duration of outages and coordinate outages with all building users.b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service.

4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities.5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above

accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stuband tag with identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for newconstruction.

F. Protect existing work to remain.1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.4. Patch in accordance with Cutting and Patching for new Work.

G. Adapt existing work to fit new work: Make as neat and smooth transition as possible.1. When existing finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not

possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division andmake recommendation to Architect.

2. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, reworkfloors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads.

3. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch (6 mm) or more occurs in existing work, submitrecommendation for providing a smooth transition for Architect review and requestinstructions.

4. Trim existing wood doors as necessary to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim as required.H. Patching: Where the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished, patch to match the

surface finish that existed prior to cutting. Where the surface is indicated to be refinished, patchso that the substrate is ready for the new finish.

I. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated:1. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surfaces

to remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacentfinishes.

2. If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, re-cover andrefinish to match.

J. Clean existing systems and equipment.K. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site;

do not burn or bury.L. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete.M. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section.

3.07 CUTTING AND PATCHINGA. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.B. See Alterations article above for additional requirements.C. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:

1. Complete the work.2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.


4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.

D. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriatesurfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore tooriginal condition.

E. At new work, employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moistureresistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.

F. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without priorapproval.

G. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.H. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.I. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids

with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 8400, to full thickness of the penetratedelement.

J. Patching:1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous

surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entireunit.

2. Match color, texture, and appearance.3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other

imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repairsubstrate prior to repairing finish.

3.08 PROGRESS CLEANINGA. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly

condition.B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed

or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning

to eliminate dust.D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose

off-site; do not burn or bury.3.09 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate

work area to prevent damage.D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement

of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is

necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing materialmanufacturer.

G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings ifpossible.


3.10 SYSTEM STARTUPA. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.B. Notify Architect and owner seven days prior to start-up of each item.C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive

rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by

the equipment or system manufacturer.E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's

representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized

representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or systeminstallation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

H. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioningcorrectly.

3.11 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONA. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to

date of Substantial Completion.B. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance,

and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location.C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other

season within six months.D. Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration

and instruction of owner personnel.E. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual

with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for

additional data becomes apparent during instruction.G. Video Recordings: Submit two digital video recordings of each denonstration and training

session for Owner's subsequent use.1. Format: DVD Disc.2. Label each disc and container with session identification and date.

3.12 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

3.13 FINAL CLEANINGA. Execute final cleaning prior to Substantial Completion.

1. Clean areas to be occupied by Owner prior to final completion before Owner occupancy.B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains

and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and softsurfaces.

D. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels ornameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment.

E. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to thesurface and material being cleaned.

F. Clean filters of operating equipment.


G. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.H. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.I. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site;

dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.3.14 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.1. Provide copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. C. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been

inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready forArchitect's review.

D. Prepare and submit to the Architect a list of incomplete and non-conforming work prior toArchitects Substantial Completion Inspection.

E. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply withrequirements for access to Owner-occupied areas.

F. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete.G. Complete items of work determined by Architect's final inspection.

3.15 MAINTENANCEA. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one

year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whicheveris longer.

C. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in speification sections for one yearfrom date of Substantial Completion.

D. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust,and lubricate as required.

E. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replaceparts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.

F. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor withoutprior written consent of the Owner.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 01 7419-1BIRMINGHAM, AL CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSALPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 01 7419CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible.B. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor

planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors.C. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as

economically feasible.D. Contractor shall submit periodic Waste Disposal Reports at a minimum with each pay request;

all landfill disposal, recycling, salvage, and reuse must be reported regardless of to whom thecost or savings accrues; use the same units of measure on all reports.

E. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are:1. Burning on the project site.2. Burying on the project site.3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private.4. Other illegal dumping or burying.

F. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatoryrequirements, including but not limited to Federal, state and local requirements, pertaining tolegal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials.

1.02 DEFINITIONSA. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the like.B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials,

packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair anddemolition operations.

C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity,toxicity or reactivity.

D. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility,corrosivity, toxicity, or reactivity.

E. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period ofexposure.

F. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle andremanufactured into a new product for reuse by others.

G. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufactureinto a new product for reuse by others.

H. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and otherdiscarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not includeburning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste.

I. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit.J. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site.K. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by

others.L. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well

production run-off water.M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning

from the first time they become waste.N. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure.

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 01 7419-2BIRMINGHAM, AL CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSALPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

O. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged.P. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use.

Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.PART 2 PRODUCTSPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES

A. See Section 01 3000 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittalprocedures, and project documentation.

B. See Section 01 5000 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removalfacilities and services.

C. See Section 01 6000 for waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, andhandling.

D. See Section 01 7000 for trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting andpatching, installation, protection, and cleaning.

3.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATIONA. Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and

overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan.B. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each

subcontractor, Owner, and Architect.C. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling,

salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of theproject.

D. Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings.1. Pre-bid meeting.2. Pre-construction meeting.3. Regular job-site meetings.

E. Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling,salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers.1. Provide containers as required.2. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors.3. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to

avoid contamination of materials.F. Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable

regulations.G. Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products

in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identifiedmaterials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order toprevent contamination of recyclable materials.

H. Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation forreuse.

I. Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site.END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 01 7800-1BIRMINGHAM, AL CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 01 7800CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS


A. Project Record Documents.B. Operation and Maintenance Data.C. Warranties and bonds.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 00 7200 - General Conditions: Performance bond and labor and material payment

bonds, warranty, and correction of work.B. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings,

product data, and samples.C. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures.D. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.E. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for

Payment.B. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents beforestart of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.

2. Submit three sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after finalinspection.

C. Warranties and Bonds:1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with

Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final

Application for Payment.3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial

Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as thebeginning of the warranty period.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:1. Drawings.2. Specifications.3. Addenda.4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.

B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products

installed, including the following:


1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.

F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual constructionincluding:1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum.2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,

referenced to permanent surface improvements.3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,

referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.4. Field changes of dimension and detail.5. Details not on original Contract drawings.

3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATAA. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of

Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and

data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and

systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents asmaintenance drawings.

D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructionsfor each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHESA. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish:

1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations.B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents

and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, andrecommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

C. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections.D. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed

instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation andmaintenance of the specific products.

3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMSA. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System:

1. Description of unit or system, and component parts.2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests.4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.

B. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printedinstructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation andmaintenance of the specific products.

C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions andsequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions.Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.

D. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventativemaintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; andalignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.

E. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.


F. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.G. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.H. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams

required for maintenance.I. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed.J. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities

to be maintained in storage.K. Include test and balancing reports.L. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.

3.05 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALSA. Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for Owner's personnel use,

with data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the specification sections.B. Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for

each system.C. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of

described products.D. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual.E. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch (216 by 280 mm) three D side ring binders with

durable plastic covers; 2 inch (50 mm) maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used,correlate data into related consistent groupings.

F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCEINSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.

G. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers ofArchitect, Consultants, Contractor and subcontractors, with names of responsible parties.

H. Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as onthe divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents ineach volume, with the current volume clearly identified.

I. Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contentson the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product andmajor component parts of equipment.

J. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper.K. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to

size of text pages.L. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this

Project Manual.M. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system

description identified, in three parts as follows:1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect,

Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by

specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephonenumbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following:a. Significant design criteria.b. List of equipment.c. Parts list for each component.d. Operating instructions.e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.


f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaningmethods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.

3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:a. Shop drawings and product data.b. Air and water balance reports.c. Certificates.d. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.

N. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space forinsertion of data.

O. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers ofArchitect, Consultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of productsand systems, indexed to content of the volume.

3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDSA. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers,

and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except foritems put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until theDate of Substantial completion is determined.

B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.C. Co-execute submittals when required.D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.E. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch (216 by 279 mm) three D side ring binders

with durable plastic covers.F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of

Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and nameof responsible company principal.

G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the ProjectManual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in whichspecified, and the name of product or work item.

H. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing.Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor,supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 03 0505-1BIRMINGHAM, AL UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIERPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 03 0505UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER


A. Sheet vapor barrier under concrete slabs on grade.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Preparation of subgrade, granular fill, placement ofconcrete.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water

Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2011.B. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with

Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2011.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Underslab Vapor Barrier:1. Water Vapor Permeance: Not more than 0.010 perms (0.6 ng/(s m2 Pa)), maximum.2. Complying with ASTM E1745 Class A.3. Thickness: _____ mils (10 mm).4. Basis of Design:

a. Reef Industries, Inc. Gryffolyn Type 105b. Fortifiber corporation, Moistop Ultra 15.c. Raven Industires, Vapor Block 15.d. Stego Industries, LLC, Stego Wrap 15 mil.e. W.R. Grace Construction Products, FlorPrufe 120f. W.R. Meadows, Inc. PERMINATOR Underslap Vapor Mat 15. g. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Accessory Products: Vapor barrier manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic, etc.,for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor barrier.


A. Verify that surface over which vapor barrier is to be installed is complete and ready beforeproceeding with installation of vapor barrier.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E1643.B. Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade; lap sheet over footings and seal to foundation

walls.C. Lap joints minimum 6 inches (150 mm).D. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and

follow manufacturer's written instructions.E. No penetration of vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities.

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 03 0505-2BIRMINGHAM, AL UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIERPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

F. Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering with other materials.END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 03 3000-1BIRMINGHAM, AL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETEPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 03 3000CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE


A. Concrete formwork.B. Concrete building frame members.C. Concrete for composite floor construction.D. Elevated concrete slabs.E. Floors and slabs on grade.F. Concrete shear walls, elevator shaft walls, and foundation walls.G. Concrete foundations and anchor bolts for pre-engineered building.H. Concrete reinforcement.I. Joint devices associated with concrete work.J. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads, light pole bases, flagpole bases,

thrust blocks, and manholes.K. Concrete curing.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 3511 - Concrete Floor Finishes: Densifiers, hardeners, applied coatings, and

polishing.B. Section 07 9513 - Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies.C. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Sealants for saw cut joints and isolation joints in slabs.D. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving: Sidewalks, curbs and gutters.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials;

American Concrete Institute International; 2010.B. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass

Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002).C. ACI 211.2 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete;

American Concrete Institute International; 1998 (Reapproved 2004).D. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; American Concrete Institute International;

2010.E. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute

International; 2004 (Errata 2007).F. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American

Concrete Institute International; 2000.G. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.H. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.I. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001

(Reapproved 2008).J. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American

Concrete Institute International; 2011.K. ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2004.L. ASTM A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for

Concrete; 2007.


M. ASTM A497/A497M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed,for Concrete; 2007.

N. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Billet-Steel Barsfor Concrete Reinforcement; 2013.

O. ASTM A767/A767M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars forConcrete Reinforcement; 2009.

P. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2013.Q. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens; 2012a.R. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2013.S. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2012.T. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012.U. ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the

Volumetric Method; 2012.V. ASTM C260/C260M - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a.W. ASTM C330/C330M - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural

Concrete; 2013.X. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2013.Y. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan

for Use in Concrete; 2012.Z. ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete;

2010.AA. ASTM C1059/C1059M - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to

Hardened Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2008).AB. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout

(Nonshrink); 2013.AC. ASTM C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures; 2012.AD. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with

Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2011.AE. COE CRD-C 48 - Method of Test for Water Permeability of Concrete; 1992.AF. COE CRD-C 572 - Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop; Corps of

Engineers; 1974.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with

specified requirements and installation instructions.1. For curing compounds, provide data on method of removal in the event of incompatibility

with floor covering adhesives.C. Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete mix design.

1. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 301, Section 4 - ConcreteMixtures.

D. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used.E. Samples: Submit two, 12 inch (305 mm) long samples of waterstops and construction joint

devices.F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: For concrete accessories, indicate installation

procedures and interface required with adjacent construction.


G. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities andcomponents that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work.

H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner'sname and registered with manufacturer.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.D. For slabs required to include moisture vapor reduction admixture (MVRA), do not proceed with

placement unless manufacturer's representative is present for every day of placement.1.06 MOCK-UP

A. Construct and erect mock-up panel for architectural concrete surfaces indicated to receivespecial treatment or finish as result of formwork.1. Panel Size: Sufficient to illustrate full range of treatment.

B. Accepted mock-up panel is considered basis of quality for the finished work. Keep mock-upexposed to view for duration of concrete work.

C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.1.07 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Slabs with Moisture Vapor Reducing Admixture (MVRA): Provide warranty to cover the cost of

flooring failures due to moisture migration from slabs for ten years.1. Include cost of repair or removal of failed flooring, placement of topical moisture

remediation system, and replacement of flooring with comparable flooring system.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FORMWORK

A. Formwork Design and Construction: Comply with guidelines of ACI 347 to provide formwork thatwill produce concrete complying with tolerances of ACI 117.

B. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstandhydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances.1. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with

application of coatings.2. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of

concrete surface.2.02 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 60 (420).1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars.2. Finish: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A767/A767M, Class I, unless otherwise

indicated.B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type.

1. Form: Flat Sheets.2. Mesh Size and Wire Gage: As indicated on drawings.

C. Reinforcement Accessories:1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage (1.5 mm).2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of

reinforcement during concrete placement.3. Provide stainless steel, galvanized, plastic, or plastic coated steel components for

placement within 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of weathering surfaces.


2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALSA. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal Portland type.

1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source.B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33.

1. Acquire all aggregates for entire project from same source.C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C330/C330M.D. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.E. Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Class N.F. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240, proportioned in accordance with ACI 211.1.G. Color Additives: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for mixing into

concrete and complying with ASTM C979.1. Concentration: Base dosage rates on weight of Portland cement, fly ash, silica fume, and

other cementitious materials but not aggregate or sand.2. Packaging: If pigments are to be added to mix at site, furnish pigments in premeasured

disintegrating bags to minimize job site waste.3. Color(s): As indicated on drawings.4. Products:

a. BRICKFORM; BRICKFORM Liquid Integral Color: www.brickform.com.b. Butterfield Color: www.butterfieldcolor.com.c. Davis Colors: www.daviscolors.com.d. Lambert Corporation: www.lambertusa.com.e. L.M. Scofield Company; CHROMIX® Admixtures for Color-Conditioned® Concrete:

www.scofield.com.f. Solomon Colors; Solomon ColorFlo Liquid Colors: www.solomoncolors.com.g. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

H. Waterproofing Additive: Crystalline waterproofing intended for mixing into concrete to closeconcrete pores by growth of crystals, with no decrease in concrete strength or chemicalresistance.1. Permeability of Cured Concrete: No measurable leakage when tested in accordance with

COE CRD-C 48 at 350 feet (106 m) of head; provide test reports.I. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.J. Fiber Reinforcement: Alkali-resistant polypropylene complying with ASTM C1116/C1116M.

1. Fiber Length: 0.25 inch (6 mm), nominal.2.04 ADMIXTURES

A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weightof cement.

B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.C. High Range Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type G.D. High Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type F.E. Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type E.F. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type D.G. Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type C.H. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type B.I. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type A.J. Moisture Vapor Reduction Admixture (MVRA): Liquid, inorganic admixture free of volatile

organic compounds (VOCs) and formulated to close capillary systems formed during curing to


reduce moisture vapor emission and transmission, with no adverse effect on concreteproperties.1. Provide admixture in all slabs to receive adhesively applied flooring or roofing.2. Show that concrete properties are not adversely affected by testing in accordance with

ASTM C494/C494M and submitting independent agency test reports.3. Show successful initial and long-term application of adhered flooring by submitting details

of ten (10) completed projects along with owner and contractor contact information forverification by Architect.

4. Admixture manufacturer shall provide a warranty guaranteeing to remove and replacefailed flooring and apply a moisture vapor barrier coating over failed slabs; term of warrantyshall be for the lifetime of the concrete construction from the date at which installation offlooring is approved by admixture manufacturer.

5. Contractor shall submit certification that he has received, understands, and will complywith admixture manufacturer's prerequisites for issuance of manufacturer's warranty;failure to comply with admixture manufacturer's prerequisites will result in assignment ofwarranty remedy costs to Contractor.

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Multi-layer, fabric-, cord-, grid-, or aluminum-reinforced

polyethylene or equivalent, complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer assuitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. The use ofsingle ply polyethylene is prohibited.1. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive,

mastic, prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor retarder.2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS

A. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C1059/C1059M,Type II.1. Products:

a. SpecChem, LLC; Strong Bond Acrylic Bonder: www.specchemllc.com.b. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; ACRY-LOK-: www.wrmeadows.com.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Waterstops: PVC, complying with COE CRD-C 572.1. Configuration: As indicated on the drawings.2. Size: As indicated on the drawings.

C. Reglets: Formed steel sheet, galvanized, with temporary filler to prevent concrete intrusionduring placement.1. Size: As indicated on drawings.

D. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removabletop section that will form 1/2 inch (13 mm) deep sealant pocket after removal.1. Material: Closed-cell, non-absorbent, compressible polyethylene or polymer foam in sheet

form.2. Products:

a. W.R. Meadows, Inc; Deck-O-Foam Joint Filler with pre-scored top strip:www.wrmeadows.com.

b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.E. Slab Construction Joint Devices: Combination keyed joint form and screed, galvanized steel,

with minimum 1 inch (25 mm) diameter holes for conduit or rebars to pass through at 6 inches(150 mm) on center; ribbed steel stakes for setting.

F. Sealant and Primer: As specified in Section 07 9005.2.07 CURING MATERIALS

A. Curing Compound, Naturally Dissipating: Clear, water-based, liquid membrane-formingcompound; complying with ASTM C309.


1. Provide product containing fugitive red dye.2. Products:

a. SpecChem, LLC; SpecRez: www.specchemllc.com.b. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; 1100-Clear: www.wrmeadows.com.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.2.08 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.B. Proportioning Structural Lightweight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.2 recommendations.C. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis

of trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301.1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for

preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.D. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates

recommended or required by manufacturer.E. Fiber Reinforcement: Add to mix at rate of 1.5 pounds per cubic yard (0.89 kg per cubic meter),

or as recommended by manufacturer for specific project conditions.F. Normal Weight Concrete:

1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days:4,000 pounds per square inch (27.6 MPa).

2. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight.3. Total Air Content: 4 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M.4. Maximum Slump: 3 inches (75 mm).

2.09 MIXINGA. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.


A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support allapplied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete.

B. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.C. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of

form accessories.D. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by

cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions.1. Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications.

E. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete,insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout.

F. Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap jointsminimum 6 inches (150 mm). Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight withmanufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repairdamaged vapor retarder before covering.


3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMSA. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and

accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concretecoverage required for protection.

B. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in bothdirections. Splice laps with tie wire.

C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete areaccurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement.

3.04 PLACING CONCRETEA. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.C. Notify Architect not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations.D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint

devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement.E. Place concrete continuously without construction (cold) joints wherever possible; where

construction joints are necessary, before next placement prepare joint surface by removinglaitance and exposing the sand and sound surface mortar, by sandblasting or high-pressurewater jetting.

F. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below.3.05 SLAB JOINTING

A. Locate joints as indicated on the drawings.B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement.C. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total

height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab.1. Install wherever necessary to separate slab from other building members, including

columns, walls, equipment foundations, footings, stairs, manholes, sumps, and drains.D. Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, within 4 to 12 hours

after placing; use 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick blade and cut at least 1 inch (25 mm) deep but not lessthan one quarter (1/4) the depth of the slab.

E. Construction Joints: Where not otherwise indicated, use metal combination screed and keyform, with removable top section for joint sealant.

3.06 SEPARATE FLOOR TOPPINGSA. Prior to placing floor topping, roughen substrate concrete surface and remove deleterious

material. Broom and vacuum clean.B. Place required dividers, edge strips, reinforcing, and other items to be cast in.C. Apply bonding agent to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.D. Apply sand and cement slurry coat on base course, immediately prior to placing toppings.E. Place concrete floor toppings to required lines and levels.F. Screed toppings level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1:1000.

3.07 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness:

1. Exposed Concrete Floors: 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 10 ft (3 m).2. Under Seamless Resilient Flooring: 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 10 ft (3 m).3. Under Carpeting: 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 10 ft (3 m).

B. Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified.


C. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areasrequiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.

3.08 CONCRETE FINISHINGA. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork.B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch (6 mm) or

more in height.C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch (6

mm) or more in height. Provide finish as follows:1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive,

not more than 24 hours after form removal.3.09 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete frompremature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for periodnecessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period.D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:

1. Slabs and Floors To Receive Adhesive-Applied Flooring: Curing compounds and othersurface coatings are usually considered unacceptable by flooring and adhesivemanufacturers. If such materials must be used, either obtain the approval of the flooringand adhesive manufacturers prior to use or remove the surface coating after curing toflooring manufacturer's satisfaction.

2. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry.Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturatedsand, water-fog spray, or saturated burlap.

3. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry.3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 014000.

B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review

prior to commencement of concrete operations.D. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete

test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cu yd (76 cu m) or less of each class ofconcrete placed.

E. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under sameconditions as concrete it represents.

F. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTMC143/C143M.

G. Slab Testing: Cooperate with manufacturer of specified moisture vapor reduction admixture(MVRA) to allow access for sampling and testing concrete for compliance with warrantyrequirements.

3.11 DEFECTIVE CONCRETEA. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor

within 24 hours of test.B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances

or specified requirements.


C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost ofadditional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.

D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express directionof Architect for each individual area.

3.12 PROTECTIONA. Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 03 3511-1BIRMINGHAM, AL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES-POLISHED CONCRETEPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 03 3511CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES-POLISHED CONCRETE


A. Surface treatments for concrete floors and slabs. Polished Concrete.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Finishing of concrete surface to tolerance; floating,troweling, and similar operations; curing.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordinate the work with concrete floor placement and concrete floor curing.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on each finishing product, including information

on compatibility of different products and limitations.C. Maintenance Data: Provide data on maintenance and renewal of applied finishes.

1.05 MOCK-UPA. For polished concrete, construct mock-up area under conditions similar to those that will exist

during application, with coatings applied.B. Mock-Up Size: 10 feet (3 m) square.C. Locate where directed.D. Mock-up may remain as part of the work.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain light level equivalent to a minimum 200 W light source at 8 feet (2.5 m) above the floor

surface over each 20 foot (6 m) square area of floor being finished.B. Do not finish floors until interior heating system is operational.C. Maintain ambient temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) minimum.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH APPLICATIONS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all concrete floors are to be finished using liquid densifier/hardener.B. Liquid Densifier/Hardener:C. Polished Finish:

2.02 DENSIFIERS AND HARDENERSA. Liquid Densifier/Hardener: Penetrating chemical compound that reacts with concrete, filling the

pores and dustproofing; for application to concrete prior to set.1. Composition: Lithium silicate.2. Products:

a. L.M. Scofield Company; SCOFIELD® Formula One™ Lithium Densifier MP:www.scofield.com.

b. Edwards Concrete Company; Transcrete.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 03 3511-2BIRMINGHAM, AL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES-POLISHED CONCRETEPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

2.03 POLISHED CONCRETE SYSTEMA. Polished Concrete System: Materials, equipment, and procedures designed and furnished by a

single manufacturer to produce dense polished concrete of the specified sheen.1. Acceptable Systems:

a. Edwards Concrete Company; Transcrete system. (407) 656-2139.b. Substitutions: Not permitted.


A. Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this section.B. Verify that flaws in concrete have been patched and joints filled with methods and materials

suitable for further finishes.3.02 GENERAL

A. Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.3.03 CONCRETE POLISHING

A. Execute using materials, equipment, and procedures specified by manufacturer, usingmanufacturer approved installer.1. Satin Finish: Reflecting images from side lighting.

B. Protect finished surface as required and recommended by manufacturer of polishing system.C. Recommended installation of Ram Board or equal to protect floor surface. Do not cover with

plastic sheeting.END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 03 3511.14-1BIRMINGHAM, AL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES-ASHFORD FORMULAPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 03 3511.14CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES-ASHFORD FORMULA


A. Surface treatments for concrete floors and slabs.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Finishing of concrete surface to tolerance; floating,troweling, and similar operations; curing.

B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Curing compounds that also function as sealers.1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate the work with concrete floor placement and concrete floor curing.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on each finishing product, including information

on compatibility of different products and limitations.C. Maintenance Data: Provide data on maintenance and renewal of applied finishes.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain light level equivalent to a minimum 200 W light source at 8 feet (2.5 m) above the floor

surface over each 20 foot (6 m) square area of floor being finished.B. Do not finish floors until interior heating system is operational.C. Maintain ambient temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) minimum.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH APPLICATIONS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all concrete floors are to be finished using liquid densifier/hardener.2.02 DENSIFIERS AND HARDENERS

A. Liquid Densifier/Hardener: Ashford Formula-Penetrating chemical compound that reacts withconcrete, filling the pores and dustproofing; for application to concrete prior to set.1. Composition: proprietary to Curecrete.2. Products:

a. Curecrete Distribution, Inc.1) 1203 W. Spring Creek Place, Springville, UT 84663-0551; Telephone (800)

998-5664b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.


A. Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this section.B. Verify that flaws in concrete have been patched and joints filled with methods and materials

suitable for further finishes.3.02 GENERAL

A. Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 03 3511.14-2BIRMINGHAM, AL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES-ASHFORD FORMULAPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

3.03 COATING APPLICATIONA. Verify that surface is free of previous coatings, sealers, curing compounds, water repellents,

laitance, efflorescence, fats, oils, grease, wax, soluble salts, residues from cleaning agents, andother impediments to adhesion.

B. Verify that water vapor emission from concrete and relative humidity in concrete are within limitsestablished by coating manufacturer.

C. Protect adjacent non-coated areas from drips, overflow, and overspray; immediately removeexcess material.

3.04 INSTALLATIONA. New Concrete: Apply cure-seal-hardener to new concrete as soon as the concrete is firm

enough to work on after troweling.B. New Colored Concrete: Delay application a minimum of 30 days after troweling.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Execute using materials, equipment, and procedures specified by manufacturer, using

manufacturer approved installer.B. Protect finished surface as required and recommended for 3 months until chemical reaction

process is complete.1. Do not allow traffic on floors for 3 hours after application.

a. Do not allow vehicle parking on concrete slab.b. Temporary vehicle parking, only if slab protected by drop cloths.c. Do not allow pipe cutting machinery on concrete slab.d. Do not allow any steel members on slab.e. Clean/remove spills immediately, spot treat stains with degreaser or oil emulsifier.f. Clean floor regularly in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 04 2000-1BIRMINGHAM, AL UNIT MASONRYPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 04 2000UNIT MASONRY


A. Concrete Block.B. Concrete Brick.C. Clay Facing Brick.D. Common Brick.E. Hollow Brick.F. Mortar and Grout.G. Reinforcement and Anchorage.H. Flashings.I. Lintels.J. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels.B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Nailing strips built into masonry.C. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Insulation for cavity spaces.D. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Backing rod and sealant at control and expansion joints.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures

and Related Commentaries; American Concrete Institute International; 2011.B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.C. ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement;

2007.D. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.E. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel

Plate, Sheet, and Strip; 1999 (Reapproved 2009).F. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement; 2013.G. ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire;

2009a.H. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.I. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2013.J. ASTM C55 - Standard Specification for Concrete Building Brick; 2011.K. ASTM C62 - Standard Specification for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or

Shale); 2013.L. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2013.M. ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2012.N. ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2011.


O. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2011.P. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012.Q. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006

(Reapproved 2011).R. ASTM C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or

Shale); 2013.S. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2012.T. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2011.U. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2010.V. ASTM C652 - Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay

or Shale); 2013.W. ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete;

2010.X. ASTM C1634 - Standard Specification for Concrete Facing Brick; 2011.Y. ASTM E514/E514M - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through

Masonry; 2011.Z. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting two weeks before starting work of

this section; require attendance by all relevant installers.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, mortar, and

masonry accessories.C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of thecontract documents.1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site.

1.07 MOCK-UPA. Construct a masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 8 feet (2.4 m) long by 6 feet (1.8 m) high;

include mortar and accessories and structural backup in mock-up.B. Locate where directed.C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and

contamination by other materials.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches (400 x 200 mm) and

nominal depth of 8 inches (200 mm).2. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard blocks configured for corners.3. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, normal weight.


a. Hollow block, as indicated.4. Non-Loadbearing Units: ASTM C129.

a. Hollow block, as indicated.B. Concrete Brick:

1. For architectural and paver use, ASTM C1634 (or ASTM C55-03 Grade N), non-cored(solid), normal weight.

2. Size: As indicated on drawings.2.02 BRICK UNITS

A. Manufacturers:1. As indicated on the Drawings

a. Substitutions: Not permitted.B. Facing Brick: ASTM C216, Type FBS, Grade SW.

1. Color and texture to match Architect's sample.2. Nominal size: As indicated on drawings.3. Special shapes: Molded units as required by conditions indicated, unless standard units

can be sawn to produce equivalent effect.C. Building (Common) Brick: ASTM C62, Grade SW; solid units.

1. Nominal size: As indicated on drawings.D. Hollow Facing and Building Brick: ASTM C652, Grade SW; Type HBS; Class H40V.

1. Nominal size: As indicated on drawings.2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type N.1. Colored mortar: Premixed cement as required to match Architect's color sample.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I; color as required to produce approved color sample.C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.D. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144.E. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.F. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for

mixing into mortar and complying with ASTM C979.1. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.2. Manufacturers:

a. Davis Colors: www.daviscolors.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

G. Water: Clean and potable.H. Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in cold weather.I. Moisture-Resistant Admixture: Water repellent compound designed to reduce capillarity.

2.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGEA. Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors:

1. Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com.2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wal brand): www.h-b.com.3. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 40 (280) deformed billet bars; galvanized.C. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss or ladder type; ASTM A1064/A1064M steel wire, mill

galvanized to ASTM A641/A641M, Class 3; 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm) side rods with 0.1483 inch


(3.8 mm) cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch (25 mm) and not lessthan 1/2 inch (13 mm) of mortar coverage on each exposure.

D. Multiple Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; fabricated with moisture drip; ASTMA1064/A1064M steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A153/153M, Class B;0.1483 inch (3.8 mm) side rods with 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm) cross rods; width as required toprovide not more than 1 inch (25 mm) and not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) of mortar coverageon each exposure.

E. Flexible Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry andbuilding frame, sized to provide not more than 1 inch (25 mm) and not less than 1/2 inch (13mm) of mortar coverage from masonry face.1. Concrete frame: Dovetail anchors of bent steel strap, nominal 1 inch (25 mm) width x

0.024 in (0.61 mm) thick, with trapezoidal wire ties 0.1875 inch (4.75 mm) thick, hot dipgalvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

F. Two-Piece Wall Ties: Formed steel wire, 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm) thick, adjustable, eye and pintletype, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B, sized to provide not more than 1 inch(25 mm) and not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) of mortar coverage from masonry face and to allowvertical adjustment of up to 1-1/4 in (32 mm).

G. Masonry Veneer Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonryveneer and structural backup, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.1. Anchor plates: Not less than 0.075 inch (1.91 mm) thick, designed for fastening to

structural backup through sheathing by two fasteners; provide design with legs thatpenetrate sheathing and insulation to provide positive anchorage.

2. Wire ties: Manufacturer's standard shape, 0.1875 inch (4.75 mm) thick.3. Vertical adjustment: Not less than 3-1/2 inches (89 mm).

2.05 FLASHINGSA. Copper/Rubberized Asphalt Flashing: 3 oz/sq ft (0.915 kg/sq m) copper sheet coated with

elastic asphalt compound.1. Manufacturer:

a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; H & B C-Coat Flashing: www.h-b.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Flashing Sealant/Adhesive: Butyl type as specified in Section 07 9005.2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fusedjoints.1. Manufacturers:

a. Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com.b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wal brand): www.h-b.com.c. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding;1/2 inch (____ mm) wide x by maximum lengths available.1. Manufacturers:

a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur -O-Wal brand): www.h-b.com.b. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Cavity Mortar Control: Semi-rigid polyethylene or polyester mesh panels, sized to thickness ofwall cavity, and designed to prevent mortar droppings from clogging weeps and cavity vents andallow proper cavity drainage.1. Mortar Diverter: Semi-rigid mesh designed for installation at flashing locations.

a. Manufacturers:1) Advanced Building Products Inc; Mortar Break: www.advancedflashing.com.


2) Mortar Net Solutions; Mortar Net with Insect Barrier: www.mortarnet.com.3) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Weeps: plastic weep tubes, 3/8" O.D. with screens and wicks for all areas except grade level,at grade level install open head joints..1. Manufacturers:

a. Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com.b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com.c. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

E. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.2.07 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, using the Proportion Specification.1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type S.2. Exterior, loadbearing masonry: Type N.3. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type N.4. Interior, loadbearing masonry: Type N.5. Interior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type O.

B. Colored Mortar: Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match Architect'ssample, without exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment-to-cement ratio.

C. Grout: ASTM C476. Consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; finegrout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches (50 mm) or less; coarse groutfor spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches (50 mm).

D. Admixtures: Add to mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate and in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.

E. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections.B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building

structure provides permanent bracing.3.03 COURSING

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform

thickness.C. Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Bond: Running.2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches (200 mm).3. Mortar Joints: Concave.

D. Brick Units:1. Bond: Running.2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches (200 mm).3. Mortar Joints: Concave.


3.04 PLACING AND BONDINGA. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other

work.B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.D. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.E. Interlock intersections and external corners.F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped

edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.G. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled or resilient base is scheduled.H. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or

decks with compressible joint filler.3.05 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS

A. Install weeps in veneer and cavity walls at ____ inches (16 mm) on center horizontally abovethrough-wall flashing, above shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls.

3.06 CAVITY MORTAR CONTROLA. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep/cavity vents.B. For cavity walls, build inner wythe ahead of outer wythe to accommodate accessories.C. Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity and at other flashing locations as recommended

by manufacturer to prevent mortar droppings from blocking weep/cavity vents.3.07 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - GENERAL

A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontaljoint reinforcement 16 inches (400 mm) on center.

B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and belowopenings. Extend minimum 16 inches (400 mm) each side of opening.

C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm).E. Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid. Unless

otherwise indicated on drawings or closer spacing is indicated under specific wall type, spaceanchors at maximum of ___ inches (16 mm) horizontally and 16 inches (400 mm) vertically.

3.08 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - SINGLE WYTHE MASONRYA. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 8 inches (200 mm) on center.B. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm).

3.09 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - MASONRY VENEERA. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches (400 mm) on center.B. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm).C. Masonry Back-Up: Embed anchors to bond veneer at maximum 16 inches (400 mm) on center

vertically and 24 inches (600 mm) on center horizontally. Place additional anchors at perimeterof openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of anchors is 8 inches (200 mm) oncenter.

D. Stud Back-Up: Secure veneer anchors to stud framed back-up and embed into masonryveneer at maximum 16 inches (400 mm) on center vertically and 24 inches (600 mm) on centerhorizontally. Place additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends of panels, somaximum spacing of anchors is 8 inches (200 mm) on center.


3.10 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES - CAVITY WALL MASONRYA. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches (400 mm) on center.B. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm).

3.11 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES - MULTIPLE WYTHE UNIT MASONRYA. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches (400 mm) on center.B. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm).C. Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid. Space

anchors at maximum of ___ inches (16 mm) horizontally and 16 inches (400 mm) vertically.3.12 MASONRY FLASHINGS

A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at alllocations where downward flow of water will be interrupted.1. Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at least 4 inches (100 mm) into

adjacent masonry or turn up at least 4 inches (100 mm) to form watertight pan atnon-masonry construction.

2. Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashings.3. Seal lapped ends and penetrations of flashing before covering with mortar.

B. Extend metal flashings to within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of exterior face of masonry.C. Lap end joints of flashings at least 6 inches (152 mm) and seal watertight with mastic or elastic

sealant.D. Form end dams at flashing terminations.

3.13 LINTELSA. Install loose steel lintels over openings.B. Maintain minimum 8 inch (200 mm) bearing on each side of opening.

3.14 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTSA. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints.B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07 9005 for sealant performance.

3.15 BUILT-IN WORKA. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and other items to be built into the work

and furnished under other sections.B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line.

3.16 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation from Alignment of Columns: 1/4 inch (6 mm).B. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).C. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft (6 mm/3 m) and 1/2 inch in 20 ft (13

mm/6 m) or more.D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch (13 mm) in

two stories or more.E. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft (3 mm/m) and 1/4 inch in 10 ft (6

mm/3 m); 1/2 inch in 30 ft (13 mm/9 m).F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft (3 mm/m).G. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch (6 mm).


3.17 CUTTING AND FITTINGA. Cut and fit for chases. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape,

and location.B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or

strength of masonry work may be impaired.3.18 CLEANING

A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.

3.19 PROTECTIONA. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that

are subject to damage by construction activities.END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 05 1200-1BIRMINGHAM, AL STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMINGPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 05 1200STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING


A. Structural steel framing members, support members, sag rods, and struts.B. Base plates, shear stud connectors and expansion joint plates.C. Grouting under base plates.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 2100 - Steel Joist Framing.B. Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking: Support framing for small openings in deck.C. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2011.B. AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of

Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005.C. AISC S348 - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts; 2004.D. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.E. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless; 2012.F. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished; 2013.G. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.H. ASTM A242/A242M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel; 2004

(Reapproved 2009).I. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000

PSI Tensile Strength; 2012.J. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.K. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing; 2007.L. ASTM A514/A514M - Standard Specification for High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered

Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding; 2005 (Reapproved 2009).M. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2011.N. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout

(Nonshrink); 2013.O. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination;

American Welding Society; 2012.P. IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel;

International Accreditation Service, Inc.; 2011.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments,and fasteners.


2. Connections not detailed.3. Indicate cambers and loads.4. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.

C. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification withinthe previous 12 months.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual."B. Comply with Section 10 of AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for

architecturally exposed structural steel.C. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five

years of experience.D. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the International

Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC172).E. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years of

experience.F. Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a Professional

Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which theProject is located.


A. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M.B. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M.C. Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 242/A 242M high-strength, corrosion-resistant

structural steel.D. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B.E. Hot-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A501, seamless or welded.F. Steel Plate: ASTM A514/A514M.G. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B, Finish black.H. Shear Stud Connectors: Made from ASTM A 108 Grade 1015 bars. I. Sag Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.J. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade A galvanized to ASTM A 153/A

153M, Class C.K. Grout: Non-shrink, non-metallic aggregate type, complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M and

capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi (48 MPa) at 28 days. L. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of

authorities having jurisdiction.M. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC

limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.2.02 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible.B. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Grind exposed welds smooth.C. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors.D. Develop required camber for members.


2.03 FINISHA. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field

welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work mayproperly proceed.

3.02 ERECTIONA. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings

and Bridges".B. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe

condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanentbracing.

C. Field weld components and shear studs indicated on shop drawings.D. Use carbon steel bolts only for temporary bracing during construction, unless otherwise

specifically permitted on drawings. Install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC"Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts".

E. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect.F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in

contact with concrete.G. Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's

instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45degrees.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story, non-cumulative.B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 05 2100-1BIRMINGHAM, AL STEEL JOIST FRAMINGPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 05 2100STEEL JOIST FRAMING


A. Open web steel joists and shear stud connectors, with bridging, attached seats and anchors.B. Loose bearing members, such as plates or angles, and anchor bolts for site placement.C. Supplementary framing for floor and roof openings greater than 18 inches (450 mm).

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Grouting base plates and bearing plates.

Superstructure framing.B. Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking: Bearing plates and angles.C. Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking: Support framing for openings less than 18 inches (450 mm)

in decking.D. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Non-framing steel fabrications attached to joists.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.B. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished; 2013.C. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products; 2013.D. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.E. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000

PSI Tensile Strength; 2012.F. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.G. IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel;

International Accreditation Service, Inc.; 2011.H. SJI (SPEC) - Catalog of Standard Specifications and Load Tables for Steel Joists and Joist

Girders; Steel Joist Institute; 2011.I. SJI Technical Digest No. 9 - Handling and Erection of Steel Joists and Joist Girders; Steel Joist

Institute; 2008.J. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for

Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).K. SSPC-Paint 25 - Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel, Type

I and Type II; Society for Protective Coatings; 1997 (Ed. 2004).L. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004).

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate standard designations, joist coding, configurations, sizes, spacings,

cambers, locations of joists, joist leg extensions, bridging, connections, and attachments.C. Welders' Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificates, certifying welders employed on the

Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a ProfessionalStructural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which theProject is located.


B. Perform Work, including that for headers and other supplementary framing, in accordance withSJI Standard Specifications Load Tables and SJI Technical Digest No.9.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section withminimum five years documented experience.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the InternationalAccreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC172).

E. Erector Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section withminimum five years experience.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Transport, handle, store, and protect products to SJI requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Steel Joists:1. Canam Group Inc: www.canam-steeljoists.ws2. Nucor-Vulcraft Group: www.vulcraft.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MATERIALS (TO BE SELECTED BY PROJECT ENGINEER)A. Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A 307, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M,

Class C.B. Shear Stud Connectors: Made from ASTM A 108 Grade 1015 bars.C. Structural Steel For Supplementary Framing and Joist Leg Extensions: ASTM A 36/A 36M.D. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.E. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities

having jurisdiction.F. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with

VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.2.03 FABRICATION

A. Frame special sized openings in joist web framing as detailed.B. Space stud shear connectors on top of top chords at ____ inches (24 mm) on center.

2.04 FINISHA. Galvanize joists as specified.

1. Galvanize steel ledge angles.2. Leave other steel members unprimed.

B. Prepare surfaces to be finished in accordance with SSPC-SP 2.C. Galvanizing: Provide minimum 1.7 oz/sq ft (530 g/sq m) galvanized coating to ASTM

A123/A123M requirements.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.3.02 ERECTION

A. Erect joists with correct bearing on supports.B. Allow for erection loads. Provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain framing safe, plumb,

and in true alignment.


C. Coordinate the placement of anchors for securing loose bearing members furnished as part ofthe work of this section.

D. After joist alignment and installation of framing, field weld joist seats to steel bearing surfaces.E. Install supplementary framing for floor and roof openings greater than 18 inches (450 mm).F. Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced bridged, and secured or until completion

of erection and installation of permanent bridging and bracing.G. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of joist manufacturer.H. After erection, prime welds, damaged shop primer, damaged galvanizing, and surfaces not

shop primed, except surfaces specified not to be primed.3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm).B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 05 3100-1BIRMINGHAM, AL STEEL DECKINGPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 05 3100STEEL DECKING


A. Roof deck.B. Composite floor deck.C. Metal form deck.D. Supplementary framing for openings up to and including 18 inches (450 mm).E. Bearing plates and angles.F. Stud shear connectors.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing.B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete topping over metal deck.C. Section 04 2723 - Cavity Wall Unit Masonry: Placement of anchors for bearing plates

embedded in cavity wall masonry.D. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Support framing for openings larger than 18 inches

(450 mm) and shear stud connectors.E. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel: Placement of embedded steel anchors for bearing plates in

cast-in-place concrete.F. Section 05 2100 - Steel Joist Framing: Support framing for openings larger than 18 inches (450

mm) and shear stud connectors.G. Section 05 2100 - Steel Joist Framing: Placement of embedded steel anchors for bearing

plates and joist seats in cast-in-place concrete.H. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel angle concrete stops at deck edges.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.B. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished; 2013.C. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products; 2013.D. ASTM A510/A510M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and

Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel, and Alloy Steel; 2013.E. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.F. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel;

2013.G. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.H. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; American Welding Society; 2008.I. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.J. IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel;

International Accreditation Service, Inc.; 2011.K. ICC-ES AC43 - Acceptance Criteria for Steel Deck Roof and Floor Systems; ICC Evaluation

Service, Inc.; 2010 (R2013).L. ICC-ES AC70 - Acceptance Criteria for Fasteners Power Driven into Concrete, Steel and

Masonry Elements; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.; 2013.


M. SDI (DM) - Publication No.31, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks;Steel Deck Institute; 2007.

N. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; The Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).O. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); The Society for

Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, projections, openings, reinforcement,

pertinent details, and accessories.C. Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and

finishes.D. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within

the previous 12 months.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Design deck layout, spans, fastening, and joints under direct supervision of a ProfessionalStructural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which theProject is located.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the InternationalAccreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC172).

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section withminimum five years of experience.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Cut plastic wrap to encourage ventilation.B. Separate sheets and store deck on dry wood sleepers; slope for positive drainage.


A. Steel Deck:1. Canam Steel Corporation: www.canam-steeljoists.ws.2. Cordeck, Inc: www.cordeck.com.3. Nucor-Vulcraft Group: www.vulcraft.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 STEEL DECKA. All Deck Types: Select and design metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual.

1. Calculate to structural working stress design and structural properties specified.2. Maximum Vertical Deflection of Floor Deck: 1/360 of span.3. Maximum Vertical Deflection of Roof Deck: 1/240 of span.

B. Roof Deck: Non-composite type, fluted steel sheet:1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) , with G90/Z275

galvanized coating.a. Grade as required to meet performance criteria.

2. Minimum Metal Thickness, Excluding Finish: 22 gage (0.8 mm).3. Nominal Height: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm).4. Profile: Fluted; SDI NR.5. Formed Sheet Width: 24 inch (600 mm).6. Side Joints: Lock seam.7. End Joints: Lapped, welded.


C. Composite Floor Deck: Fluted steel sheet embossed to interlock with concrete:1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) , with G90/Z275

galvanized coating.a. Grade as required to meet performance criteria.

2. Span Design: Double.3. Minimum Metal Thickness, Excluding Finish: 22 gage (0.8 mm).4. Nominal Height: 2 inches (51 mm).5. Profile: Fluted; SDI NR.6. Formed Sheet Width: 24 inch (600 mm).7. Side Joints: Lock seam.8. End Joints: Lapped, welded.

2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Bearing Plates and Angles: ASTM A36/A36M steel, unfinished.B. Stud Shear Connectors: Made from ASTM A108 Grade 1015 bars.C. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1.D. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self tapping.E. Powder Actuated Mechanical Fasteners: Steel; with knurled shank and forged ballistic point.

Comply with applicable requirements of ICC-ES AC70.1. Design Requirements: Provide number and type of fasteners that comply with the

applicable requirements of SDI design method for roof deck and floor deck applicationsand ICC-ES AC43.

2. Material: Steel; ASTM A510/A510M, Grade 1077.3. Products:

a. Simpson Strong-Tie; XQ114S1224: www.strongtie.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

F. Mechanical Fasteners: Steel; hex washer head, self-drilling, self-tapping.1. Design Requirements for Sidelap Connections: Provide number and type of fasteners that

comply with the applicable requirements of SDI design method for roof deck and floor deckapplications and ICC-ES AC43.

2. Fasteners for Steel Roof Decks Protected with Waterproofing Membrane: ASTM B 633,SC1, Type III zinc electroplate.

3. Products:a. ITW Commercial Construction North America; ITW CCNA-Buildex Teks Select

Series; ________: www.ITWBuildex.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

G. Weld Washers: Mild steel, uncoated, 3/4 inch (19 mm) outside diameter, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.H. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, complying with VOC limitations of

authorities having jurisdiction.I. Flute Closures: Closed cell foam rubber, 1 inch (25 mm) thick; profiled to fit tight to the deck.

2.04 FABRICATED DECK ACCESSORIESA. Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Metal closure strips, wet concrete stops, and cover plates, 22

gage (0.8 mm) thick sheet steel; of profile and size as indicated; finished same as deck.B. Roof Sump Pans: 14 gage (1.8 mm thick) sheet steel, flat bottom, sloped sides, recessed 1-1/2

inches (38 mm) below roof deck surface, bearing flange 3 inches (75 mm) wide, sealedwatertight.


A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.


3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacturer's instructions. Align

and level.B. On concrete and masonry surfaces provide minimum 4 inch (100 mm) bearing.C. On steel supports provide minimum 3 inch (75 mm) bearing.D. Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports at 12 inches (300

mm) on center maximum, parallel with the deck flute and at each transverse flute usingmethods specified.1. Welding: Use fusion welds through weld washers.

E. Clinch lock seam side laps.F. At mechanically fastened male/female side laps fasten at 24 inches (600 mm) on center

maximum.G. Drive mechanical sidelap connectors completely through adjacent lapped sheets; positively

engage adjacent sheets with minimum three-thread penetration.H. At welded male/female side laps weld at 18 inches (450 mm) on center maximum.I. Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3.J. At deck openings from 6 inches (150 mm) to 18 inches (450 mm) in size, provide 2 x 2 x 1/4

inch (50 x 50 x 6 mm) steel angle reinforcement. Place angles perpendicular to flutes; extendminimum two flutes beyond each side of opening and fusion weld to deck at each flute.

K. Where deck (other than cellular deck electrical raceway) changes direction, install 6 inch (150mm) minimum wide sheet steel cover plates, of same thickness as deck. Fusion weld 12inches (300 mm) on center maximum.

L. At floor edges, install concrete stops upturned to top surface of slab, to contain wet concrete.Provide stops of sufficient strength to remain stationary without distortion.

M. At openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings, provide sheet steel closures andangle flashings to close openings.

N. Close openings above walls and partitions perpendicular to deck flutes with single row of foamcell closures.

O. Position roof drain pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fusion weld at each deckflute.

P. Weld stud shear connectors through steel deck to structural members below.Q. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned

areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up primer.END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 05 4000-1BIRMINGHAM, AL COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMINGPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 05 4000COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING


A. Formed steel stud exterior wall and interior wall framing.B. Exterior wall sheathing.C. Water-resistive barrier over sheathing.D. Delegated Design Requirements

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 04 2001 - Masonry Veneer: Veneer masonry supported by wall stud metal framing.B. Section 04 4200 - Exterior Stone Cladding: Stone veneer supported by wall stud metal framing.C. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and miscellaneous framing.D. Section 06 1000: Wall sheathing.E. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Insulation within framing members.F. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Weather barrier over sheathing.G. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers.H. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Lightweight, non-load bearing metal stud

framing.I. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum-based sheathing.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2001 with 2004 supplement. (replaced SG-971)B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.D. ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs,

Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Productsand Metal Plaster Bases; 2011c.

E. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.F. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).G. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for

Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate with work of other sections that is to be installed in or adjacent to the metal framingsystem, including but not limited to structural anchors, cladding anchors, utilities, insulation, andfirestopping.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on factory-made framing connectors, showing

compliance with requirements.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading,

welds, and type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related work.1. Indicate stud layout.


2. Describe method for securing studs to tracks and for bolted framing connections.3. Provide design engineer's stamp on shop drawings.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, conditions requiringspecial attention .

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Designer Qualifications: Design framing system under direct supervision of a Professional

Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which theProject is located.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of productsspecified in this section, and with minimum three years of documented experience.

1.07 MOCK-UPA. Provide mock-up of exterior framed wall, including components specified elsewhere, such as

insulation, sheathing, window frame, door frame, exterior wall finish, and interior wall finish.B. Location: As directed.C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.


A. Metal Framing:1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC; _______: www.clarkdietrich.com.2. Marino; _______: www.marinoware.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Framing Connectors and Accessories:1. Same manufacturer as metal framing.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 FRAMING SYSTEMA. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips,

fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system.B. Design Criteria: Provide completed framing system having the following characteristics:

1. Design: Calculate structural characteristics of cold-formed steel framing membersaccording to AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed SteelStructural Members.

2. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and erect to withstand specifieddesign loads for project conditions within required limits.

3. Design Loads: In accordance with applicable codes.4. Live load deflection meeting the following, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Floors: Maximum vertical deflection under live load of 1/480 of span.b. Roofs: Maximum vertical deflection under live load of 1/240 of span.c. Exterior Walls: Maximum horizontal deflection under wind load of 1/240 of span.d. Design non-axial loadbearing framing to accommodate not less than 1/2 in (13 mm)

vertical deflection.5. Able to tolerate movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue

stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclicday/night temperature ranges.

6. Able to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members,and clearances of intended openings.

2.03 FRAMING MATERIALSA. Studs and Track: ASTM C955; studs formed to channel, "C", or "Sigma" shape with punched

web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height.


1. Gage and depth: As required to meet specified performance levels.B. Framing Connectors: Factory-made, formed steel sheet.

1. Material: ASTM A653/A653M SS Grade 33 and 40 (minimum), with G90/Z275 hot dippedgalvanized coating for thicknesses less than 10 gage (0.118 inch) (3 mm), and factorypunched holes and slots.

2. Structural Performance: Maintain load and movement capacity required by applicablecode, when evaluated in accordance with AISI North American Specification for the Designof Cold Formed Steel Structural Members.

3. Movement Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodatemovement using slotted holes, shouldered screws or screws and anti-friction or steppedbushings, while maintaining structural performance of framing. Provide movementconnections where indicated on drawings.a. Where continuous studs bypass elevated floor slab, connect stud to slab in manner

allowing vertical and horizontal movement of slab without affecting studs; allow forminimum movement of 1/2 inch (13 mm).

b. Where top of stud wall terminates below structural floor or roof, connect studs tostructure in manner allowing vertical and horizontal movement of slab withoutaffecting studs; allow for minimum movement of 1/2 inch (13 mm).

c. Provide top track with long leg track and head of wall movement connectors;minimum track length of 12 feet (3660 mm).

4. Fixed Connections: Provide non-movement connections for tie-down to foundation,floor-to-floor tie-down, roof-to-wall tie-down, joist hangers, gusset plates, and stiffeners.

2.04 WALL SHEATHING2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditionsencountered; finish to match framing components.

B. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

C. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying withVOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Water-Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 07 2500.2.06 FASTENERS

A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTMA153/A153M.

B. Anchorage Devices: Powder actuated.C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION OF STUDS

A. Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ASTM C1007requirements.

B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall layout. Secure in place with fasteners at maximum24 inches (600 mm) on center. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceiling tracks.

C. Place studs at 16 inches (400 mm) on center; not more than 2 inches (50 mm) from abuttingwalls and at each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks using clip and tie method.

D. Construct corners using minimum of three studs. Install double studs at wall openings, doorand window jambs.

E. Install load bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength and achieve designrequirements.


F. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection.G. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing.H. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non-load

bearing framing.I. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent

stud rotation.J. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer.

3.02 WALL SHEATHINGA. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm

bearing and staggered, using self-tapping screws.1. Place water-resistive barrier horizontally over wall sheathing, weather lapping edges and

ends.END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 05 5000-1BIRMINGHAM, AL METAL FABRICATIONSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 05 5000METAL FABRICATIONS


A. Shop fabricated steel and aluminum items.B. Prefabricated ladders and ship ladders.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete.B. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry.C. Section 05 5100 - Metal Stairs.D. Section 05 5213 - Pipe and Tube Railings.E. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American

Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.B. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.C. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.D. ANSI A14.3 - American National Standard for Ladders -- Fixed -- Safety Requirements; 2008.E. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.F. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless; 2012.G. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products; 2013.H. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.I. ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon

Steel Plates; 2013.J. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi

Minimum Tensile Strength; 2010.K. ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa

Tensile Strength (Metric); 2013.L. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.M. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.N. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, andUltra-High Strength; 2013.

O. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010.P. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

[Metric]; 2010.Q. ASTM B210 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless

Tubes; 2012.


R. ASTM B210M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn SeamlessTubes (Metric); 2012.

S. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2013.

T. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.

U. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination;American Welding Society; 2012.

V. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.W. AWS D1.2/D1.2M - Structural Welding Code - Aluminum; American Welding Society; 2008.X. IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel;

International Accreditation Service, Inc.; 2011.Y. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).Z. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for

Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).AA. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004).

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size

and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and detailswhere applicable.1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld

lengths.C. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS

qualification within the previous 12 months.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Design ladders under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced indesign of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the InternationalAccreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC172).

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL

A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M.B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing.C. Plates: ASTM A283.D. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.E. Slotted Channel Framing: ASTM A653/A653M, Grade 33.F. Slotted Channel Fittings: ASTM A1011/A1011M.G. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM

A153/A153M where connecting galvanized components.H. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.I. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities

having jurisdiction.J. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with

VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.


2.02 MATERIALS - ALUMINUMA. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), 5052 alloy, H32 or H22 temper.C. Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes: ASTM B210 (ASTM B210M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.D. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel.E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.2/D1.2M; type required for materials being welded.

2.03 FABRICATIONA. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt

tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related

components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically notedotherwise.

2.04 FABRICATED ITEMSA. Ladders: Steel; in compliance with ANSI A14.3; with mounting brackets and attachments; prime

paint finish.1. Side Rails: 3/8 x 2 inches (9 x 50 mm) members spaced at 20 inches (500 mm).2. Rungs: one inch (25 mm) diameter solid round bar spaced 12 inches (300 mm) on center.3. Space rungs 7 inches (175 mm) from wall surface.

B. Bumper Posts and Guard Rails: As detailed; prime paint finish.C. Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; prime paint finish.D. Ledge Angles, Shelf Angles, Channels, and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For

support of metal decking; prime paint finish.E. Lintels: As detailed; prime paint finish.F. Door Frames for Overhead Door Openings and Wall Openings: Channel sections; prime paint

finish.G. Elevator Hoistway Divider Beams: Beam sections; prime paint finish.H. Toilet Partition Suspension Members: Steel channel sections; prime paint finish.I. Reel Bank Supports: As shown on the drawings or required by Owner's fluid vendor.

1. General: Supports shall be designed to allow for mounting of reel banks at least 14 feetabove finished floor and shall be designed to prevent lateral movement which occurs ashoses are pulled from reels.

2.05 PREFABRICATED LADDERSA. Prefabricated Ladder: Welded metal unit complying with ANSI A14.3; factory fabricated to

greatest degree practical and in the largest components possible.1. Components: Manufacturer's standard rails, rungs, treads, handrails. returns, platforms

and safety devices complying with the requirements of the MATERIALS article of thissection.

2. Materials: Carbon steel; ASTM A1011/A1011M, Grade 36 minimum.3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard hot-dipped galvanizing; comply with ASTM A153/A153M.

2.06 FINISHES - STEELA. Prime paint all steel items.

1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete and items to be embedded inmasonry.


2. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding isrequired, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing.

B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2.C. Prepare surfaces exposed to public areas in accordance witth SSPC-SP5.D. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.E. Prime Painting: One coat.F. Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M

requirements. G. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M

requirements.2.07 FINISHES - ALUMINUM

A. Exterior Aluminum Surfaces: Class I natural anodized.B. Interior Aluminum Surfaces: Class I natural anodized.C. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than

0.7 mils (0.018 mm) thick.2.08 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Squareness: 1/8 inch (3 mm) maximum difference in diagonal measurements.B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 48 inches (1.2 m).E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) in 48 inches (1.2 m).


A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into

concrete or embedded in masonry.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until

completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.C. Field weld components indicated .D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except

surfaces to be in contact with concrete.3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story, non-cumulative.B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm).C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 05 5100-1BIRMINGHAM, AL METAL STAIRSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 05 5100METAL STAIRS


A. Stairs with concrete treads.B. Structural steel stair framing and supports.C. Handrails and guards.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete fill in stair pans ; mesh reinforcement for

landings.B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal anchors in concrete.C. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry.D. Section 04 2731 - Reinforced Unit Masonry: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry.E. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications.F. Section 05 5000: Bearing plates for metal stairs, including anchorage.G. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry: Wood handrails.H. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and

Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design).B. ASTM A6/A6M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel

Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling; 2012.C. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.D. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless; 2012.E. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products; 2013.F. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.G. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel

Plate, Sheet, and Strip; 1999 (Reapproved 2009).H. ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon

Steel Plates; 2013.I. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi

Minimum Tensile Strength; 2010.J. ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa

Tensile Strength (Metric); 2013.K. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.L. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing; 2007.M. ASTM A786/A786M - Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength

Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates; 2005 (Reapproved 2009).


N. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,Structural, High-Strength Low Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2013.

O. ASTM E935 - Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systemsand Rails for Buildings; 2013.

P. ASTM E985 - Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails forBuildings; 2000 (Reapproved 2006).

Q. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination;American Welding Society; 2012.

R. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.S. NAAMM AMP 510 - Metal Stairs Manual; The National Association of Architectural Metal

Manufacturers; 1992, Fifth Edition.T. NAAMM MBG 531 - Metal Bar Grating Manual; The National Association of Architectural Metal

Manufacturers; 2009.U. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).V. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for

Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).W. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004).

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size

and type of fasteners, and accessories.1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld

lengths.2. Include the design engineer's stamp or seal on each sheet of shop drawings.

C. Welders' Certificates.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Structural Designer Qualifications: Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design ofthis work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located, or personnel under directsupervision of such an engineer.

B. Welder Qualifications: Show certification of welders employed on the Work, verifying AWSqualification within the previous 12 months.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 METAL STAIRS - GENERAL

A. Metal Stairs: Provide stairs of the design specified, complete with landing platforms, verticaland horizontal supports, railings, and guards, fabricated accurately for anchorage to each otherand to building structure.1. Regulatory Requirements: Provide stairs and railings complying with the most stringent

requirements of local, state, and federal regulations; where requirements of the contractdocuments exceed those of regulations, comply with the contract documents.

2. Structural Design: Provide complete stair and railing assemblies complying with theapplicable local code.

3. Dimensions: As indicated on drawings.4. Shop assemble components; disassemble into largest practical sections suitable for

transport and access to site.5. No sharp or rough areas on exposed travel surfaces and surfaces accessible to touch.6. Separate dissimilar metals using paint or permanent tape.


B. Metal Jointing and Finish Quality Levels:1. Commercial: Exposed joints as inconspicuous as possible, whether welded or

mechanical; underside of stair not covered by soffit IS considered exposed to view.a. Welded Joints: Intermittently welded on back side, filled with body putty, and sanded

smooth and flush.b. Welds Exposed to View: Ground smooth and flush.c. Mechanical Joints: Butted tight, flush, and hairline.d. Bolts Exposed to View: Countersunk flat or oval head bolts; no exposed nuts.e. Exposed Edges and Corners: Eased to small uniform radius.f. Metal Surfaces to be Painted: Sanded or ground smooth, suitable for satin or matte

finish.C. Fasteners: Same material or compatible with materials being fastened; type consistent with

design and specified quality level.D. Anchors and Related Components: Same material and finish as item to be anchored, except

where specifically indicated otherwise; provide all anchors and fasteners required.2.02 METAL STAIRS WITH CONCRETE TREADS

A. Jointing and Finish Quality Level: Commercial, as defined above.B. Risers: Closed.C. Treads: Metal pan with field-installed concrete fill.

1. Concrete Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), minimum.2. Tread Pan Material: Steel sheet.3. Tread Pan Thickness: As required by design; 14 gage, 0.075 inch (1.9 mm) minimum.4. Pan Anchorage to Stringers: Welded to carrier angles welded to stringers.5. Concrete Reinforcement: None.6. Concrete Finish: For resilient floor covering.

D. Risers: Same material and thickness as tread pans.1. Riser/Nosing Profile: Sloped riser with rounded nosing of minimum radius.2. Riser/Nosing Profile: Vertical riser with underside of nosing sloped up from bottom of

tread pan at not less than 60 degrees from horizontal, with rounded top of nosing ofminimum radius.

3. Nosing Depth: Not more than 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) overhang.4. Nosing Return: Flush with top of concrete fill, not more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) wide.

E. Stringers: Rolled steel channels.1. Stringer Depth: 10 inches (250 mm).2. End Closure: Sheet steel of same thickness as risers welded across ends.

F. Landings: Same construction as treads, supported and reinforced as required to achievedesign load capacity.

G. Railings: Steel pipe railings.H. Finish: Shop- or factory-prime painted.I. Under Side of Stair: Exposed to view, to be finished same as specified for other exposed to

view surfaces.2.03 HANDRAILS AND GUARDS

A. Wall-Mounted Rails: Round pipe or tube rails unless otherwise indicated.1. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm), minimum, to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), maximum.

B. Guards:1. Top Rails: Round pipe or tube rails unless otherwise indicated.

a. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inch (31 mm), minimum, to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm),maximum.

2. Infill at Picket Railings: Vertical pickets.


a. Horizontal Spacing: Maximum 4 inches (100 mm) on center.b. Material: Solid steel bar.c. Shape: Square.d. Size: 1/4 inch (6 mm) square.e. Top Mounting: Welded to underside of top rail.f. Bottom Mounting: Welded to top surface of stringer.

3. Infill at Pipe Railings: Pipe or tube rails sloped parallel to stair.a. Outside Diameter: 1 inch (25 mm).b. Material: Steel pipe or tube, round.c. Vertical Spacing: Maximum 4 inches (100 mm) on center.d. Jointing: Welded and ground smooth and flush.

4. End and Intermediate Posts: Same material and size as top rails.a. Horizontal Spacing: As indicated on drawings.b. Mounting: Welded to top surface of stringer.

2.04 MATERIALSA. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M.B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M or ASTM A501 structural tubing, round and shapes as

indicated.C. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.D. Ungalvanized Steel Sheet: Hot- or cold-rolled, except use cold-rolled where finished work will

be exposed to view.1. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Designation CS (commercial steel).2. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Designation CS (commercial steel).

E. Concrete Fill: Portland cement Type I, 3000 psi (20 MPa) 28 day strength, 2 to 3 inch (50 to 75mm) slump.

F. Steel Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1, and galvanized to ASTMA153/A153M where connecting galvanized components.

G. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.H. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities

having jurisdiction.2.05 SHOP FINISHING

A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required.C. Prime Painting: Use specified shop- and touch-up primer.

1. Preparation of Steel: In accordance with SSPC-SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning.2. Number of Coats: One.


A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.3.02 PREPARATION

A. When field welding is required, clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal.B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete and embedded in masonry with setting

templates.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until

completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.


C. Provide welded field joints where specifically indicated on drawings. Perform field welding inaccordance with AWS D1.1.

D. Other field joints may be either welded or bolted provided the result complies with the limitationsspecified for jointing quality levels.

E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or creating adjustments not scheduled.F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except

surfaces to be in contact with concrete.3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story, non-cumulative.B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm).C. Maximum Gap wall to Stringer. 1/4 inch. (If gap is larger contractor will correct by welding a

continuous 3/16 inch stell plate to top of stringer. Corrective work will be the contractors soleexpense.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 06 1000-1BIRMINGHAM, AL ROUGH CARPENTRYPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 06 1000ROUGH CARPENTRY


A. Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings.B. Sheathing.C. Roof-mounted curbs.D. Roofing nailers.E. Roofing cant strips.F. Preservative treated wood materials.G. Fire retardant treated wood materials.H. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing.I. Communications and electrical room mounting boards.J. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel connectors and support angles for

wood framing.B. Section 06 0573 - Wood Treatment: Field-applied termiticide and mildicide for wood.C. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Air barrier over sheathing.D. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing.E. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sill flashings.F. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum-based sheathing.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. APA PRP-108 - Performance Standards and Qualification Policy for Structural-Use Panels

(Form E445); 2001.B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.C. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as

Sheathing; 2013.D. ASTM D2898 - Standard Test Methods for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated

Wood for Fire Testing; 2010.E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2013a.F. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2013.G. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood

Protection Association; 2012.H. ICC-ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc;

2013.I. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.J. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology,

Department of Commerce; 2010.K. SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc.; 2002.


1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application

instructions.C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or

exceed specified requirements.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to preventdeformation and to allow air circulation.

B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, orinstallation.

1.06 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no

grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting thespecified requirements.

2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review,American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading servicefor the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unlessotherwise indicated.

B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS

A. Grading Agency: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc. (SPIB).B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.D. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:

1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.

2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELSA. Wall Sheathing: APA PRP-108, Structural I Rated Sheathing, Exterior Exposure Class, and as

follows:1. Span Rating: 24/0 (610/0).2. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm), nominal.

B. Wall Sheathing: Plywood, PS 1, Grade C-C, Exterior Exposure.1. Plywood sheathing with Fluid Applied Air Barrier and Dampproofing

a. 5/8 inch plywood in non-hurricane areasb. 3/4 inch plywood in hurricane areas or where a NOA is required for the exterior wall

construction.C. Wall Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum, ASTM C1177/C1177M, square long edges, 5/8 inch

Type X fire-resistant (16 mm Type X fire-resistant).


D. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium densityfiberboard; 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Fasteners and Anchors:

1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidityand preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.

2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three timesthickness of sheathing.

3. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry.B. Water-Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 07 2500.

2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENTA. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System

for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specificapplications. 1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating

compliance with specified requirements.2. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an

ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance withAWPA standards.

B. Fire Retardant Treatment:1. Manufacturers:

a. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.2. Exterior Type: AWPA U1, Category UCFB, Commodity Specification H, chemically treated

and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustionwhen test is extended for an additional 20 minutes both before and after acceleratedweathering test performed in accordance with ASTM D2898.a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber

and 15 percent for plywood.b. Treat all exterior rough carpentry items.c. Do not use treated wood in direct contact with the ground.

3. Interior Type A: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H, lowtemperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated;capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance withASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for anadditional 20 minutes.a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber

and 15 percent for plywood.b. All interior rough carpentry items are to be fire retardant treated.c. Treat rough carpentry items as indicated .d. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may

become wet.C. Preservative Treatment:

1. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use CategoryUC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft (4.0 kg/cum) retention.a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.b. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing.c. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete.d. Treat lumber less than 18 inches (450 mm) above grade.e. Treat lumber in other locations as indicated.


PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Select material sizes to minimize waste.B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory

components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately

after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.3.02 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures,specialty items, and trim.

B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as requiredby applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between topstory and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu ofsolid wood blocking.

C. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings foranchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing.

D. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items,unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support isexplicitly indicated.

E. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports aboveceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated.

F. Provide the following specific non-structural framing and blocking:1. Cabinets and shelf supports.2. Wall brackets.3. Handrails.4. Grab bars.5. Towel and bath accessories.6. Wall-mounted door stops.7. Chalkboards and marker boards.8. Wall paneling and trim.9. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs.

3.03 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRYA. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and

roofing assembly installation.B. Provide wood curb at all roof openings except _____ where specifically indicated otherwise.

Form corners by alternating lapping side members.3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firmbearing and staggered, using nails, screws, or staples.1. Use plywood or other acceptable structural panels at building corners, for not less than 96

inches (2440 mm), measured horizontally.2. Place water-resistive barrier horizontally over wall sheathing, weather lapping edges and

ends.B. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with

edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches (610 mm) on center on alledges and into studs in field of board.1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly.


2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of boardparallel to studs.

3. Install adjacent boards without gaps.4. Size and Location: As indicated on drawings.

3.05 TOLERANCESA. Framing Members: 1/4 inch (6 mm) from true position, maximum.B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet (2 mm/m) maximum, and 1/4 inch

in 30 feet (7 mm in 10 m) maximum.3.06 CLEANING

A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 01 7419.1. Comply with applicable regulations.2. Do not burn scrap on project site.3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated.4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation

facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities.B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.

3.07 SCHEDULESA. Wall or ceiling sheathing for Composite Metal Panel (ACM/CMP) or Portland Cement Plastering

(stucco):1. APA Structural Panel Rated sheathing2. Exterior Exposure Class3. Span Rating: 24/0.4. Thickness: 5/8 inch or 3/4 inch in hurricane and or NOA required for building exterior.5. Fire Retardant Treatment: REQUIRED

B. Parapet Wall Sheathing for single ply roof membrane (PVC/TPO):1. Acceptable products:

a. G-P Gypsum corporation; 1/2 inch DensDeck Roof Board and 5/8 inch DensDeckType X Roof Board.

b. 3/4 inch in Hurricane/NOA jurisdiction.2. Composition: Nonstructural, glass mat faced gypsum panel with water-resistant core.3. Size: Nominal 4 feet x 8 feet, 4 feet x 4 feet; square edge.4. Thickness:

a. 1/2 inch DensDeck Roof Board at framing 16 inches on center.b. 5/8 inch DensDeck Roof Board (Type X) at framing 24 inches on center.

5. Fire Resistance:a. Flame spread 0, smoke developed 0 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

Noncombustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 119.b. 5/8 inch DensDeck Type X Roof Board; UL-classified Type DD when tested in

accordance with ASTM E 119.c. Code alternate to 15 minute thermal barrier as tested in accordance with UL 1256.

C. Parapet Wall sheathing at modified bitumen roof:1. Acceptable products:

a. G-P Gypsum corporation; 1/2 inch DensDeck Roof Board and 5/8 inch DensDeckType X Roof Board.

2. Composition: Nonstructural, glass mat faced gypsum panel with highly filled propretaryheat cured coating on one side.

3. Size: nominal 4 feet x 8 feet; edges; square4. Thickness:

a. 1/2 inch DensDeck Roof Board at framing 16 inches on center.


b. 5/8 inch DensDeck Roof Board (Type X) at framing 24 inches on center.5. Fire Resistance:

a. Flame spread 0, smoke developed 0 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.Noncombustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 119.

b. 5/8 inch DensDeck Type X Roof Board; UL-classified Type DD when tested inaccordance with ASTM E 119.

c. Code alternate to 15 minute thermal barrier as tested in accordance with UL 1256.6. EIFS sheathing: Glass Mat Faced Gypsum, ASTM C1177/C 1177M, water resistant core,

square long edges. 1/2 inch thick except 5/8 inch thick in hurricane or NOA zones.7. Wall Sheathing with attached signage:

a. APA Structural Panel Rated sheathingb. Exterior Exposure Classc. Span Rating: 24/0.d. Thickness: 5/8 inch or 3/4 inch in hurricane and or NOA required for building exterior.e. Fire Retardant Treatment: REQUIRED

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 06 4100-1BIRMINGHAM, AL ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORKPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 06 4100ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK


A. Specially fabricated cabinet units.B. Countertops.C. Cabinet hardware.D. Factory finishing.E. Preparation for installing utilities.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.B. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass for casework.C. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Site finishing of cabinet exterior.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use;

2009.B. AWI (QCP) - Quality Certification Program, www.awiqcp.org; current edition at www.awiqcp.org.C. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.D. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware

Manufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9).E. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood

Plywood & Veneer Association; 2009 (ANSI/HPVA HP-1).F. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers

Association; 2005.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting not less than two weeks beforestarting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and

accessories.1. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot (1:8).2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards.3. Include certification program label.

C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in thissection with minimum five years of documented experience.1. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of

fabrication and throughout the duration of the project.B. Quality Certification: Provide AWI Quality Certification Program inspection report and quality

certification of completed work.1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the work complies with requirements of AWS

Grade or Grades specified.2. Prior to delivery to the site provide shop drawings with certification labels.


3. Provide labels on each product when required by certification program.4. Upon completion of installation provide certificate certifying that the installation and

products meet the specified requirements.5. Arrange and pay for inspections required for certification.6. Replace, repair, or rework all work for which certification is refused.

1.07 MOCK-UPA. Provide mock-up of typical base cabinet, wall cabinet, and countertop, including hardware,

finishes, and plumbing accessories.B. Locate where directed.C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect units from moisture damage.

1.09 FIELD CONDITIONSA. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions

in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 CABINETS

A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified byAWI//AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Custom Grade.

B. Wood Veneer Faced Cabinets: Premium grade.C. Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: Custom grade.

2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTSA. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.B. Hardwood Edgebanding: Use solid hardwood edgebanding matching species, color, grain, and

grade for exposed portions of cabinetry.2.03 LAMINATE MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:1. Formica Corporation: www.formica.com.2. Panolam Industries International, Inc\Nevamar: www.nevamar.com.3. Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com.4. Manufacturer listed on draiwings for a specific use. .5. Substitutions: Not permitted.

B. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specificapplications.

C. Provide specific types as scheduled.1. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS, 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) nominal thickness, through color, colors

as scheduled, finish as scheduled.2. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) nominal thickness, through color, colors as

scheduled, finish as scheduled.3. Post-Formed Horizontal Surfaces: HGP, 0.039 inch (1.0 mm) nominal thickness, through

color, colors as scheduled, finish as scheduled.4. Flame Retardant Surfaces: HGF, 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) nominal thickness, through color,

colors as scheduled, finish as scheduled.5. Cabinet Liner: CLS, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) nominal thickness, through color, colors as

scheduled, finish as scheduled.6. Laminate Backer: BKL, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) nominal thickness, undecorated; for

application to concealed backside of panels faced with high pressure decorative laminate.


2.04 COUNTERTOPSA. Quality Standard: Custom quality .B. Plastic Laminate Countertops: High pressure decorative laminate sheet bonded to substrate.

1. Laminate sheet, unless otherwise indicated: NEMA LD 3 Grade HGS, 0.048 inch nominalthicknessa. Finish: Matte or suede, gloss rating 5 to 20.b. Surface Color and Pattern: As indicated on drawingsc. Manufacturers:

1) Formica corporation; www.formica.com2) Lamin Art, Inc: www.laminart.com.3) WilsonArt International, Inc.: www.wilsonart.com.4) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 Product Requirements

2. Exposed edge treament: Square, substrate built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch clad with HPDLto mach surface.

3. Back and End Splashes: Match Surface Color, Pattern and Substrate.C. Solid Surface Countertops: Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuous

substrate.1. Flat sheet Thickness: 1/2 inch, mimimum.2. Solid Surfacing sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Comply with ISSFA-2 and NEMA LD 3 ;

acrylic or polyester resin, minieral filler, and pigments; homogenous, not-porous andcapale or being worked and repaired with standard wood working tools no surface coating;color and pattern consisten throughout thickness.a. Surface Burning characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450,

maximum; test in accordance with ASTM E 84.b. NSP approved for food contact.c. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss ratio of 5 to 20.d. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.e. Manufacturers:

1) Dupont: www.corian.com2) Formica Corporation: www.formica.com3) Avonite Surfaces: www.avonitesurfaces.com4) Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com5) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 Product Requirements.

D. Natural Stone Countertops: Stone slabs bonded to substrate; use as large pieces as possiblewith inconspicuous adhesive joints.1. Stone: Granite without cracks, voids, or pin holes; filling with matching epoxy resin is

acceptable.2. Color: As indicated on drawings.3. Stone Thickness: 1/2 inch minimum.4. Surface Finish: Honed, non-glare.5. Exposed Edge Treatment: Square profile stone, 1 inch thick with 3/16 inch radius corner.6. Back and End Splashes: Match counterop.

E. Stainless Steel countertops: ASTM A666 Type 304 stainless steel sheet; 16 gage, 0.06 inchnominal sheet thickness.1. Finish: 4B, satin brushed finish.2. Exposed edge shape: Straight turndown with return; 1-1/2 inch high face, 1/2 inch return

to face of case, reinforced with hardwood or steel.3. Back and End Splashes: Same as top; welded 1/4 inch radius coved joint to countertop;

square top edge with 1 inch wide top surface and minimum 1/2 inch turn-down.4. Splash Dimensions: 4 inch high by 1 inch thick, unless noted otherwise.


F. Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Countertops: Sheet or slab of natural quartz and plasticresin over continous substrate.1. Flat Sheet thickness: 3/4 inch, minimum2. Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Sheets, Slabs and Castings: complying with

homogeous, non-porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standardwoodworking tools; no surface coating, color and pattern consistent throughout thickness.a. Factory fabricate componenets to the greatest extent practical in sizes and shapes

indicated; comply with tthe MIA Dimension Stone Design Manual.b. Sinks: Separate units for undercounter mounting; minimum 3/4 inch wall thickness;

comply iwth ANMSI Z124.3.c. Finish on Exposed surfaces: Polished.d. Color and Patern: As indicated on the drawings.e. Manufacturers:

1) Dupont Zodiaq2) Silestone3) Cambria4) CasesarStone5) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 Product Requirements.

2.05 ACCESSORIESA. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application.B. Glass: Type A as specified in Section 08 8000.C. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized

or chrome-plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel or chrome-plated finish inexposed locations.

E. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.F. Grommets: Standard painted metal grommets for cut-outs, in color to match adjacent surface.G. Countertop Supports: Standard back mounted system using surface mounted metal countertop

supports, satin chrome finish. Manufacturers standard system for provide full support ofcountertops.

2.06 HARDWAREA. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified.B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard back-mounted system using surface mounted metal shelf

standards and coordinated cantilevered shelf brackets, satin chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch(25 mm) spacing adjustments.

C. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with chrome finish, 4 inch centers ("U"shaped wire pull, steel with chrome finish, 100 mm centers).

D. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with chrome finish.E. Drawer Slides:

1. Type: Extension types as scheduled.2. Static Load Capacity: Heavy Duty grade.3. Mounting: Side mounted.4. Stops: Integral type.5. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type.6. Products:

a. Accuride International, Inc: www.accuride.com.b. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com.c. Hettich America, LP: www.hettichamerica.com.d. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company: www.knapeandvogt.com.


e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.F. Hinges: European style concealed self-closing type, steel with polished finish.

1. Products:a. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com.b. Hardware Resources: www.hardwareresources.com.c. Hettich America, LP: www.hettichamerica.com.d. Julius Blum, Inc: www.blum.com.e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

G. Sliding Door Track Assemblies: Upper and lower track of satin anodized aluminum, withmatching shoe equipped with nylon rollers.

2.07 SHOP TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALSA. Provide UL approved identification on fire retardant treated material.B. Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sizes. Minimize field cutting.

2.08 FABRICATIONA. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit

passage through building openings.B. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than

one piece for any single length.C. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for

cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.D. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with

manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightlybevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet (600 mm) from sink cut-outs.

E. Matching Wood Grain: Comply with requirements of quality standard for specified Grade and asfollows:1. Provide center matched panels at each elevation.2. Provide sequence matching across each elevation.3. Carry figure of cabinet fronts to toe kicks.

F. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops as recommended by laminate manufacturer at16 inches (400 mm) on center.

G. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Sealcut edges.

H. Shop glaze glass materials using the Interior Dry method specified in Section 08 8000.2.09 SHOP FINISHING

A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.B. For opaque finishes, apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and sand smooth.C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler matching or blending with surrounding

surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes.D. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 5

- Finishing for Grade specified and as follows:1. Transparent:

a. System - 2, Lacquer, Precatalyzed.b. Stain: As selected by Architect.c. Sheen: Flat.


A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.


B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch (1 mm).

Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.E. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species

to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.G. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest section practicable with top surface of joints flush.

1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.2. Prepare all cutouts accurateely to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or

unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes.3. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against

cabinet or wall.H. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise

indicated.1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof

glue.2. Height: 4 inches unless indicated otherwise.

I. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches longin one peice; join pieces with adhesivesealant in accordance wit hmanufacturer's recommendations and instructions.

J. Stainless Steel: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece including nosings and backand end splashes; accurately fit mechanical field joints in lengths over 144 inches arepermitted.1. Weld joints; grind smooth and polish to match.2. Provide wall clips for support of back/end splash turn downs.3. Sound Deadening: Apply water resistant, fire resistant sound deadening mastic to entire

bottom (hidden) surface.4. Provide stainless steel hat channel stiffeners, welded or soldered to underside, where

indicated on drawings.K. Wall Mounted Counters. Provide matching skirts, aprons, brackets and braces as indicated on

the drawings or required to support.L. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Install flat surfaces level,

shim where required.1. Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum 5/8 inch penetration into

substrate.2. Attach stainless steel countertops using stainless steel fasteners and clips.3. Attach epoxy resin countertops using compatible adhesive.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Variation From Horizontal: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; maximumB. Offset From Wall, Countertops: 1/8 inch maximum; 1/16 inch minimum.C. Field Joints: 1/8 inch wide, maximum.

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust installed work.B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.


3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.B. Protect installed products until ocmpletion of project.C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

3.06 SCHEDULESA. Cabinet Style: Flush Overlay.B. Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Flush StyleC. Drawer Construction: Dove Tail

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 07 1400-1BIRMINGHAM, AL FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFINGPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 07 1400FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING


A. Fluid applied membrane waterproofing.B. Cant strips and other accessories.C. Drainage panels and Protection boards.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete substrate.B. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal parapet covers, copings, and

counterflashings.C. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for joints in substrates.D. Section 22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties: Roof drain and plumbing vent flashing flanges.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C1306 - Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of a Liquid-Applied

Waterproofing Membrane; 2008.B. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers-

Tension; 2006a (Reapproved 2013).C. ASTM D471 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Effect of Liquids; 2012.D. ASTM D624 - Standard Test Method For Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and

Thermoplastic Elastomers; 2000 (Reapproved 2012).E. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method For Rubber Property--Durometer Hardness; 2005

(Reapproved 2010).F. ASTM D4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable

Adhesion Testers; 2009.G. ASTM D5385 - Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of Waterproofing

Membranes; 1993 (Reapproved 2006).H. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods For Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2013.I. NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; Fifth Edition, with interim

updates.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data for membrane.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interface with

other materials.D. Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's

name and registered with manufacturer.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of fluid-appliedwaterproofing membranes with ten years experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installation of fluid-applied waterproofing withminimum three years experience.


C. Mock-Up: Construct a mock-up consisting of 100 sq ft (10 sq m) of horizontal waterproofedpanel, including internal and external corners similar to those that will be present in the finishedwork.1. Mock-up may remain as part of the work.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F (5 degrees C) for 24 hours before and

during application and until cured.1.07 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Contractor shall correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial

Completion; remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing at no cost to Owner.C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of water ,

except where such failures are the result of structural failures of building. Hairline cracking ofconcrete due to temperature change or shrinkage is not considered a structural failure.


A. Hot-Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing Manufacturers:1. American Hydrotech, Inc: www.hydrotechusa.com.2. Barrett Company: www.barrettroofs.com.3. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc: www.carlisle-ccw.com.4. W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com.5. Substitutions: Not permitted.

2.02 WATERPROOFING APPLICATIONSA. Hot-Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing: Use at locations indicated on the drawings..

1. Cover with protection board.2.03 MEMBRANE AND FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Hot-Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing: Elasticized rubberized asphaltic compound,hot-applied and quick setting.1. Cured Thickness: 0.03 inches (0.75 mm), minimum.2. Suitable for installation over concrete, gypsum board, and plywood substrates.3. Tensile Strength: 15 psi (0.103 MPa), measured in accordance with ASTM D412.4. Ultimate Elongation: 500 percent, minimum, measured in accordance with ASTM D412.5. Hardness: 60, measured in accordance with ASTM D2240, using Type A durometer.6. Tear Strength: 150 lbf/inch (26.3 N/mm), measured in accordance with ASTM D624.7. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.2 perms (1.25 ng/(Pa s sq m)), maximum, measured in

accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.8. Adhesion: Greater than 150 psi (1.03 MPa), measured in accordance with ASTM D4541.9. Products:

a. Same as membrane manufacturer..2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Surface Conditioner: compatible type, compatible with membrane compound; as recommendedby membrane manufacturer.

B. Protection Board: Type capable of preventing damage to waterproofing due to backfilling andconstruction traffic.1. Use one of the following:

a. Semi-rigid glass fiber board; unaffected by water, freeze-thaw, fungus, or soilbacteria; containing no formaldehyde, phenol, acrylic, or artificial color; 3/4 inch (19mm) thick, nominal.


C. Drainage Panel: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick formed plastic, hollowed sandwich .D. Cant Strips: Premolded composition material .E. Counterflashings: As recommended by membrane and protection board manufacturer.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify substrate surfaces are free of frozen matter, dampness, loose particles, cracks, pits,

projections, penetrations, or foreign matter detrimental to adhesion or application ofwaterproofing system.

C. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth, free of honeycomb or pitting, and not detrimental tofull contact bond of waterproofing materials.

D. Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing.B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. Vacuum substrate clean.C. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer.D. Seal cracks and joints with sealant using methods recommended by sealant manufacturer.E. Install cant strips at inside corners.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Apply waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to specified minimum

thickness.B. Apply primer or surface conditioner at a rate recommended by manufacturer. Protect

conditioner from rain or frost until dry.C. Seal membrane and flashings to adjoining surfaces. Install termination bar at all edges. Install

counterflashing over all exposed edges.3.04 INSTALLATION - DRAINAGE PANEL AND PROTECTION BOARD

A. Immediately after cooling, dust membrane with tack-reducing surfacing at rate of approximately10 lbs/100 sq ft (4 kg/10 sq m).

B. Place drainage panel directly against membrane, butt joints, place to encourage drainagedownward. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions.

C. Place protection board directly against drainage panel; butt joints. Scribe and cut boardsaround projections, penetrations, and interruptions.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. On completion of horizontal membrane installation, dam installation area in preparation for flood

testing.B. Flood to minimum depth of 1 inch (25 mm) with clean water. After 48 hours, inspect for leaks.C. If leaking is found, remove water, repair leaking areas with new waterproofing materials as

directed by Architect; repeat flood test. Repair damage to building.D. When area is proven watertight, drain water and remove dam.

3.06 PROTECTIONA. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 07 1616-1BIRMINGHAM, AL CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFINGPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 07 1616CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING


A. Crystalline waterproofing.B. Preparation of surfaces to be waterproofed, including plugging active water leaks.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete work to be waterproofed.B. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Concrete masonry work to be waterproofed.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. COE CRD-C 48 - Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of Concrete; 1992.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Test data showing hydraulic permeability.2. Preparation instructions and recommendations.3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.4. Installation methods.5. Details for waterproofing at joints, intersections, and other special conditions.

C. Specimen warranty.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of products of the typespecified and providing technical representatives to visit project site.

B. Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to manufacturer, with documented experience on at least 5projects of similar nature within the last 5 years.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.B. Take necessary precautions to keep cementitious materials dry.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products underenvironmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

1.08 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide installer's warranty agreeing to correct leaking waterproofing for 2 years from the Date

of Substantial Completion, unless leakage is caused by structural failure, movement of thestructure, or other causes beyond the installer's control.


A. Crystalline Waterproofing:1. Euclid Chemical Company: www.euclidchemical.com2. Gemite Products Inc: www.gemite.com.3. Vandex: www.vandex-usa.com.4. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; CEM-KOTE CW PLUS: www.wrmeadows.com.5. Xypex Chemical Corporation: www.xypex.com.

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 07 1616-2BIRMINGHAM, AL CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFINGPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.2.02 APPLICATIONS

A. Waterproofing for building surfaces:1. Inside of elevator pits.

2.03 MATERIALSA. Crystalline Waterproofing: Portland cement and chemical compound that when applied to the

surface of concrete forms insoluble crystals in the capillary pores preventing the passage ofliquids, while having no adverse effect on the normal properties of concrete.1. Hydraulic Permeability: No measurable leakage or water flow at 200 psi (1.38 MPa)

pressure when tested in accordance with COE CRD-C 48, using minimum 2 inch (50 mm)thick sample and 20 days duration.

2. Toxicity: Non-toxic.3. Color: Gray.


A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions. Use sand blasting, water blasting, or acidetching as recommended.

C. Plug water leaks.D. Patch holes, construction joints, and cracks. Remove defective concrete.E. Obtain approval of manufacturer's field representative before beginning installation.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Maintain environmental conditions

required and recommended by manufacturer. Keep a copy of manufacturer's instructions onsite.

B. Coordinate installation with installation of products that must penetrate waterproofed surfaces.C. Prevent excessive drying of surface.

1. Cure waterproofing for at least 3 days, or length of time required by manufacturer, withwater spray and adequate air circulation.

2. Do not use chemical curing agents unless explicitly approved by waterproofingmanufacturer.

D. Do not backfill, fill water or liquid holding structures, or apply finish coatings until time periodrecommended by manufacturer has passed.

3.04 PROTECTIONA. Protect from damage by weather. Do not cover with impermeable (plastic) sheeting unless air

circulation is provided.B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged waterproofing after Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 07 2100-1BIRMINGHAM, AL THERMAL INSULATIONPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 07 2100THERMAL INSULATION


A. Board insulation and integral vapor retarder at cavity wall construction, perimeter foundationwall, underside of floor slabs, over roof deck, over roof sheathing, and exterior wall behind________ wall finish.

B. Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall, ceiling, and roof construction.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Field-applied termiticide for concrete slabs andfoundations.

B. Section 04 2723 - Cavity Wall Unit Masonry: Masonry walls enclosing insulation.C. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Board insulation as wall sheathing.D. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Supporting construction for batt insulation.E. Section 07 2400 - Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems: Board insulation on exterior side of

walls, finished with weatherproof coating.F. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Separate air barrier and vapor retarder materials.G. Section 07 5400 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: Insulation specified as part of roofing

system.H. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Insulation as part of fire-rated through-penetration assemblies.I. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation inside walls and partitions.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2014.B. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation;

2014.C. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light

Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.D. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal

Insulation Board; 2014.E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2013a.F. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2013.G. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750

Degrees C; 2012.H. NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of

Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components; 2012.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product

limitations.C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions

required for installation and installation techniques.1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental tosuccessful installation.


PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation Inside Masonry Cavity Walls: Extruded polystyrene board.B. Insulation Over Metal Stud Framed Walls, Continuous: Extruded polystyrene board.C. Insulation in Metal Framed Walls: Batt insulation with integral vapor retarder. (Vapor retarder

to be installed only if shown on the drawings.)D. Insulation Above Lay-In Acoustical Ceilings: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder. (Only if

shown on the drawings.)2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Board Insulation: ASTM C578, Type XII; extruded polystyreneboard with either natural skin or cut cell surfaces; with the following characteristics:1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.3. Complies with fire-resistance requirements shown on the drawings as part of an exterior

non-load-bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285.4. Board Size: 24 x 96 inch (610 x 2440 mm).5. Board Thickness: 1-1/2 inches (37.5 mm).6. Board Edges: Square.7. Thermal Resistance: R-value of 4.6 per 1 inch (25.4 mm) at 75 degrees F (24 degrees C)

mean temperature.8. Compressive Resistance: 15 psi (104 kPa).9. Board Density: 1.20 lb/cu ft (19 kg/cu m).10. Water Absorption: 0.3 percent by volume, maximum.11. Manufacturers:

a. Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com.b. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.c. Pactiv Building Products: greenguard.pactiv.com.

12. Substitutions: Not permitted.2.03 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Where batt insulation is indicated, either glass fiber or mineral fiber batt insulation may be used,at Contractor's option.

B. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665;friction fit.1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for

facing, if any.4. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.5. Thermal Resistance and Thickness: As indicated on the drawings.6. Manufacturers:

a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.b. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.c. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.

7. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of unfinished steel with washer retainer and clips, to beadhered to surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate,capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place.

B. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application.



A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates areready to receive insulation and adhesive.

B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials orsubstances that may impede adhesive bond.

3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT EXTERIOR WALLSA. Install boards horizontally on walls.B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.

3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION AT CAVITY WALLSA. Install boards to fit snugly between wall ties.B. Install boards horizontally on walls.C. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.

3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION UNDER CONCRETE SLABS (IF REQUIRED BY THE JURISDICTION)A. Place insulation under slabs on grade after base for slab has been compacted.B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.C. Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarder and placing

slab.3.05 BATT INSTALLATION

A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install in exterior wall spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services

within the plane of the insulation.E. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane.F. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder.G. Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other

items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place.H. Coordinate work of this section with construction of air barrier seal specified in Section 07 2500.

3.06 PROTECTIONA. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.

END OF SECTION

TABLE 301.1 (IECC) and Table N1101.2 (IRC) CLIMATE ZONES, MOISTURE REGIMES, AND WARM-HUMID DESIGNATIONS BY STATE, COUNTY, AND

TERRITORY Key:

A – Moist, B – Dry, C – Marine. Absence of moisture designation indicates moisture regime is irrelevant. Asterisk ‘*’ indicates a Warm-Humid location.

US STATES ALABAMA 3A Autauga* 2A Baldwin* 3A Barbour* 3A Bibb 3A Blount 3A Bullock* 3A Butler* 3A Calhoun 3A Chambers 3A Cherokee 3A Chilton 3A Choctaw* 3A Clarke* 3A Clay 3A Cleburne 3A Coffee* 3A Colbert 3A Conecuh* 3A Coosa 3A Covington* 3A Crenshaw* 3A Cullman 3A Dale* 3A Dallas* 3A DeKalb 3A Elmore* 3A Escambia* 3A Etowah 3A Fayette 3A Franklin 3A Geneva* 3A Greene 3A Hale 3A Henry* 3A Houston* 3A Jackson 3A Jefferson 3A Lamar 3A Lauderdale 3A Lawrence 3A Lee 3A Limestone 3A Lowndes* 3A Macon*

3A Madison 3A Marengo* 3A Marion 3A Marshall 2A Mobile* 3A Monroe* 3A Montgomery* 3A Morgan 3A Perry* 3A Pickens 3A Pike* 3A Randolph 3A Russell* 3A Shelby 3A St. Clair 3A Sumter 3A Talladega 3A Tallapoosa 3A Tuscaloosa 3A Walker 3A Washington* 3A Wilcox* 3A Winston ALASKA 7 Aleutians East 7 Aleutians West 7 Anchorage 8 Bethel 7 Bristol Bay 7 Denali 8 Dillingham 8 Fairbanks North Star 7 Haines 7 Juneau 7 Kenai Peninsula 7 Ketchikan Gateway 7 Kodiak Island 7 Lake and Peninsula 7 Matanuska- Susitna

8 Nome 8 North Slope 8 Northwest Arctic 7 Prince of Wales-Outer Ketchikan 7 Sitka 7 Skagway- Hoonah-Angoon 8 Southeast Fairbanks 7 Valdez-Cordova 8 Wade Hampton 7 Wrangell- Petersburg 7 Yakutat 8 Yukon-Koyukuk ARIZONA 5B Apache 3B Cochise 5B Coconino 4B Gila 3B Graham 3B Greenlee 2B La Paz 2B Maricopa 3B Mohave 5B Navajo 2B Pima 2B Pinal 3B Santa Cruz 4B Yavapai 2B Yuma ARKANSAS 3A Arkansas 3A Ashley 4A Baxter 4A Benton 4A Boone 3A Bradley 3A Calhoun 4A Carroll 3A Chicot 3A Clark

3A Clay 3A Cleburne 3A Cleveland 3A Columbia* 3A Conway 3A Craighead 3A Crawford 3A Crittenden 3A Cross 3A Dallas 3A Desha 3A Drew 3A Faulkner 3A Franklin 4A Fulton 3A Garland 3A Grant 3A Greene 3A Hempstead* 3A Hot Spring 3A Howard 3A Independence 4A Izard 3A Jackson 3A Jefferson 3A Johnson 3A Lafayette* 3A Lawrence 3A Lee 3A Lincoln 3A Little River* 3A Logan 3A Lonoke 4A Madison 4A Marion 3A Miller* 3A Mississippi 3A Monroe 3A Montgomery 3A Nevada 4A Newton 3A Ouachita 3A Perry 3A Phillips 3A Pike 3A Poinsett 3A Polk

3A Pope 3A Prairie 3A Pulaski 3A Randolph 3A Saline 3A Scott 4A Searcy 3A Sebastian 3A Sevier* 3A Sharp 3A St. Francis 4A Stone 3A Union* 3A Van Buren 4A Washington 3A White 3A Woodruff 3A Yell CALIFORNIA 3C Alameda 6B Alpine 4B Amador 3B Butte 4B Calaveras 3B Colusa 3B Contra Costa 4C Del Norte 4B El Dorado 3B Fresno 3B Glenn 4C Humboldt 2B Imperial 4B Inyo 3B Kern 3B Kings 4B Lake 5B Lassen 3B Los Angeles 3B Madera 3C Marin 4B Mariposa 3C Mendocino 3B Merced 5B Modoc 6B Mono 3C Monterey

3C Napa 5B Nevada 3B Orange 3B Placer 5B Plumas 3B Riverside 3B Sacramento 3C San Benito 3B San Bernardino 3B San Diego 3C San Francisco 3B San Joaquin 3C San Luis Obispo 3C San Mateo 3C Santa Barbara 3C Santa Clara 3C Santa Cruz 3B Shasta 5B Sierra 5B Siskiyou 3B Solano 3C Sonoma 3B Stanislaus 3B Sutter 3B Tehama 4B Trinity 3B Tulare 4B Tuolumne 3C Ventura 3B Yolo 3B Yuba COLORADO 5B Adams 6B Alamosa 5B Arapahoe 6B Archuleta 4B Baca 5B Bent 5B Boulder 6B Chaffee 5B Cheyenne 7 Clear Creek 6B Conejos 6B Costilla 5B Crowley 6B Custer 5B Delta 5B Denver 6B Dolores 5B Douglas 6B Eagle 5B Elbert 5B El Paso 5B Fremont

5B Garfield 5B Gilpin 7 Grand 7 Gunnison 7 Hinsdale 5B Huerfano 7 Jackson 5B Jefferson 5B Kiowa 5B Kit Carson 7 Lake 5B La Plata 5B Larimer 4B Las Animas 5B Lincoln 5B Logan 5B Mesa 7 Mineral 6B Moffat 5B Montezuma 5B Montrose 5B Morgan 4B Otero 6B Ouray 7 Park 5B Phillips 7 Pitkin 5B Prowers 5B Pueblo 6B Rio Blanco 7 Rio Grande 7 Routt 6B Saguache 7 San Juan 6B San Miguel 5B Sedgwick 7 Summit 5B Teller 5B Washington 5B Weld 5B Yuma CONNECTICUT 5A (all) DELAWARE 4A (all) DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA 4A (all) FLORIDA 2A Alachua* 2A Baker* 2A Bay* 2A Bradford*

2A Brevard* 1A Broward* 2A Calhoun* 2A Charlotte* 2A Citrus* 2A Clay* 2A Collier* 2A Columbia* 2A DeSoto* 2A Dixie* 2A Duval* 2A Escambia* 2A Flagler* 2A Franklin* 2A Gadsden* 2A Gilchrist* 2A Glades* 2A Gulf* 2A Hamilton* 2A Hardee* 2A Hendry* 2A Hernando* 2A Highlands* 2A Hillsborough* 2A Holmes* 2A Indian River* 2A Jackson* 2A Jefferson* 2A Lafayette* 2A Lake* 2A Lee* 2A Leon* 2A Levy* 2A Liberty* 2A Madison* 2A Manatee* 2A Marion* 2A Martin* 1A Miami-Dade* 1A Monroe* 2A Nassau* 2A Okaloosa* 2A Okeechobee* 2A Orange* 2A Osceola* 2A Palm Beach* 2A Pasco* 2A Pinellas* 2A Polk* 2A Putnam* 2A Santa Rosa* 2A Sarasota* 2A Seminole* 2A St. Johns* 2A St. Lucie* 2A Sumter* 2A Suwannee*

2A Taylor* 2A Union* 2A Volusia* 2A Wakulla* 2A Walton* 2A Washington* GEORGIA 2A Appling* 2A Atkinson* 2A Bacon* 2A Baker* 3A Baldwin 4A Banks 3A Barrow 3A Bartow 3A Ben Hill* 2A Berrien* 3A Bibb 3A Bleckley* 2A Brantley* 2A Brooks* 2A Bryan* 3A Bulloch* 3A Burke 3A Butts 3A Calhoun* 2A Camden* 3A Candler* 3A Carroll 4A Catoosa 2A Charlton* 2A Chatham* 3A Chattahoochee* 4A Chattooga 3A Cherokee 3A Clarke 3A Clay* 3A Clayton 2A Clinch* 3A Cobb 3A Coffee* 2A Colquitt* 3A Columbia 2A Cook* 3A Coweta 3A Crawford 3A Crisp* 4A Dade 4A Dawson 2A Decatur* 3A DeKalb 3A Dodge* 3A Dooly* 3A Dougherty* 3A Douglas 3A Early*

2A Echols* 2A Effingham* 3A Elbert 3A Emanuel* 2A Evans* 4A Fannin 3A Fayette 4A Floyd 3A Forsyth 4A Franklin 3A Fulton 4A Gilmer 3A Glascock 2A Glynn* 4A Gordon 2A Grady* 3A Greene 3A Gwinnett 4A Habersham 4A Hall 3A Hancock 3A Haralson 3A Harris 3A Hart 3A Heard 3A Henry 3A Houston* 3A Irwin* 3A Jackson 3A Jasper 2A Jeff Davis* 3A Jefferson 3A Jenkins* 3A Johnson* 3A Jones 3A Lamar 2A Lanier* 3A Laurens* 3A Lee* 2A Liberty* 3A Lincoln 2A Long* 2A Lowndes* 4A Lumpkin 3A Macon* 3A Madison 3A Marion* 3A McDuffie 2A McIntosh* 3A Meriwether 2A Miller* 2A Mitchell* 3A Monroe 3A Montgomery* 3A Morgan 4A Murray 3A Muscogee

3A Newton 3A Oconee 3A Oglethorpe 3A Paulding 3A Peach* 4A Pickens 2A Pierce* 3A Pike 3A Polk 3A Pulaski* 3A Putnam 3A Quitman* 4A Rabun 3A Randolph* 3A Richmond 3A Rockdale 3A Schley* 3A Screven* 2A Seminole* 3A Spalding 4A Stephens 3A Stewart* 3A Sumter* 3A Talbot 3A Taliaferro 2A Tattnall* 3A Taylor* 3A Telfair* 3A Terrell* 2A Thomas* 3A Tift* 2A Toombs* 4A Towns 3A Treutlen* 3A Troup 3A Turner* 3A Twiggs* 4A Union 3A Upson 4A Walker 3A Walton 2A Ware* 3A Warren 3A Washington 2A Wayne* 3A Webster* 3A Wheeler* 4A White 4A Whitfield 3A Wilcox* 3A Wilkes 3A Wilkinson 3A Worth* HAWAII 1A (all)*

IDAHO 5B Ada 6B Adams 6B Bannock 6B Bear Lake 5B Benewah 6B Bingham 6B Blaine 6B Boise 6B Bonner 6B Bonneville 6B Boundary 6B Butte 6B Camas 5B Canyon 6B Caribou 5B Cassia 6B Clark 5B Clearwater 6B Custer 5B Elmore 6B Franklin 6B Fremont 5B Gem 5B Gooding 5B Idaho 6B Jefferson 5B Jerome 5B Kootenai 5B Latah 6B Lemhi 5B Lewis 5B Lincoln 6B Madison 5B Minidoka 5B Nez Perce 6B Oneida 5B Owyhee 5B Payette 5B Power 5B Shoshone 6B Teton 5B Twin Falls 6B Valley 5B Washington ILLINOIS 5A Adams 4A Alexander 4A Bond 5A Boone 5A Brown 5A Bureau 5A Calhoun 5A Carroll 5A Cass 5A Champaign

4A Christian 5A Clark 4A Clay 4A Clinton 5A Coles 5A Cook 4A Crawford 5A Cumberland 5A DeKalb 5A De Witt 5A Douglas 5A DuPage 5A Edgar 4A Edwards 4A Effingham 4A Fayette 5A Ford 4A Franklin 5A Fulton 4A Gallatin 5A Greene 5A Grundy 4A Hamilton 5A Hancock 4A Hardin 5A Henderson 5A Henry 5A Iroquois 4A Jackson 4A Jasper 4A Jefferson 5A Jersey 5A Jo Daviess 4A Johnson 5A Kane 5A Kankakee 5A Kendall 5A Knox 5A Lake 5A La Salle 4A Lawrence 5A Lee 5A Livingston 5A Logan 5A Macon 4A Macoupin 4A Madison 4A Marion 5A Marshall 5A Mason 4A Massac 5A McDonough 5A McHenry 5A McLean 5A Menard 5A Mercer 4A Monroe

4A Montgomery 5A Morgan 5A Moultrie 5A Ogle 5A Peoria 4A Perry 5A Piatt 5A Pike 4A Pope 4A Pulaski 5A Putnam 4A Randolph 4A Richland 5A Rock Island 4A Saline 5A Sangamon 5A Schuyler 5A Scott 4A Shelby 5A Stark 4A St. Clair 5A Stephenson 5A Tazewell 4A Union 5A Vermilion 4A Wabash 5A Warren 4A Washington 4A Wayne 4A White 5A Whiteside 5A Will 4A Williamson 5A Winnebago 5A Woodford INDIANA 5A Adams 5A Allen 5A Bartholomew 5A Benton 5A Blackford 5A Boone 4A Brown 5A Carroll 5A Cass 4A Clark 5A Clay 5A Clinton 4A Crawford 4A Daviess 4A Dearborn 5A Decatur 5A De Kalb 5A Delaware 4A Dubois 5A Elkhart

5A Fayette 4A Floyd 5A Fountain 5A Franklin 5A Fulton 4A Gibson 5A Grant 4A Greene 5A Hamilton 5A Hancock 4A Harrison 5A Hendricks 5A Henry 5A Howard 5A Huntington 4A Jackson 5A Jasper 5A Jay 4A Jefferson 4A Jennings 5A Johnson 4A Knox 5A Kosciusko 5A Lagrange 5A Lake 5A La Porte 4A Lawrence 5A Madison 5A Marion 5A Marshall 4A Martin 5A Miami 4A Monroe 5A Montgomery 5A Morgan 5A Newton 5A Noble 4A Ohio 4A Orange 5A Owen 5A Parke 4A Perry 4A Pike 5A Porter 4A Posey 5A Pulaski 5A Putnam 5A Randolph 4A Ripley 5A Rush 4A Scott 5A Shelby 4A Spencer 5A Starke 5A Steuben 5A St. Joseph 4A Sullivan

4A Switzerland 5A Tippecanoe 5A Tipton 5A Union 4A Vanderburgh 5A Vermillion 5A Vigo 5A Wabash 5A Warren 4A Warrick 4A Washington 5A Wayne 5A Wells 5A White 5A Whitley IOWA 5A Adair 5A Adams 6A Allamakee 5A Appanoose 5A Audubon 5A Benton 6A Black Hawk 5A Boone 6A Bremer 6A Buchanan 6A Buena Vista 6A Butler 6A Calhoun 5A Carroll 5A Cass 5A Cedar 6A Cerro Gordo 6A Cherokee 6A Chickasaw 5A Clarke 6A Clay 6A Clayton 5A Clinton 5A Crawford 5A Dallas 5A Davis 5A Decatur 6A Delaware 5A Des Moines 6A Dickinson 5A Dubuque 6A Emmet 6A Fayette 6A Floyd 6A Franklin 5A Fremont 5A Greene 6A Grundy 5A Guthrie 6A Hamilton

6A Hancock 6A Hardin 5A Harrison 5A Henry 6A Howard 6A Humboldt 6A Ida 5A Iowa 5A Jackson 5A Jasper 5A Jefferson 5A Johnson 5A Jones 5A Keokuk 6A Kossuth 5A Lee 5A Linn 5A Louisa 5A Lucas 6A Lyon 5A Madison 5A Mahaska 5A Marion 5A Marshall 5A Mills 6A Mitchell 5A Monona 5A Monroe 5A Montgomery 5A Muscatine 6A O'Brien 6A Osceola 5A Page 6A Palo Alto 6A Plymouth 6A Pocahontas 5A Polk 5A Pottawattamie 5A Poweshiek 5A Ringgold 6A Sac 5A Scott 5A Shelby 6A Sioux 5A Story 5A Tama 5A Taylor 5A Union 5A Van Buren 5A Wapello 5A Warren 5A Washington 5A Wayne 6A Webster 6A Winnebago 6A Winneshiek 5A Woodbury

6A Worth 6A Wright KANSAS 4A Allen 4A Anderson 4A Atchison 4A Barber 4A Barton 4A Bourbon 4A Brown 4A Butler 4A Chase 4A Chautauqua 4A Cherokee 5A Cheyenne 4A Clark 4A Clay 5A Cloud 4A Coffey 4A Comanche 4A Cowley 4A Crawford 5A Decatur 4A Dickinson 4A Doniphan 4A Douglas 4A Edwards 4A Elk 5A Ellis 4A Ellsworth 4A Finney 4A Ford 4A Franklin 4A Geary 5A Gove 5A Graham 4A Grant 4A Gray 5A Greeley 4A Greenwood 5A Hamilton 4A Harper 4A Harvey 4A Haskell 4A Hodgeman 4A Jackson 4A Jefferson 5A Jewell 4A Johnson 4A Kearny 4A Kingman 4A Kiowa 4A Labette 5A Lane 4A Leavenworth 4A Lincoln

4A Linn 5A Logan 4A Lyon 4A Marion 4A Marshall 4A McPherson 4A Meade 4A Miami 5A Mitchell 4A Montgomery 4A Morris 4A Morton 4A Nemaha 4A Neosho 5A Ness 5A Norton 4A Osage 5A Osborne 4A Ottawa 4A Pawnee 5A Phillips 4A Pottawatomie 4A Pratt 5A Rawlins 4A Reno 5A Republic 4A Rice 4A Riley 5A Rooks 4A Rush 4A Russell 4A Saline 5A Scott 4A Sedgwick 4A Seward 4A Shawnee 5A Sheridan 5A Sherman 5A Smith 4A Stafford 4A Stanton 4A Stevens 4A Sumner 5A Thomas 5A Trego 4A Wabaunsee 5A Wallace 4A Washington 5A Wichita 4A Wilson 4A Woodson 4A Wyandotte KENTUCKY 4A (all) LOUISIANA

2A Acadia* 2A Allen* 2A Ascension* 2A Assumption* 2A Avoyelles* 2A Beauregard* 3A Bienville* 3A Bossier* 3A Caddo* 2A Calcasieu* 3A Caldwell* 2A Cameron* 3A Catahoula* 3A Claiborne* 3A Concordia* 3A De Soto* 2A East Baton Rouge* 3A East Carroll 2A East Feliciana* 2A Evangeline* 3A Franklin* 3A Grant* 2A Iberia* 2A Iberville* 3A Jackson* 2A Jefferson* 2A Jefferson Davis* 2A Lafayette* 2A Lafourche* 3A La Salle* 3A Lincoln* 2A Livingston* 3A Madison* 3A Morehouse 3A Natchitoches* 2A Orleans* 3A Ouachita* 2A Plaquemines* 2A Pointe Coupee* 2A Rapides* 3A Red River* 3A Richland* 3A Sabine* 2A St. Bernard* 2A St. Charles* 2A St. Helena* 2A St. James* 2A St. John the Baptist* 2A St. Landry* 2A St. Martin* 2A St. Mary* 2A St. Tammany*

2A Tangipahoa* 3A Tensas* 2A Terrebonne* 3A Union* 2A Vermilion* 3A Vernon* 2A Washington* 3A Webster* 2A West Baton Rouge* 3A West Carroll 2A West Feliciana* 3A Winn* MAINE 6A Androscoggin 7 Aroostook 6A Cumberland 6A Franklin 6A Hancock 6A Kennebec 6A Knox 6A Lincoln 6A Oxford 6A Penobscot 6A Piscataquis 6A Sagadahoc 6A Somerset 6A Waldo 6A Washington 6A York MARYLAND 4A Allegany 4A Anne Arundel 4A Baltimore 4A Baltimore (city) 4A Calvert 4A Caroline 4A Carroll 4A Cecil 4A Charles 4A Dorchester 4A Frederick 5A Garrett 4A Harford 4A Howard 4A Kent 4A Montgomery 4A Prince George's 4A Queen Anne's 4A Somerset 4A St. Mary's 4A Talbot

4A Washington 4A Wicomico 4A Worcester MASSACHUSETTS 5A (all) MICHIGAN 6A Alcona 6A Alger 5A Allegan 6A Alpena 6A Antrim 6A Arenac 7 Baraga 5A Barry 5A Bay 6A Benzie 5A Berrien 5A Branch 5A Calhoun 5A Cass 6A Charlevoix 6A Cheboygan 7 Chippewa 6A Clare 5A Clinton 6A Crawford 6A Delta 6A Dickinson 5A Eaton 6A Emmet 5A Genesee 6A Gladwin 7 Gogebic 6A Grand Traverse 5A Gratiot 5A Hillsdale 7 Houghton 6A Huron 5A Ingham 5A Ionia 6A Iosco 7 Iron 6A Isabella 5A Jackson 5A Kalamazoo 6A Kalkaska 5A Kent 7 Keweenaw 6A Lake 5A Lapeer 6A Leelanau 5A Lenawee 5A Livingston 7 Luce

7 Mackinac 5A Macomb 6A Manistee 6A Marquette 6A Mason 6A Mecosta 6A Menominee 5A Midland 6A Missaukee 5A Monroe 5A Montcalm 6A Montmorency 5A Muskegon 6A Newaygo 5A Oakland 6A Oceana 6A Ogemaw 7 Ontonagon 6A Osceola 6A Oscoda 6A Otsego 5A Ottawa 6A Presque Isle 6A Roscommon 5A Saginaw 6A Sanilac 7 Schoolcraft 5A Shiawassee 5A St. Clair 5A St. Joseph 5A Tuscola 5A Van Buren 5A Washtenaw 5A Wayne 6A Wexford MINNESOTA 7 Aitkin 6A Anoka 7 Becker 7 Beltrami 6A Benton 6A Big Stone 6A Blue Earth 6A Brown 7 Carlton 6A Carver 7 Cass 6A Chippewa 6A Chisago 7 Clay 7 Clearwater 7 Cook 6A Cottonwood 7 Crow Wing 6A Dakota 6A Dodge

6A Douglas 6A Faribault 6A Fillmore 6A Freeborn 6A Goodhue 7 Grant 6A Hennepin 6A Houston 7 Hubbard 6A Isanti 7 Itasca 6A Jackson 7 Kanabec 6A Kandiyohi 7 Kittson 7 Koochiching 6A Lac qui Parle 7 Lake 7 Lake of the Woods 6A Le Sueur 6A Lincoln 6A Lyon 7 Mahnomen 7 Marshall 6A Martin 6A McLeod 6A Meeker 7 Mille Lacs 6A Morrison 6A Mower 6A Murray 6A Nicollet 6A Nobles 7 Norman 6A Olmsted 7 Otter Tail 7 Pennington 7 Pine 6A Pipestone 7 Polk 6A Pope 6A Ramsey 7 Red Lake 6A Redwood 6A Renville 6A Rice 6A Rock 7 Roseau 6A Scott 6A Sherburne 6A Sibley 6A Stearns 6A Steele 6A Stevens 7 St. Louis 6A Swift

6A Todd 6A Traverse 6A Wabasha 7 Wadena 6A Waseca 6A Washington 6A Watonwan 7 Wilkin 6A Winona 6A Wright 6A Yellow Medicine MISSISSIPPI 3A Adams* 3A Alcorn 3A Amite* 3A Attala 3A Benton 3A Bolivar 3A Calhoun 3A Carroll 3A Chickasaw 3A Choctaw 3A Claiborne* 3A Clarke 3A Clay 3A Coahoma 3A Copiah* 3A Covington* 3A DeSoto 3A Forrest* 3A Franklin* 3A George* 3A Greene* 3A Grenada 2A Hancock* 2A Harrison* 3A Hinds* 3A Holmes 3A Humphreys 3A Issaquena 3A Itawamba 2A Jackson* 3A Jasper 3A Jefferson* 3A Jefferson Davis* 3A Jones* 3A Kemper 3A Lafayette 3A Lamar* 3A Lauderdale 3A Lawrence* 3A Leake 3A Lee 3A Leflore

3A Lincoln* 3A Lowndes 3A Madison 3A Marion* 3A Marshall 3A Monroe 3A Montgomery 3A Neshoba 3A Newton 3A Noxubee 3A Oktibbeha 3A Panola 2A Pearl River* 3A Perry* 3A Pike* 3A Pontotoc 3A Prentiss 3A Quitman 3A Rankin* 3A Scott 3A Sharkey 3A Simpson* 3A Smith* 2A Stone* 3A Sunflower 3A Tallahatchie 3A Tate 3A Tippah 3A Tishomingo 3A Tunica 3A Union 3A Walthall* 3A Warren* 3A Washington 3A Wayne* 3A Webster 3A Wilkinson* 3A Winston 3A Yalobusha 3A Yazoo MISSOURI 5A Adair 5A Andrew 5A Atchison 4A Audrain 4A Barry 4A Barton 4A Bates 4A Benton 4A Bollinger 4A Boone 5A Buchanan 4A Butler 5A Caldwell 4A Callaway 4A Camden

4A Cape Girardeau 4A Carroll 4A Carter 4A Cass 4A Cedar 5A Chariton 4A Christian 5A Clark 4A Clay 5A Clinton 4A Cole 4A Cooper 4A Crawford 4A Dade 4A Dallas 5A Daviess 5A DeKalb 4A Dent 4A Douglas 4A Dunklin 4A Franklin 4A Gasconade 5A Gentry 4A Greene 5A Grundy 5A Harrison 4A Henry 4A Hickory 5A Holt 4A Howard 4A Howell 4A Iron 4A Jackson 4A Jasper 4A Jefferson 4A Johnson 5A Knox 4A Laclede 4A Lafayette 4A Lawrence 5A Lewis 4A Lincoln 5A Linn 5A Livingston 5A Macon 4A Madison 4A Maries 5A Marion 4A McDonald 5A Mercer 4A Miller 4A Mississippi 4A Moniteau 4A Monroe 4A Montgomery 4A Morgan

4A New Madrid 4A Newton 5A Nodaway 4A Oregon 4A Osage 4A Ozark 4A Pemiscot 4A Perry 4A Pettis 4A Phelps 5A Pike 4A Platte 4A Polk 4A Pulaski 5A Putnam 5A Ralls 4A Randolph 4A Ray 4A Reynolds 4A Ripley 4A Saline 5A Schuyler 5A Scotland 4A Scott 4A Shannon 5A Shelby 4A St. Charles 4A St. Clair 4A Ste. Genevieve 4A St. Francois 4A St. Louis 4A St. Louis (city) 4A Stoddard 4A Stone 5A Sullivan 4A Taney 4A Texas 4A Vernon 4A Warren 4A Washington 4A Wayne 4A Webster 5A Worth 4A Wright MONTANA 6B (all) NEBRASKA 5A (all) NEVADA 5B Carson City (city) 5B Churchill

3B Clark 5B Douglas 5B Elko 5B Esmeralda 5B Eureka 5B Humboldt 5B Lander 5B Lincoln 5B Lyon 5B Mineral 5B Nye 5B Pershing 5B Storey 5B Washoe 5B White Pine NEW HAMPSHIRE 6A Belknap 6A Carroll 5A Cheshire 6A Coos 6A Grafton 5A Hillsborough 6A Merrimack 5A Rockingham 5A Strafford 6A Sullivan NEW JERSEY 4A Atlantic 5A Bergen 4A Burlington 4A Camden 4A Cape May 4A Cumberland 4A Essex 4A Gloucester 4A Hudson 5A Hunterdon 5A Mercer 4A Middlesex 4A Monmouth 5A Morris 4A Ocean 5A Passaic 4A Salem 5A Somerset 5A Sussex 4A Union 5A Warren NEW MEXICO 4B Bernalillo 5B Catron 3B Chaves 4B Cibola 5B Colfax

4B Curry 4B DeBaca 3B Dona Ana 3B Eddy 4B Grant 4B Guadalupe 5B Harding 3B Hidalgo 3B Lea 4B Lincoln 5B Los Alamos 3B Luna 5B McKinley 5B Mora 3B Otero 4B Quay 5B Rio Arriba 4B Roosevelt 5B Sandoval 5B San Juan 5B San Miguel 5B Santa Fe 4B Sierra 4B Socorro 5B Taos 5B Torrance 4B Union 4B Valencia NEW YORK 5A Albany 6A Allegany 4A Bronx 6A Broome 6A Cattaraugus 5A Cayuga 5A Chautauqua 5A Chemung 6A Chenango 6A Clinton 5A Columbia 5A Cortland 6A Delaware 5A Dutchess 5A Erie 6A Essex 6A Franklin 6A Fulton 5A Genesee 5A Greene 6A Hamilton 6A Herkimer 6A Jefferson 4A Kings 6A Lewis 5A Livingston 6A Madison

5A Monroe 6A Montgomery 4A Nassau 4A New York 5A Niagara 6A Oneida 5A Onondaga 5A Ontario 5A Orange 5A Orleans 5A Oswego 6A Otsego 5A Putnam 4A Queens 5A Rensselaer 4A Richmond 5A Rockland 5A Saratoga 5A Schenectady 6A Schoharie 6A Schuyler 5A Seneca 6A Steuben 6A St. Lawrence 4A Suffolk 6A Sullivan 5A Tioga 6A Tompkins 6A Ulster 6A Warren 5A Washington 5A Wayne 4A Westchester 6A Wyoming 5A Yates NORTH CAROLINA 4A Alamance 4A Alexander 5A Alleghany 3A Anson 5A Ashe 5A Avery 3A Beaufort 4A Bertie 3A Bladen 3A Brunswick* 4A Buncombe 4A Burke 3A Cabarrus 4A Caldwell 3A Camden 3A Carteret* 4A Caswell 4A Catawba 4A Chatham 4A Cherokee

3A Chowan 4A Clay 4A Cleveland 3A Columbus* 3A Craven 3A Cumberland 3A Currituck 3A Dare 3A Davidson 4A Davie 3A Duplin 4A Durham 3A Edgecombe 4A Forsyth 4A Franklin 3A Gaston 4A Gates 4A Graham 4A Granville 3A Greene 4A Guilford 4A Halifax 4A Harnett 4A Haywood 4A Henderson 4A Hertford 3A Hoke 3A Hyde 4A Iredell 4A Jackson 3A Johnston 3A Jones 4A Lee 3A Lenoir 4A Lincoln 4A Macon 4A Madison 3A Martin 4A McDowell 3A Mecklenburg 5A Mitchell 3A Montgomery 3A Moore 4A Nash 3A New Hanover* 4A Northampton 3A Onslow* 4A Orange 3A Pamlico 3A Pasquotank 3A Pender* 3A Perquimans 4A Person 3A Pitt 4A Polk 3A Randolph 3A Richmond

3A Robeson 4A Rockingham 3A Rowan 4A Rutherford 3A Sampson 3A Scotland 3A Stanly 4A Stokes 4A Surry 4A Swain 4A Transylvania 3A Tyrrell 3A Union 4A Vance 4A Wake 4A Warren 3A Washington 5A Watauga 3A Wayne 4A Wilkes 3A Wilson 4A Yadkin 5A Yancey NORTH DAKOTA 6A Adams 7 Barnes 7 Benson 6A Billings 7 Bottineau 6A Bowman 7 Burke 6A Burleigh 7 Cass 7 Cavalier 6A Dickey 7 Divide 6A Dunn 7 Eddy 6A Emmons 7 Foster 6A Golden Valley 7 Grand Forks 6A Grant 7 Griggs 6A Hettinger 7 Kidder 6A LaMoure 6A Logan 7 McHenry 6A McIntosh 6A McKenzie 7 McLean 6A Mercer 6A Morton 7 Mountrail 7 Nelson

6A Oliver 7 Pembina 7 Pierce 7 Ramsey 6A Ransom 7 Renville 6A Richland 7 Rolette 6A Sargent 7 Sheridan 6A Sioux 6A Slope 6A Stark 7 Steele 7 Stutsman 7 Towner 7 Traill 7 Walsh 7 Ward 7 Wells 7 Williams OHIO 4A Adams 5A Allen 5A Ashland 5A Ashtabula 5A Athens 5A Auglaize 5A Belmont 4A Brown 5A Butler 5A Carroll 5A Champaign 5A Clark 4A Clermont 5A Clinton 5A Columbiana 5A Coshocton 5A Crawford 5A Cuyahoga 5A Darke 5A Defiance 5A Delaware 5A Erie 5A Fairfield 5A Fayette 5A Franklin 5A Fulton 4A Gallia 5A Geauga 5A Greene 5A Guernsey 4A Hamilton 5A Hancock 5A Hardin 5A Harrison

5A Henry 5A Highland 5A Hocking 5A Holmes 5A Huron 5A Jackson 5A Jefferson 5A Knox 5A Lake 4A Lawrence 5A Licking 5A Logan 5A Lorain 5A Lucas 5A Madison 5A Mahoning 5A Marion 5A Medina 5A Meigs 5A Mercer 5A Miami 5A Monroe 5A Montgomery 5A Morgan 5A Morrow 5A Muskingum 5A Noble 5A Ottawa 5A Paulding 5A Perry 5A Pickaway 4A Pike 5A Portage 5A Preble 5A Putnam 5A Richland 5A Ross 5A Sandusky 4A Scioto 5A Seneca 5A Shelby 5A Stark 5A Summit 5A Trumbull 5A Tuscarawas 5A Union 5A Van Wert 5A Vinton 5A Warren 4A Washington 5A Wayne 5A Williams 5A Wood 5A Wyandot OKLAHOMA 3A Adair

3A Alfalfa 3A Atoka 4B Beaver 3A Beckham 3A Blaine 3A Bryan 3A Caddo 3A Canadian 3A Carter 3A Cherokee 3A Choctaw 4B Cimarron 3A Cleveland 3A Coal 3A Comanche 3A Cotton 3A Craig 3A Creek 3A Custer 3A Delaware 3A Dewey 3A Ellis 3A Garfield 3A Garvin 3A Grady 3A Grant 3A Greer 3A Harmon 3A Harper 3A Haskell 3A Hughes 3A Jackson 3A Jefferson 3A Johnston 3A Kay 3A Kingfisher 3A Kiowa 3A Latimer 3A Le Flore 3A Lincoln 3A Logan 3A Love 3A Major 3A Marshall 3A Mayes 3A McClain 3A McCurtain 3A McIntosh 3A Murray 3A Muskogee 3A Noble 3A Nowata 3A Okfuskee 3A Oklahoma 3A Okmulgee 3A Osage 3A Ottawa

3A Pawnee 3A Payne 3A Pittsburg 3A Pontotoc 3A Pottawatomie 3A Pushmataha 3A Roger Mills 3A Rogers 3A Seminole 3A Sequoyah 3A Stephens 4B Texas 3A Tillman 3A Tulsa 3A Wagoner 3A Washington 3A Washita 3A Woods 3A Woodward OREGON 5B Baker 4C Benton 4C Clackamas 4C Clatsop 4C Columbia 4C Coos 5B Crook 4C Curry 5B Deschutes 4C Douglas 5B Gilliam 5B Grant 5B Harney 5B Hood River 4C Jackson 5B Jefferson 4C Josephine 5B Klamath 5B Lake 4C Lane 4C Lincoln 4C Linn 5B Malheur 4C Marion 5B Morrow 4C Multnomah 4C Polk 5B Sherman 4C Tillamook 5B Umatilla 5B Union 5B Wallowa 5B Wasco 4C Washington 5B Wheeler 4C Yamhill

PENNSYLVANIA 5A Adams 5A Allegheny 5A Armstrong 5A Beaver 5A Bedford 5A Berks 5A Blair 5A Bradford 4A Bucks 5A Butler 5A Cambria 6A Cameron 5A Carbon 5A Centre 4A Chester 5A Clarion 6A Clearfield 5A Clinton 5A Columbia 5A Crawford 5A Cumberland 5A Dauphin 4A Delaware 6A Elk 5A Erie 5A Fayette 5A Forest 5A Franklin 5A Fulton 5A Greene 5A Huntingdon 5A Indiana 5A Jefferson 5A Juniata 5A Lackawanna 5A Lancaster 5A Lawrence 5A Lebanon 5A Lehigh 5A Luzerne 5A Lycoming 6A McKean 5A Mercer 5A Mifflin 5A Monroe 4A Montgomery 5A Montour 5A Northampton 5A Northumberland 5A Perry 4A Philadelphia 5A Pike 6A Potter 5A Schuylkill 5A Snyder

5A Somerset 5A Sullivan 6A Susquehanna 6A Tioga 5A Union 5A Venango 5A Warren 5A Washington 6A Wayne 5A Westmoreland 5A Wyoming 4A York RHODE ISLAND 5A (all) SOUTH CAROLINA 3A Abbeville 3A Aiken 3A Allendale* 3A Anderson 3A Bamberg* 3A Barnwell* 3A Beaufort* 3A Berkeley* 3A Calhoun 3A Charleston* 3A Cherokee 3A Chester 3A Chesterfield 3A Clarendon 3A Colleton* 3A Darlington 3A Dillon 3A Dorchester* 3A Edgefield 3A Fairfield 3A Florence 3A Georgetown* 3A Greenville 3A Greenwood 3A Hampton* 3A Horry* 3A Jasper* 3A Kershaw 3A Lancaster 3A Laurens 3A Lee 3A Lexington 3A Marion 3A Marlboro 3A McCormick 3A Newberry 3A Oconee 3A Orangeburg 3A Pickens 3A Richland

3A Saluda 3A Spartanburg 3A Sumter 3A Union 3A Williamsburg 3A York SOUTH DAKOTA 6A Aurora 6A Beadle 5A Bennett 5A Bon Homme 6A Brookings 6A Brown 6A Brule 6A Buffalo 6A Butte 6A Campbell 5A Charles Mix 6A Clark 5A Clay 6A Codington 6A Corson 6A Custer 6A Davison 6A Day 6A Deuel 6A Dewey 5A Douglas 6A Edmunds 6A Fall River 6A Faulk 6A Grant 5A Gregory 6A Haakon 6A Hamlin 6A Hand 6A Hanson 6A Harding 6A Hughes 5A Hutchinson 6A Hyde 5A Jackson 6A Jerauld 6A Jones 6A Kingsbury 6A Lake 6A Lawrence 6A Lincoln 6A Lyman 6A Marshall 6A McCook 6A McPherson 6A Meade 5A Mellette 6A Miner 6A Minnehaha

6A Moody 6A Pennington 6A Perkins 6A Potter 6A Roberts 6A Sanborn 6A Shannon 6A Spink 6A Stanley 6A Sully 5A Todd 5A Tripp 6A Turner 5A Union 6A Walworth 5A Yankton 6A Ziebach TENNESSEE 4A Anderson 4A Bedford 4A Benton 4A Bledsoe 4A Blount 4A Bradley 4A Campbell 4A Cannon 4A Carroll 4A Carter 4A Cheatham 3A Chester 4A Claiborne 4A Clay 4A Cocke 4A Coffee 3A Crockett 4A Cumberland 4A Davidson 4A Decatur 4A DeKalb 4A Dickson 3A Dyer 3A Fayette 4A Fentress 4A Franklin 4A Gibson 4A Giles 4A Grainger 4A Greene 4A Grundy 4A Hamblen 4A Hamilton 4A Hancock 3A Hardeman 3A Hardin 4A Hawkins 3A Haywood

3A Henderson 4A Henry 4A Hickman 4A Houston 4A Humphreys 4A Jackson 4A Jefferson 4A Johnson 4A Knox 3A Lake 3A Lauderdale 4A Lawrence 4A Lewis 4A Lincoln 4A Loudon 4A Macon 3A Madison 4A Marion 4A Marshall 4A Maury 4A McMinn 3A McNairy 4A Meigs 4A Monroe 4A Montgomery 4A Moore 4A Morgan 4A Obion 4A Overton 4A Perry 4A Pickett 4A Polk 4A Putnam 4A Rhea 4A Roane 4A Robertson 4A Rutherford 4A Scott 4A Sequatchie 4A Sevier 3A Shelby 4A Smith 4A Stewart 4A Sullivan 4A Sumner 3A Tipton 4A Trousdale 4A Unicoi 4A Union 4A Van Buren 4A Warren 4A Washington 4A Wayne 4A Weakley 4A White 4A Williamson 4A Wilson

TEXAS 2A Anderson* 3B Andrews 2A Angelina* 2A Aransas* 3A Archer 4B Armstrong 2A Atascosa* 2A Austin* 4B Bailey 2B Bandera* 2A Bastrop* 3B Baylor 2A Bee* 2A Bell* 2A Bexar* 3A Blanco* 3B Borden 2A Bosque* 3A Bowie* 2A Brazoria* 2A Brazos* 3B Brewster 4B Briscoe 2A Brooks* 3A Brown* 2A Burleson* 3A Burnet* 2A Caldwell* 2A Calhoun* 3B Callahan 2A Cameron* 3A Camp* 4B Carson 3A Cass* 4B Castro 2A Chambers* 2A Cherokee* 3B Childress 3A Clay 4B Cochran 3B Coke 3B Coleman 3A Collin* 3B Collingsworth 2A Colorado* 2A Comal* 3A Comanche* 3B Concho 3A Cooke 2A Coryell* 3B Cottle 3B Crane 3B Crockett 3B Crosby 3B Culberson

4B Dallam 3A Dallas* 3B Dawson 4B Deaf Smith 3A Delta 3A Denton* 2A DeWitt* 3B Dickens 2B Dimmit* 4B Donley 2A Duval* 3A Eastland 3B Ector 2B Edwards* 3A Ellis* 3B El Paso 3A Erath* 2A Falls* 3A Fannin 2A Fayette* 3B Fisher 4B Floyd 3B Foard 2A Fort Bend* 3A Franklin* 2A Freestone* 2B Frio* 3B Gaines 2A Galveston* 3B Garza 3A Gillespie* 3B Glasscock 2A Goliad* 2A Gonzales* 4B Gray 3A Grayson 3A Gregg* 2A Grimes* 2A Guadalupe* 4B Hale 3B Hall 3A Hamilton* 4B Hansford 3B Hardeman 2A Hardin* 2A Harris* 3A Harrison* 4B Hartley 3B Haskell 2A Hays* 3B Hemphill 3A Henderson* 2A Hidalgo* 2A Hill* 4B Hockley 3A Hood* 3A Hopkins*

2A Houston* 3B Howard 3B Hudspeth 3A Hunt* 4B Hutchinson 3B Irion 3A Jack 2A Jackson* 2A Jasper* 3B Jeff Davis 2A Jefferson* 2A Jim Hogg* 2A Jim Wells* 3A Johnson* 3B Jones 2A Karnes* 3A Kaufman* 3A Kendall* 2A Kenedy* 3B Kent 3B Kerr 3B Kimble 3B King 2B Kinney* 2A Kleberg* 3B Knox 3A Lamar* 4B Lamb 3A Lampasas* 2B La Salle* 2A Lavaca* 2A Lee* 2A Leon* 2A Liberty* 2A Limestone* 4B Lipscomb 2A Live Oak* 3A Llano* 3B Loving 3B Lubbock 3B Lynn 2A Madison* 3A Marion* 3B Martin 3B Mason 2A Matagorda* 2B Maverick* 3B McCulloch 2A McLennan* 2A McMullen* 2B Medina* 3B Menard 3B Midland 2A Milam* 3A Mills* 3B Mitchell 3A Montague

2A Montgomery* 4B Moore 3A Morris* 3B Motley 3A Nacogdoches* 3A Navarro* 2A Newton* 3B Nolan 2A Nueces* 4B Ochiltree 4B Oldham 2A Orange* 3A Palo Pinto* 3A Panola* 3A Parker* 4B Parmer 3B Pecos 2A Polk* 4B Potter 3B Presidio 3A Rains* 4B Randall 3B Reagan 2B Real* 3A Red River* 3B Reeves 2A Refugio* 4B Roberts 2A Robertson* 3A Rockwall* 3B Runnels 3A Rusk* 3A Sabine* 3A San Augustine* 2A San Jacinto* 2A San Patricio* 3A San Saba* 3B Schleicher 3B Scurry 3B Shackelford 3A Shelby* 4B Sherman 3A Smith* 3A Somervell* 2A Starr* 3A Stephens 3B Sterling 3B Stonewall 3B Sutton 4B Swisher 3A Tarrant* 3B Taylor 3B Terrell 3B Terry 3B Throckmorton 3A Titus*

3B Tom Green 2A Travis* 2A Trinity* 2A Tyler* 3A Upshur* 3B Upton 2B Uvalde* 2B Val Verde* 3A Van Zandt* 2A Victoria* 2A Walker* 2A Waller* 3B Ward 2A Washington* 2B Webb* 2A Wharton* 3B Wheeler 3A Wichita 3B Wilbarger 2A Willacy* 2A Williamson* 2A Wilson* 3B Winkler 3A Wise 3A Wood* 4B Yoakum 3A Young 2B Zapata* 2B Zavala* UTAH 5B Beaver 6B Box Elder 6B Cache 6B Carbon 6B Daggett 5B Davis 6B Duchesne 5B Emery 5B Garfield 5B Grand 5B Iron 5B Juab 5B Kane 5B Millard 6B Morgan 5B Piute 6B Rich 5B Salt Lake 5B San Juan 5B Sanpete 5B Sevier 6B Summit 5B Tooele 6B Uintah 5B Utah 6B Wasatch

3B Washington 5B Wayne 5B Weber VERMONT 6A (all) VIRGINIA 4A (all) WASHINGTON 5B Adams 5B Asotin 5B Benton 5B Chelan 4C Clallam 4C Clark 5B Columbia 4C Cowlitz 5B Douglas 6B Ferry 5B Franklin 5B Garfield 5B Grant 4C Grays Harbor 4C Island 4C Jefferson 4C King 4C Kitsap 5B Kittitas 5B Klickitat 4C Lewis 5B Lincoln 4C Mason 6B Okanogan 4C Pacific 6B Pend Oreille 4C Pierce 4C San Juan 4C Skagit 5B Skamania 4C Snohomish 5B Spokane 6B Stevens 4C Thurston 4C Wahkiakum 5B Walla Walla 4C Whatcom 5B Whitman 5B Yakima WEST VIRGINIA 5A Barbour 4A Berkeley 4A Boone 4A Braxton 5A Brooke

4A Cabell 4A Calhoun 4A Clay 5A Doddridge 5A Fayette 4A Gilmer 5A Grant 5A Greenbrier 5A Hampshire 5A Hancock 5A Hardy 5A Harrison 4A Jackson 4A Jefferson 4A Kanawha 5A Lewis 4A Lincoln 4A Logan 5A Marion 5A Marshall 4A Mason 4A McDowell 4A Mercer 5A Mineral 4A Mingo 5A Monongalia 4A Monroe 4A Morgan 5A Nicholas 5A Ohio 5A Pendleton 4A Pleasants 5A Pocahontas 5A Preston 4A Putnam 5A Raleigh 5A Randolph 4A Ritchie 4A Roane 5A Summers 5A Taylor 5A Tucker 4A Tyler 5A Upshur 4A Wayne 5A Webster 5A Wetzel 4A Wirt 4A Wood 4A Wyoming WISCONSIN 6A Adams 7 Ashland 6A Barron 7 Bayfield 6A Brown

6A Buffalo 7 Burnett 6A Calumet 6A Chippewa 6A Clark 6A Columbia 6A Crawford 6A Dane 6A Dodge 6A Door 7 Douglas 6A Dunn 6A Eau Claire 7 Florence 6A Fond du Lac 7 Forest 6A Grant 6A Green 6A Green Lake 6A Iowa 7 Iron 6A Jackson 6A Jefferson 6A Juneau 6A Kenosha 6A Kewaunee 6A La Crosse 6A Lafayette 7 Langlade 7 Lincoln 6A Manitowoc 6A Marathon 6A Marinette 6A Marquette 6A Menominee 6A Milwaukee 6A Monroe 6A Oconto 7 Oneida 6A Outagamie 6A Ozaukee 6A Pepin 6A Pierce 6A Polk 6A Portage 7 Price 6A Racine 6A Richland 6A Rock 6A Rusk 6A Sauk 7 Sawyer 6A Shawano 6A Sheboygan 6A St. Croix 7 Taylor 6A Trempealeau

6A Vernon 7 Vilas 6A Walworth 7 Washburn 6A Washington 6A Waukesha 6A Waupaca 6A Waushara 6A Winnebago 6A Wood WYOMING 6B Albany 6B Big Horn 6B Campbell 6B Carbon 6B Converse 6B Crook 6B Fremont 5B Goshen 6B Hot Springs 6B Johnson 6B Laramie 7 Lincoln 6B Natrona 6B Niobrara 6B Park 5B Platte 6B Sheridan 7 Sublette 6B Sweetwater 7 Teton 6B Uinta 6B Washakie 6B Weston US TERRITORIES AMERICAN SAMOA 1A (all)* GUAM 1A (all)* NORTHERN MARIANA ISLANDS 1A (all)* PUERTO RICO 1A (all)* VIRGIN ISLANDS 1A (all)*

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 07 2119-1BIRMINGHAM, AL FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATIONPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 07 2119FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION


A. Foamed-in-place insulation.1. In masonry cavity walls.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by

Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.B. ASTM D2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2012.C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2013a.D. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2013.E. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across theSpecimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).

F. ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2013.1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide product description, insulation properties, overcoat properties, and

preparation requirements.1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the typespecified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified, withminimum three years documented experience.

1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTSA. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke limitations.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not apply foam when temperature is below that specified by the manufacturer for ambient air

and substrate.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Foamed-In-Place Insulation: Medium-density, rigid or semi-rigid, open or closed cellpolyurethane foam; foamed on-site, using blowing agent of water or non-ozone-depleting gas.1. Aged Thermal Resistance (R-value): 5 (deg F hr sq ft)/Btu (0.9 (K sqm)/W), minimum,

when tested at 1 inch (25.4 mm) thickness in accordance with ASTM C518 after aging for180 days at 41 degrees F (23 degrees C).

2. Water Absorption: Less than 2 percent by volume, maximum, when tested in accordancewith ASTM D2842.

3. Air Permeance: 0.004 cfm/sq ft (0.2 L/second sq meter), maximum, when tested atintended thickness in accordance with ASTM E2178 or ASTM E283 at 1.5 psf (75 Pa).

4. Closed Cell Content: At least 90 percent.5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/450,

maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.6. Products:

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 07 2119-2BIRMINGHAM, AL FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATIONPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

2.02 ACCESSORIESA. Primer: As required by insulation manufacturer.


A. Verify work within construction spaces or crevices is complete prior to insulation application.B. Verify that surfaces are clean, dry, and free of matter that may inhibit insulation or overcoat

adhesion.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Mask and protect adjacent surfaces from over spray or dusting.B. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 APPLICATIONA. Apply insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.04 PROTECTIONA. Do not permit subsequent construction work to disturb applied insulation.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 07 2500-1BIRMINGHAM, AL WEATHER BARRIERSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 07 2500WEATHER BARRIERS


A. Water-Resistive Barrier: Under exterior wall cladding, over sheathing or other substrate; not airtight or vapor retardant.

B. Air Barriers: Materials that form a system to stop passage of air through exterior walls, jointsbetween exterior walls and roof, and joints around frames of openings in exterior walls.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Vapor retarder under concrete slabs on grade.B. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Water-resistive barrier under exterior cladding.C. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Water-resistive barrier under exterior cladding.D. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Vapor retarder installed in conjunction with batt

insulation.E. Section 07 2400 - Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems: Water-resistive barrier under exterior

insulation.F. Section 07 5400 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: Vapor retarder installed as part of roofing

system.G. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal flashings installed in conjunction with

weather barriers.H. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Sealant materials and installation techniques.I. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Water-resistive barrier under exterior cladding.

1.03 DEFINITIONSA. Weather Barrier: Assemblies that form either water-resistive barriers, air barriers, or vapor

retarders.B. Air Barrier: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively air impermeable but water vapor

permeable, both to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacentsurfaces. Note: For the purposes of this specification, vapor impermeable air barriers areclassified as vapor retarders.

C. Water-Resistive Barrier: Water-shedding barrier made of material that is moisture-resistant, tothe degree specified, intended to be installed to shed water without sealed seams.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C836/C836M - Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied

Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course; 2012.B. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic

Elastomers--Tension; 2006a (Reapproved 2013).C. ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous

Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2013.D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2013a.E. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2013.F. ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2013.G. ICC-ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.;

2013.


H. ICC-ES AC212 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Coatings Used as Water-ResistiveBarriers over Exterior Sheathing; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.; 2012.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics.C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation, installation methods, and storage

and handling criteria.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 WEATHER BARRIER ASSEMBLIES

A. Water-Resistive Barrier: Provide on exterior walls under exterior cladding.B. Air Barrier:

1. On outside surface of inside wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls use air barrier coating.2. On outside surface of sheathing of exterior walls use air barrier coating.

2.02 AIR BARRIER MATERIALS (WATER VAPOR PERMEABLE AND WATER-RESISTIVE)A. Air Barrier, Fluid Applied: Vapor permeable, elastomeric waterproofing.B. Air Barrier Coating:

1. Material: Silica-fortified rubber.2. Acceptable Substrates: Stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation on visibly damp

surfaces and concrete that has hardened but is not fully cured ("green" concrete) withoutrequiring a primer.

3. Adhesion to Paper and Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Sufficient to ensure failure due todelamination of sheathing.

4. Dry Film Thickness: 10 mils (0.010 inch) (25 mm), minimum.5. Air Permeance: 0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot (0.02 L/s/sq m), maximum,

when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178.6. Water Vapor Permeance: 10 perms (574 ng/(Pa s sq m)), minimum, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.7. Ultraviolet and Weathering Resistance: Approved in writing by manufacturer for minimum

of 3 months weather exposure.8. Elongation: 300 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D412.9. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed

index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.10. Nail Sealability: Pass, when tested in accordance with ASTM D1970.11. Code Acceptance: Comply with applicable requirements of ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria

AC212.12. Sealants, Tapes and Accessories: As recommended by coating manufacturer.13. Products:

a. BASF Corporation; ENERSHIELD-HP: www.enershield.basf.com.b. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing, Inc.; Barritech-VP: www.carlisle-ccw.com.c. Epro Services, Inc.; ECOFLEX-PS: www.eproserv.com.d. Mar-flex Waterproofing & Building Products; Air Barrier 1200VP: www.mar-flex.com.e. Parex USA, Inc.; Parex USA WeatherSeal Trowel-on (with gauging aggregate):

www.parexusa.com.f. Parex USA, Inc.; Parex USA WeatherSeal Spray & Roll-on: www.parexusa.com.g. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Air-Shield LMP: www.wrmeadows.com.h. W.R. Grace, Inc.; Permabarrier VP.i. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 SEALANTSA. Silicone Sealant: as specified in Section 07 9005.


B. Sealant Backers: As specified in Section 07 9005.C. Primers, Cleaners, and Other Sealant Materials: As recommended by sealant manufacturer,

appropriate to application, and compatible with adjacent materials.2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive sheet flashing complying with ASTM D1970, except slipresistance requirement is waived if not installed on a roof.1. Composition: Any material that meets physical requirements of ASTM D1970 with

exceptions indicated.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere withproper installation.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Water-Resistive Barriers: Install continuous barrier over surfaces indicated, with sheets lapped

to shed water but with seams not sealed.C. Air Barriers: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and

with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.D. Coatings:

1. Prepare substrate in manner recommended by coating manufacturer; treat joints insubstrate and between dissimilar materials as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Where exterior masonry veneer is to be installed, install masonry anchors before installingweather barrier over masonry; seal around anchors air tight.

3. Use flashing to seal to adjacent construction and to bridge joints.E. Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Weather Barriers:

1. Install flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at least 5 inches(125 mm) onto weather barrier and at least 6 inches (150 mm) up jambs; mechanicallyfasten stretched edges.

2. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flangesusing a continuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with at least 4inches (100 mm) wide; do not seal sill flange.

3. At openings to be filled with non-flanged frames, seal weather barrier to all sides ofopening framing, using flashing at least 9 inches (230 mm) wide, covering entire depth offraming.

4. At head of openings, install flashing under weather barrier extending at least 2 inches (50mm) beyond face of jambs; seal weather barrier to flashing.

5. At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing,using joint sealant over backer rod.

6. Service and Other Penetrations: Form flashing around penetrating item and seal toweather barrier surface.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Do not cover installed weather barriers until required inspections have been completed.B. Obtain approval of installation procedures by the weather barrier manufacturer based on a

mock-up installed in place, prior to proceeding with remainder of installation.


3.05 PROTECTIONA. Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 07 4113-1BIRMINGHAM, AL METAL ROOF PANELSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 07 4113METAL ROOF PANELS


A. Architectural roofing system of preformed aluminum panels.B. Thermal roof insulation.C. Fastening system.D. Factory finishing.E. Accessories and miscellaneous components.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing.B. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Rigid roof insulation.C. Section 07 4213 - Metal Wall Panels: Preformed wall panels.D. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Field-installed sealants.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010.B. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

[Metric]; 2010.C. ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous

Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2013.D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2013a.E. ASTM E108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings; 2011.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.2. Installation methods.3. Specimen warranty.

C. Shop Drawings: Include layouts of roof panels, details of edge and penetration conditions,spacing and type of connections, flashings, underlayments, and special conditions.1. Show work to be field-fabricated or field-assembled.

D. Warranty: Submit specified manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have beencompleted in Owner's name and are registered with manufacturer.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of roofing systems

similar to those required for this project.B. Installer Qualifications: Company trained and authorized by roofing system manufacturer.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Provide strippable plastic protection on prefinished roofing panels for removal after installation.B. Store roofing panels on project site as recommended by manufacturer to minimize damage to

panels prior to installation.1.07 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.


B. Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s special warranty covering failure of factory-appliedexterior finish on metal roof panels and agreeing to repair or replace panels that show evidenceof finish degradation, including significant fading, chalking, cracking, or peeling within specifiedwarranty period of 5 year period from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Waterproofing Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s warranty for weathertightness of roofingsystem, including agreement to repair or replace roofing that fails to keep out water withinspecified warranty period of 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.


A. Acceptable manufacturers are:1. Architectural Building Components: www.archmetalroof.com.2. ATAS International, Inc: www.atas.com.3. Petersen Aluminum Corporation: www.pac-clad.com.

2.02 ARCHITECTURAL METAL ROOF PANELSA. Architectural Metal Roofing: Provide complete engineered system complying with specified

requirements and capable of remaining weathertight while withstanding anticipated movementof substrate and thermally induced movement of roofing system.

B. Metal Panels: Factory-formed panels with factory-applied finish.1. Aluminum Panels:

a. Alloy: Aluminum conforming to ASTM B209/B 209M; temper as required for forming.b. Thickness: Minimum 0.028 inch (0.7 mm).

2. Profile: Standing seam, with minimum 2.0 inch (51 mm) seam height; concealed fastenersystem for field seaming with special tool.

3. Texture: Smooth.4. Length: Maximum possible length to minimize lapped joints. Where lapped joints are

unavoidable, space laps so that each sheet spans over three or more supports.5. Width: Maximum panel coverage of 24 inches (610 mm).

2.03 ATTACHMENT SYSTEMA. Concealed System: Provide manufacturer's standard stainless steel or nylon-coated aluminum

concealed anchor clips designed for specific roofing system and engineered to meetperformance requirements, including anticipated thermal movement.

2.04 PANEL FINISHA. Fluoropolymer Coating System: Manufacturer’s standard multi-coat thermocured coating

system, including minimum 70 percent fluoropolymer color topcoat with minimum total dry filmthickness of 0.9 mil (0.023 mm); color and gloss to match sample.

2.05 ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMSA. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Items: Provide flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings,

closure strips, preformed crickets, caps, and equipment curbs of the same material, thickness,and finish as used for the roofing panels. Items completely concealed after installation mayoptionally be made of stainless steel.1. Downspouts: Open face, rectangular profile.

B. Rib and Ridge Closures: Provide prefabricated, close-fitting components of steel with corrosionresistant finish or combination steel and closed-cell foam.

C. Sealants: As specified in Section 07 9005.1. Exposed sealant must cure to rubber-like consistency.2. Concealed sealant must be non-hardening type.

D. Thermal Insulation: Provide rigid type, faced with white, flexible, non-dusting vapor retardertested for maximum flame-spread rating of 50, per ASTM E84; for installation using spacerblocks.


1. Thickness: As indicated.E. Underlayment: Synthetic non-asphaltic sheet, intended by manufacturer for mechanically

fastened roofing underlayment without sealed seams.1. Self Sealability: Passing nail sealability test specified in ASTM D1970/D1970M.2. Flammability: Minimum of Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E108.3. Low Temperature Flexibility: Passing test specified in ASTM D1970/D1970M.4. Fasteners: As specified by manufacturer and building code qualification report or

approval, if any.2.06 FABRICATION

A. Panels: Fabricate panels and accessory items at factory, using manufacturer’s standardprocesses as required to achieve specified appearance and performance requirements.


A. Do not begin installation of preformed metal roof panels until substrates have been properlyprepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactorypreparation before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Broom clean wood sheathing prior to installation of roofing system.B. Coordinate roofing work with provisions for roof drainage, flashing, trim, penetrations, and other

adjoining work to assure that the completed roof will be free of leaks.C. Remove protective film from surface of roof panels immediately prior to installation. Strip film

carefully, to avoid damage to prefinished surfaces.D. Separate dissimilar metals by applying a bituminous coating, self-adhering rubberized asphalt

sheet, or other permanent method approved by roof panel manufacturer.E. Where metal will be in contact with wood or other absorbent material subject to wetting, seal

joints with sealing compound and apply one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Overall: Install roofing system in accordance with approved shop drawings and panelmanufacturer's instructions and recommendations, as applicable to specific project conditions.Anchor all components of roofing system securely in place while allowing for thermal andstructural movement.1. Install roofing system with concealed clips and fasteners, except as otherwise

recommended by manufacturer for specific circumstances.2. Minimize field cutting of panels. Where field cutting is absolutely required, use methods

that will not distort panel profiles. Use of torches for field cutting is absolutely prohibited.B. Accessories: Install all components required for a complete roofing assembly, including

flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings, closure strips, preformed crickets, caps,equipment curbs, rib closures, ridge closures, and similar roof accessory items.

C. Install roofing felt and building paper slip sheet on roof deck before installing preformed metalroof panels. Secure by methods acceptable to roof panel manufacturer, minimizing use of metalfasteners. Apply from eaves to ridge in shingle fashion, overlapping horizontal joints a minimumof 2 inches (50 mm) and side and end laps a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm). Offset seams inbuilding paper and seams in roofing felt.

D. Roof Panels: Install panels in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, minimizingtransverse joints except at junction with penetrations.1. Form weathertight standing seams incorporating concealed clips, using an automatic

mechanical seaming device approved by the panel manufacturer.


2. Install sealant or sealant tape, as recommended by panel manufacturer, at end laps andside joints.

E. Insulation: Install insulation between roof covering and supporting members to present a neatappearance. Fold, staple, and tape seams unless otherwise approved by Architect.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil films,

excess joint sealer, handling marks, and debris from installation, leaving the work clean andunmarked, free from dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, or other damage to the finish.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Do not permit storage of materials or roof traffic on installed roof panels. Provide temporary

walkways or planks as necessary to avoid damage to completed work. Protect roofing untilcompletion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged roof panels or accessories before date of SubstantialCompletion.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 07 4230-1BIRMINGHAM, AL TEXTURED METAL PLATE WALL PANELSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 07 4230TEXTURED METAL PLATE WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Textured, aluminum metal plate wall panels.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 05400 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Wall panel substrates support framing.B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Plywood substrate wall sheathingC. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Field formed flashings and other sheet metal

work.1.03 DEFINITION

A. Metal Plate Wall Panel Assembly: Metal plate wall panels, attachment system components,miscellaneous metal framing, and accessories necessary for a complete weather tight wallsystem based on AAMA CW-RS-1.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association (www.aamanet.org)

1. AAMA CW-RS-1 - The Rain Screen Principle and Pressure Equalized Wall Design; 20042. AAMA 501.1 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Windows, Curtain Walls

and Doors Using Dynamic Pressure; 20053. AAMA 501.2 - Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of Installed

Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems; 20094. AAMA 508 - Voluntary Test Method and Specification for Pressure Equalized Rain Screen

Wall Cladding Systems; 20075. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Standards for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 19986. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures

for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2011(Testing based on 2005 Edition)

B. ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials; www.astm.org)1. ASTM B 117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus; 20112. ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to

Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products<http://www.astm.org/Standards/C754.htm>; 2009

3. ASTM D 523 - Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss; 20084. ASTM D 2244 - Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color

Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates; 20115. ASTM D 2247 - Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100%

Relative Humidity; 20116. ASTM D 4214 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior

Paint Films; 20077. ASTM E 8/E 8M - Standard Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials; 20098. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through

Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Acrossthe Specimen; 2004.

9. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2010

10. ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2009

11. ASTM E 1233 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,Doors, Skylights, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Air Pressure Differential; 2006


C. TAS - Testing Application Standards; Florida Building Code, 20071. TAS 202 - Criteria for Testing Impact and Non-Impact Resistant Building Envelope

Components Using Uniform Static Air Pressure Loading; 19942. TAS 203 - Criteria for Testing Products Subject to Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading; 1994

D. LEED - Leadership in Energy and Environmental DesignE. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal ManufacturersF. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National AssociationG. PS - Voluntary Product Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)

1. PS-1 - Structural Plywood; 20071.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: Coordinate panel assemblies with rain drainage, flashing, trim, stud back-up,soffits, and other adjoining work.

B. Preinstallation Meeting:1. Attendees:

a. Owner.b. Architectc. Installer.d. Panel manufacturer's representative.e. Structural support installer.f. Installer's whose work interfaces with or affects wall panels including installers of

doors, windows, and louvers.2. Review and finalize construction schedule.3. Verify availability of materials, installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to

maintain schedule.4. Review means and methods related to installation, including manufacturer's written

instructions.5. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment and

attachment to structural members.6. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of other

construction that affects this Work.7. Review temporary protection requirements for during and after installation of this Work.

1.06 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Submit for each type of product indicated, include construction details, material

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type ofmetal plate wall panel and accessory.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit fabrication and installation layouts of metal plate wall panels; includingdetails of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim,flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.1. Provide distinction between factory-assembled, shop-assembled, and field-assembled

work.2. Provide details of following items at full scale.

a. Manufacturer's standard sheet metal trims.b. Components of wall panel construction, anchorage methods, and hardware.

D. Coordination Drawings: Submit exterior elevations, drawn to scale, that have the followingitems shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of these items asfollows:1. Metal plate wall panels and attachments.2. Girts.3. Wall-mounted items including doors, windows, louvers, and lighting fixtures.


4. Penetrations of wall by pipes and utilities.E. Samples: Submit for each type of exposed finish required, and prepared on samples of size as

follows:1. Aluminum Metal Plate Wall Panels: At least 2 inch by 3 inch.

F. Test and Inspection Reports: Submit test and inspection reports on each type of wall panelsystem provided for project based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by qualifiedtesting agency.

G. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for metal plate wall panels.H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's

name and registered with manufacturer.I. Sustainable Design Submittals [LEED Reports]:

1. Submit documentation from manufacturer for amounts of pre-consumer andpost-consumer recycled content for products specified, and include statement indicatingcosts for materials having recycled content.

2. Submit documentation providing location of manufacturing.1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified inthis section with at least five years of documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section and approved bymanufacturer.1. Install system in strict compliance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal plate wall panel from single source and fromsingle manufacturer.

1.08 MOCKUPSA. Mockups: Provide mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to

demonstrate aesthetic effects and to establish quality standards for fabrication and installation.1. Build mockup of typical wall panel assembly [as shown on Drawings] <insert size>,

including [corner,] [soffits,] supports, attachments, and accessories.a. Include at least four panels to represent a four-way panel joint and showing full

thickness.2. Water Spray Test: Conduct water-spray test of mockup metal panel assembly, test water

penetration in accordance with AAMA 501.2.3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviation from Contract Documents

within mockups unless these deviations are approved by Architect in writing.4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups [may] or [may not] become

part of completed Work if undisturbed upon date of Substantial Completion.1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, withlabels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.

B. Storage and Handling: Store materials in clean, dry, interior area in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions.

C. Deliver panels, components, and other manufactured items without damage or deformation.D. Protect panels during transportation, handling, and installation from weather, excessive

temperatures and construction operations.E. Handle panels in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and

in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.1. Store panels vertically with top of panel down, storage of panels horizontally is not

permitted.


F. Store panels covered with suitable weather tight and ventilated covering.G. Provide storage of panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of moisture.H. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other

surface damage.I. Remove strippable protective covering from aluminum panel prior to installation.

1.10 SITE CONDITIONSA. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit assembly of this Work to be performed according to manufacturer'sinstallation instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions byfield measurements before panel fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.1. Coordinate with construction schedule.

1.11 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Wall System Warranty: Provide wall panel manufacturer warranty, agreeing to correct defects

in manufacturing of materials within a one year period after date of Substantial Completion.1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.b. Deterioration: Beyond normal weathering of wall system metals and other materials.

C. Panel Finish Warranty: Provide panel finish manufacturer warranty, agreeing to repair finish ofmetal plate wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes withinspecified warranty period.1. Finish Warranty Period: [ ] years from date of Substantial Completion.2. Warranty Coverage: In accordance with AAMA 2605 for 70 percent PVDF resin on

aluminum finish requirements.a. Fading, Loss of Color Retention: Loss of 5 Delta E units (Hunter) or less in

accordance with ASTM D 2244.b. Chalking, Chalky White Powder on Panel Surface: Chalking at No. 8 or less for

colors or No. 6 for white in accordance with ASTM D 4214.c. Loss of Adhesion: Loss of 10 percent due to cracking, checking or peeling, or failure

to adhere to bare metal.d. Gloss Retention: 50 percent or less in accordance with ASTM D 523.e. Salt Spray, Accelerated: At least 4,000 hours in accordance with ASTM B 117.f. Humidity Testing, Accelerated: At least 4,000 hours in accordance with ASTM D

2247.3. Warranty Coverage: In accordance with AAMA 611 Class 1 anodized aluminum finish

requirements.a. Loss of Adhesion: Resists cracking, crazing, flaking, and blistering when forming and

welding completed prior to finishing; post forming or welding voids warranty.b. Fading, Loss of Color Retention: Loss of 5 Delta E units (Hunter) or less in

accordance with ASTM D 2244.c. Chalking, Chalky White Powder on Panel Surface: Chalking at No. 8 or less in

accordance with ASTM D 4214.d. Salt Spray, Accelerated: At least 3,000 hours in accordance with ASTM B 117.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Dri-Design - Aluminum Wall Panel System; Product Texture Series.1. Address: 12480 Superior Ct., Holland, Michigan 49424.2. P.O. Box 1286 Holland, Michigan 49422-1286.


3. Phone: (616) 355-2970; Fax: (616) 355-2972; Website: www.dri-design.com.2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Textured Series System: Consists of a standard aluminum wall panel with 2 1/2 by 2 1/2 inchperforated and corrugated face panel fixed to it with an overall 6 inch, nominal, panel depth.

B. Metal Plate Wall Panel Assemblies: Comply with performance requirements without failure dueto defective manufacturing, fabrication, installation, or other construction defects.

C. Design, fabricate, and erect a dry joint, pressure equalized rainscreen aluminum textured wallpanel system without use of sealants, gaskets, or butyl tape, tested as installed in compliancewith AAMA 508, and as follows.1. Pressure Equalization Cycling: Pass cycled pressure loading from 5 psf to 25 psf for 100

three-second cycles at 0.08 seconds or less; ASTM E 1233.2. Air Infiltration: 0.12 cfm per sf of wall area, tested at 1.57 psf (25 mph) in accordance with

ASTM E 283.a. Maintain air/water barrier leakage rate at 0.11 to 0.13 cfm per sf at 1.57 psf when

tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 in compliance with AAMA 508 criteria.3. Water Penetration:

a. Static: Pass water penetration test under static pressure when tested in accordancewith ASTM E 331 at a differential of 10 percent of inward acting design load, with 15psf pressure differences for at least 15 minutes with 5 gal per sf per hour of waterapplied.

b. Dynamic: Pass water penetration test under dynamic pressure of 6.24 psf inaccordance with AAMA 501.1.

4. Structural: Provide systems tested in accordance with ASTM E 330 and certified to bewithout permanent deformation or failure of structural members.

D. High Velocity Hurricane Zone (HVHZ): Comply with ASTM E 8 test methods and performancerequirements of Florida Building Code and Miami-Dade County test protocols TAS-202 andTAS-203 for HVHZ with at least plus 61 psf to minus 80 psf design pressure rating.1. Application: For aluminum plate thickness of 0.080 inch only.

2.03 MATERIALSA. Aluminum Plate: Alloy and temper as recommended by manufacturer for application and in

compliance with manufacturers design requirements.1. Aluminum Material: Tension-leveled, [flouropolymer PVDF painted finish 3003-H14

manganese alloy] or [anodized finish 5005-AQ manganese alloy].2. Wall Panel Thickness: 0.080 inch.3. Thickness of Perforated/Corrugated Face Panel: Range of 0.040 to 0.062 inches.4. Weight: Less than 4 lbs per sf.5. Finish: [Two-Coat Fluoropolymer] [Three-Coat Fluoropolymer] [Four-Coat Fluoropolymer]

[Two-Coat Mica Fluoropolymer] [Clear Anodized Finish] or [Color Anodized Finish].B. Panel Depth: 6 inch, nominal.C. Panel Size: As indicated on Drawings.D. Panel Joints: 1/8 inch.

2.04 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate and finish wall panels within manufacturer's facilities and fulfill indicated performance

requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing.1. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

2.05 FINISHESA. Comply with NAAMM's - Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products, for

recommendations of designating finishes.


B. Superior Performance Organic Coating System: AAMA 2605 multiple coat, thermally curedpolyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin system.1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605, fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70

percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pre-treat, and apply coating toexposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' installationinstructions.

2. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605, fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pre-treat, andapply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'installation instructions.

3. Two-Coat Mica Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605, fluoropolymer finish with suspended micaflakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare,pre-treat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resinmanufacturers' installation instructions.

4. Four-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605, fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat and clear coats. Prepare, pre-treat, and applycoating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'installation instructions.

C. Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, colored anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick.1. Color: [ ] or [As selected by Architect].

D. Clear Anodized Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick.E. Field Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application.

2.06 ACCESSORIESA. A. Metal Plate Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal

plate wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fascia, mullions, sills, corner units, flashings,and similar items. Match material and finish of panels unless otherwise indicated.

B. Provide integral drainage system and manufactures standard extrusions at termination ofdissimilar materials.

C. Flashing and Trim: Match material, finish, and color of adjacent wall panels.1. Thickness: At least 0.040 inch.2. Refer to Section 07 6200.

D. Panel Fasteners: Designed to withstand design loads, with at least 7/16 inch diameter headand neoprene washer.1. Aluminum Wall Panel Material: Stainless steel fasteners.

E. Sub-Girts: Galvanized, provide size and gage in accordance with project requirements.1. Furring Channel: Provide Hat, C, U or Z type as recommended by manufacturer.2. Flat Strap: At least 14 gage thick.3. Refer to Section 05 4000.

F. Substrate Wall Sheathing: Plywood, PS 1, Grade C-D, Exposure I, at least 5/8 inch thick.1. Refer to Drawings and Section 06 1000 for requirements.

G. Weather Barriers: Provide climate specific weather barrier with performance characteristics forair penetration, water vapor transmission, and water penetration resistance.1. Refer to Section 07 2500 for requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, and Work areas and conditions with Installer present for compliance withrequirements for installation tolerances, wall panel supports, and other conditions affectingperformance of this Work.


B. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural wall panelsupport members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required bywall panel manufacturer.

C. Verify that weather barrier has been installed over sheathing or substrate to prevent airinfiltration or water penetration.

D. Examine rough-in for components and systems penetrating wall panels to coordinate actualpenetration locations relative to wall panel joint locations prior to installation.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install sub-girt, base angles, sills, furring, and other wall panel supportmembers and provide anchorage in accordance with ASTM C 754 for gypsum panel typesubstrates and panel manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install wall panels in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, including pressure

equalized rainscreen installation method and installation guidelines.1. Wall panels consist of single sheets of metal formed with interlocking gutter and drainage

system integral to the panel with single horizontal attachment for dry-joint rainscreenassembly.

2. Use of secondary drainage channels, brackets, support pins, joint sealants or gaskets tomanage the drainage of wall panel system is not permitted.

3. Attach wall panels using progressive interlocking method, engaging bottom of panel in topof previous panel working bottom up, and left to right.

4. Install wall panels with single top attachment in pre-punched holes to allow individualpanels to move due to thermal expansion.

5. Do not compromise internal gutter.B. Install wall panels for orientation, sizes, and locations as indicated on Drawings.C. Install wall panels with proper anchorage and other components for this Work securely in place.D. Install wall panels with provisions for thermal and structural movement.E. Install shims to plumb substrates as necessary for installation of wall panels.F. Install weather tight seals at perimeter of wall panel openings.

1. Test for proper adhesion on small unexposed area of solid surfacing prior to use.2. Refer to Section 07 9005.

G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installationinstructions, and SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.1. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as

indicated.2. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather

resistant.3. Install flashing and trim as wall panel Work proceeds.

H. Install weather tight escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.I. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,

protect against galvanic action as recommended by wall panel manufacturer.J. Install attachment system to support wall panels and with provisions to provide a complete

weather tight wall system, including sub girts, extrusions, flashings and trim.1. Include attachment to supports and trims at locations using dissimilar materials.2. Do not apply sealants to joints, unless noted otherwise on Drawings or Shop Drawings.3. Install starter extrusion at base course and at cut panel locations.


K. Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weather tight mounting andprovisions for thermal expansion, and coordinate installation with flashings and othercomponents.1. Install components required for a complete wall panel assembly including trim, copings,

flashings and other accessory items.L. Weather Barrier: Install weather barrier behind wall panels and over substrate in accordance

with requirements of Section 07 2500.3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Shim and align wall panel units with installed tolerances of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, non-cumulative,on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Testing Agency: [Owner will engage] or [Engage] a qualified independent testing agency to

perform field tests and inspections.B. Water-Spray Test: After installation and in coordination with Mockup requirements, test area of

assembly [shown on Drawings] [as directed by Architect] or <Insert area> for water penetrationin accordance with AAMA 501.2.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test andinspect completed metal wall panel installation, including accessories.

D. Remove and replace metal wall panels where tests and inspections indicate that they do notcomply with specified requirements.

E. Perform additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, to verify compliance ofreplaced wall panels or necessary additional work with specified requirements.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.3.06 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panelmanufacturer.

B. Upon completion of wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels ofobstructions and dirt.

3.07 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction.B. Replace wall panels damaged or deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or

similar minor repair procedures.END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 07 5423.10-1BIRMINGHAM, AL THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) - 60 MILPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 07 5423.10THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) - 60 MIL


A. Thermoplastic membrane roofing system, including all components specified.B. Comply with the published recommendations and instructions of the roofing membrane

manufacturer, at http://manual.fsbp.com.C. Commencement of work by Contractor shall constitute acknowledgement by Contractor that this

specification can be satisfactorily executed, under the project conditions and with all necessaryprerequisites for warranty acceptance by roofing membrane manufacturer. No modification ofthe Contract Sum will be made for failure to adequately examine the Contract Documents or theproject conditions.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers associated with roofing and roof insulation.B. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Formed metal flashing and trim items

associated with roofing.C. Section 07 7100 - Roof Specialties: Manufactured copings, fascias, gravel stops, and other

flashing-related items.D. Section 07 7200 - Roof Accessories: Roof hatches, vents, and manufactured curbs.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal

Insulation Board; 2012.B. ASTM C1549 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Solar Reflectance Near Ambient

Temperature Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer; 2009.C. ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics; 2010.D. ASTM D1004 - Standard Test Method for Tear Resistance (Graves Tear) of Plastic Film and

Sheeting; 2009.E. ASTM D6878/D6878M - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet

Roofing; 2011a.F. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2012.G. FM DS 1-28 - Wind Design; Factory Mutual System; 2007.H. FM DS 1-29 - Roof Deck Securement and Above-Deck Roof Components; Factory Mutual

System; 2006.I. SPRI ES-1 - Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems;

2003. (ANSI/SPRI ES-1)1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Pre-Installation Conference: Before start of roofing work, Contractor shall hold a meeting todiscuss the proper installation of materials and requirements to achieve the warranty.1. Require attendance with all parties directly influencing the quality of roofing work or

affected by the performance of roofing work.2. Notify Architect well in advance of meeting.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data:


1. Provide membrane manufacturer's printed data sufficient to show that all components ofroofing system, including insulation and fasteners, comply with the specified requirementsand with the membrane manufacturer's requirements and recommendations for thesystem type specified; include data for each product used in conjunction with roofingmembrane.

C. Samples: Submit samples of each product to be used.D. Shop Drawings: Provide:

1. The roof membrane manufacturer's standard details customized for this project for allrelevant conditions, including flashings, base tie-ins, roof edges, terminations, expansionjoints, penetrations, and drains.

E. Specimen Warranty: Submit prior to starting work.F. Installer Qualifications: Letter from manufacturer attesting that the roofing installer meets the

specified qualifications.G. Pre-Installation Notice: Copy to show that manufacturer's required Pre Installation Notice (PIN)

has been accepted and approved by the manufacturer.H. Executed Warranty.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: Roofing installer shall have the following:

1. Current Firestone Master Contractor status.2. Fully staffed office within 100 miles of the job site.3. At least five years experience in installing specified system.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGA. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry and undamaged, with seals and

labels intact and legible.B. Store materials clear of ground and moisture with weather protective covering.C. Keep combustible materials away from ignition sources.

1.08 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Comply with all warranty procedures required by manufacturer, including notifications,

scheduling, and inspections.C. Warranty: Firestone 15 year Limited Warranty covering membrane, roof insulation, and other

indicated components of the system, for the term indicated.1. Limit of Liability: No dollar limitation.2. Scope of Coverage: Repair leaks in the roofing system caused by:

a. Ordinary wear and tear of the elements.b. Manufacturing defect in Firestone brand materials.c. Defective workmanship used to install these materials.d. Damage due to winds up to 100 mph (160 km/h).

3. Not Covered:a. Damage due to winds in excess of 100 mph (160 km/h).b. Damage due hurricanes or tornadoes.c. Hail.d. Intentional damage.e. Unintentional damage due to normal rooftop inspections, maintenance, or service.

D. Insulation Warranty: Separate Firestone ISO 95+ Insulation Warranty with warranty termcoinciding with Red Shield Warranty.1. Limit of Liability: No dollar limitation


2. Scope of Coverage: Provide replacement for insulation that warps, bows, or is on thepoint of causing a roof leak as a result of manufacturing defect.

E. Metal Roof Edging: Firestone full-system warranty for roof edge system, covering blow-off fromwinds up to 150 mph (240 km/h).


A. Acceptable Manufacturer - Roofing System: Firestone Building Products LLC, Carmel, IN:www.firestonebpco.com.1. Roofing systems manufactured by others are acceptable provided the roofing system is

completely equivalent in materials and warranty conditions and the manufacturer meetsthe following qualifications:a. Specializing in manufacturing the roofing system to be provided.b. Able to provide a no dollar limit, single source roof system warranty that is backed by

corporate assets in excess of one billion dollars.B. Manufacturer of Insulation: Same manufacturer as roof membrane.C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

1. Submit evidence that the proposed substitution complies with the specified requirements.2.02 ROOFING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Roofing System: Thermoplastic olefin (TPO) single-ply membrane.1. Membrane Attachment: Mechanically fastened.2. Warranty: Full system warranty; Firestone 15 year Red Shield Limited Warranty covering

membrane, roof insulation, and membrane accessories.3. Comply with applicable local building code requirements.4. Provide assembly having Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Class A Fire Hazard

Classification.5. Provide assembly complying with Factory Mutual Corporation (FM) Roof Assembly

Classification, FM DS 1-28 and 1-29, and meeting minimum requirements of FM 1-90 winduplift rating.

B. Roofing System Components: Listed in order from the top of the roof down:1. Membrane: Thickness as specified.2. Base Sheet Over Insulation: Mechanically attached.3. Insulation:

a. Maximum Board Thickness: 3 inches (75 mm); use as many layers as necessary;stagger joints in adjacent layers.

b. Tapered: Slope as indicated; provide minimum R-value at thinnest point; placetapered layer on bottom.

c. Total R Value: 25, minimum, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings.d. Top Layer: Polyisocyanurate foam board, non-composite; mechanically fastened.e. Intermediate Layer(s), If Any: Polyisocyanurate foam board, non-composite;

loose-laid, no attachment.f. Bottom Layer: Polyisocyanurate foam board, non-composite; mechanically fastened.g. Crickets: Tapered insulation of same type as specified for top layer; slope as

indicated.2.03 MEMBRANE MATERIALS

A. Membrane: Flexible, heat weldable sheet composed of thermoplastic polyolefin polymer andethylene propylene rubber; complying with ASTM D6878, with polyester weft insertedreinforcement and the following additional characteristics:1. Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) plus/minus 10 percent, with coating thickness over

reinforcement of 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) plus/minus 10 percent.


2. Puncture Resistance: 265 lbf (1174 N), minimum, when tested in accordance FTM 101CMethod 2031.

3. Acceptable Product: UltraPly TPO by Firestone.B. Membrane Fasteners: Type and size as required by roof membrane manufacturer for roofing

system and warranty to be provided; use only fasteners furnished by roof membranemanufacturer.

C. Curb and Parapet Flashing: Same material as membrane, with encapsulated edge whicheliminates need for seam sealing the flashing-to-roof splice; precut to 18 inches (457 mm) wide.

D. Formable Flashing: Non-reinforced, flexible, heat weldable sheet, composed of thermoplasticpolyolefin polymer and ethylene propylene rubber.1. Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) plus/minus 10 percent.2. Tensile Strength: 1550 psi (10.7 MPa), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM

D638 after heat aging.3. Elongation at Break: 650 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D638

after heat aging.4. Tearing Strength: 12 lbf (53 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D1004

after heat aging.5. Color: White.6. Acceptable Product: UltraPly TPO Flashing by Firestone.

E. Tape Flashing: 5-1/2 inch (140 mm) nominal wide TPO membrane laminated to cured rubberpolymer seaming tape, overall thickness 0.065 inch (1.6 mm) nominal; TPO QuickSeamFlashing by Firestone.

F. Bonding Adhesive: Neoprene and SBR rubber blend, formulated for compatibility with themembrane other substrate materials, including masonry, wood, and insulation facings; UltraPlyBonding Adhesive by Firestone.

G. Pourable Sealer: Two-part polyurethane, two-color for reliable mixing; Pourable Sealer byFirestone.

H. Seam Plates: Steel with barbs and Galvalume coating; corrosion-resistance complying with FM4470.

I. Termination Bars: Aluminum bars with integral caulk ledge; 1.3 inches (33 mm) wide by 0.10inch (2.5 mm) thick; Firestone Termination Bar by Firestone.

J. Cut Edge Sealant: Synthetic rubber-based, for use where membrane reinforcement is exposed;UltraPly TPO Cut Edge Sealant by Firestone.

K. General Purpose Sealant: EPDM-based, one part, white general purpose sealant; UltraPly TPOGeneral Purpose Sealant by Firestone.

L. Molded Flashing Accessories: Unreinforced TPO membrane pre-molded to suit a variety offlashing details, including pipe boots, inside corners, outside corners, etc.; UltraPly TPO Smalland Large Pipe Flashing by Firestone.

M. Roof Walkway Pads: Non-reinforced TPO walkway pads, 0.130 inch (3 mm) by 30 inches (760mm) by 40 feet (12.19 m) long with patterned traffic bearing surface; UltraPly TPO WalkwayPads by Firestone.

2.04 ROOF INSULATIONA. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Closed cell polyisocyanurate foam with black glass

reinforced mat laminated to faces, complying with ASTM C1289 Type II Class 1, with thefollowing additional characteristics:1. Thickness: As indicated elsewhere.2. Size: 48 inches (1220 mm) by 96 inches (2440 mm), nominal.

a. Exception: Insulation to be attached using adhesive or asphalt may be no larger than48 inches (1220 mm) by 48 inches (1220 mm), nominal.

3. R-Value (LTTR):


a. 1.0 inch (25 mm) Thickness: 6.0, minimum.b. 1.25 inch (32 mm) Thickness: 7.5, minimum.c. 1.5 inch (38 mm) Thickness: 9.0, minimum.d. 1.75 inch (44 mm) Thickness: 10.5, minimum.e. 2.0 inch (51 mm) Thickness: 12.1, minimum.f. 3.0 inch (76 mm) Thickness: 18.5, minimum.g. 4.0 inch (102 mm) Thickness: 25.0, minimum.

4. Compressive Strength: 20 psi (138 kPa) when tested in accordance with ASTM C1289.5. Ozone Depletion Potential: Zero; made without CFC or HCFC blowing agents.6. Recycled Content: 19 percent post-consumer and 15 percent post-industrial, average.7. Acceptable Product: ISO 95+ GL Polyisocyanurate Insulation by Firestone.

B. Insulation Fasteners: Type and size as required by roof membrane manufacturer for roofingsystem and warranty to be provided; use only fasteners furnished by roof membranemanufacturer.

PART 3 INSTALLATION3.01 GENERAL

A. Install roofing, insulation, flashings, and accessories in accordance with roofing manufacturer'spublished instructions and recommendations for the specified roofing system. Wheremanufacturer provides no instructions or recommendations, follow good roofing practices andindustry standards. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.

B. Obtain all relevant instructions and maintain copies at project site for duration of installationperiod.

C. Do not start work until Pre-Installation Notice has been submitted to manufacturer as notificationthat this project requires a manufacturer's warranty.

D. Perform work using competent and properly equipped personnel.E. Temporary closures, which ensure that moisture does not damage any completed section of the

new roofing system, are the responsibility of the applicator. Completion of flashings,terminations, and temporary closures shall be completed as required to provide a watertightcondition.

F. Install roofing membrane only when surfaces are clean, dry, smooth and free of snow or ice; donot apply roofing membrane during inclement weather or when ambient conditions will not allowproper application; consult manufacturer for recommended procedures during cold weather. Donot work with sealants and adhesives when material temperature is outside the range of 60 to80 degrees F (15 to 25 degrees C).

G. Protect adjacent construction, property, vehicles, and persons from damage related to roofingwork; repair or restore damage caused by roofing work.1. Protect from spills and overspray from bitumen, adhesives, sealants and coatings.2. Particularly protect metal, glass, plastic, and painted surfaces from bitumen, adhesives,

and sealants within the range of wind-borne overspray.3. Protect finished areas of the roofing system from roofing related work traffic and traffic by

other trades.H. Until ready for use, keep materials in their original containers as labeled by the manufacturer.I. Consult membrane manufacturer's instructions, container labels, and Material Safety Data

Sheets (MSDS) for specific safety instructions. Keep all adhesives, sealants, primers andcleaning materials away from all sources of ignition.

3.02 EXAMINATIONA. Examine roof deck to determine that it is sufficiently rigid to support installers and their

mechanical equipment and that deflection will not strain or rupture roof components or deformdeck.


B. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. Correct defects in thesubstrate before commencing with roofing work.

C. Examine roof substrate to verify that it is properly sloped to drains.D. Verify that the specifications and drawing details are workable and not in conflict with the roofing

manufacturer's recommendations and instructions; start of work constitutes acceptable ofproject conditions and requirements.

E. Verify that wood nailers have been properly installed.3.03 PREPARATION

A. Take appropriate measures to ensure that fumes from adhesive solvents are not drawn into thebuilding through air intakes.

B. Prior to proceeding, prepare roof surface so that it is clean, dry, and smooth, and free of sharpedges, fins, roughened surfaces, loose or foreign materials, oil, grease and other materials thatmay damage the membrane.

C. Fill all surface voids in the immediate substrate that are greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide withfill material acceptable insulation to membrane manufacturer.

D. Seal, grout, or tape deck joints, where needed, to prevent bitumen seepage into building.3.04 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Install insulation in configuration and with attachment method(s) specified in PART 2, underRoofing System.

B. Install only as much insulation as can be covered with the completed roofing system before theend of the day's work or before the onset of inclement weather.

C. Lay roof insulation in courses parallel to roof edges.D. Neatly and tightly fit insulation to all penetrations, projections, and nailers, with gaps not greater

than 1/4 inch (6 mm). Fill gaps greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) with acceptable insulation. Do notleave the roofing membrane unsupported over a space greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm).

E. Mechanical Fastening: Using specified fasteners and insulation plates engage fastenersthrough insulation into deck to depth and in pattern required by Factory Mutual for FM Classspecified in PART 2 and membrane manufacturer, whichever is more stringent.

3.05 SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE INSTALLATIONA. Beginning at low point of roof, place membrane without stretching over substrate and allow to

relax at least 30 minutes before attachment or splicing; in colder weather allow for longer relaxtime.

B. Lay out the membrane pieces so that field and flashing splices are installed to shed water.C. Install membrane without wrinkles and without gaps or fishmouths in seams; bond and test

seams and laps in accordance with membrane manufacturer's instructions and details.D. Install membrane mechanically attached to the substrate using seam battens, fasteners, and

edge securement as specified and as required by membrane manufacturers.E. Mechanical Attachment: Install fasteners in the seams, covered by membrane.

1. Lay out fasteners in compliance with FM Class specified in PART 2, as recommended bymembrane manufacturer, and as indicated, whichever is most stringent.

2. Properly engage fasteners in the deck with head flush with the countersunk portion ofseam plate.

F. Edge Securement: Secure membrane at all locations where membrane terminates or goesthrough an angle change greater than 2 in 12 inches (1:6 ) using mechanically fastenedreinforced perimeter fastening strips, plates, or metal edging as indicated or as recommendedby roofing manufacturer.


1. Exceptions: Round pipe penetrations less than 18 inches (460 mm) in diameter andsquare penetrations less than 4 inches (200 mm) square.

2. Metal edging is not merely decorative; ensure anchorage of membrane as intended byroofing manufacturer.

3.06 FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES INSTALLATIONA. Install flashings, including laps, splices, joints, bonding, adhesion, and attachment, as required

by membrane manufacturer's recommendations and details.B. Metal Accessories: Install metal edgings, gravel stops, and copings in locations indicated on

the drawings, with horizontal leg of edge member over membrane and flashing over metal ontomembrane.1. Follow roofing manufacturer's instructions.2. Remove protective plastic surface film immediately before installation.3. Install water block sealant under the membrane anchorage leg.4. Flash with manufacturer's recommended flashing sheet unless otherwise indicated.5. Where single application of flashing will not completely cover the metal flange, install

additional piece of flashing to cover the metal edge.6. If the roof edge includes a gravel stop and sealant is not applied between the laps in the

metal edging, install an additional piece of self-adhesive flashing membrane over the metallap to the top of the gravel stop; apply seam edge treatment at the intersections of the twoflashing sections.

7. When the roof slope is greater than 1:12, apply seam edge treatment along the back edgeof the flashing.

C. Scuppers: Set in sealant and secure to structure; flash as recommended by manufacturer.D. Roofing Expansion Joints: Install as shown on drawings and as recommended by roofing

manufacturer.E. Flashing at Walls, Curbs, and Other Vertical and Sloped Surfaces: Install weathertight flashing

at all walls, curbs, parapets, curbs, skylights, and other vertical and sloped surfaces that theroofing membrane abuts to; extend flashing at least 8 inches (200 mm) high above membranesurface.1. Use the longest practical flashing pieces.2. Evaluate the substrate and overlay and adjust installation procedure in accordance with

membrane manufacturer's recommendations.3. Complete the splice between flashing and the main roof sheet with specified splice

adhesive before adhering flashing to the vertical surface.4. Provide termination directly to the vertical substrate as shown on roof drawings.

F. Roof Drains:1. Taper insulation around drain to provide smooth transition from roof surface to drain. Use

specified pre-manufactured tapered insulation with facer or suitable bonding surface toachieve slope; slope not to exceed manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Position membrane, then cut a hole for roof drain to allow 1/2 to 3/4 inch (12 to 19 mm) ofmembrane to extend inside clamping ring past drain bolts.

3. Make round holes in membrane to align with clamping bolts; do not cut membrane back tobolt holes.

4. Apply sealant on top of drain bowl where clamping ring seats below the membrane5. Install roof drain clamping ring and clamping bolts; tighten clamping bolts to achieve

constant compression.G. Flashing at Penetrations: Flash all penetrations passing through the membrane; make flashing

seals directly to the penetration.1. Pipes, Round Supports, and Similar Items: Flash with specified pre-molded pipe flashings

wherever practical; otherwise use specified self-curing elastomeric flashing.


2. Pipe Clusters and Unusual Shaped Penetrations: Provide penetration pocket at least 2inches (50 mm) deep, with at least 1 inch (25 mm) clearance from penetration, sloped toshed water.

3. Structural Steel Tubing: If corner radii are greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) and longest side oftube does not exceed 12 inches (305 mm), flash as for pipes; otherwise, provide astandard curb with flashing.

4. Flexible and Moving Penetrations: Provide weathertight gooseneck set in sealant andsecured to deck, flashed as recommended by manufacturer.

5. High Temperature Surfaces: Where the in-service temperature is, or is expected to be, inexcess of 180 degrees F (82 degrees C), protect the elastomeric components from directcontact with the hot surfaces using an intermediate insulated sleeve as flashing substrateas recommended by membrane manufacturer.

3.07 FINISHING AND WALKWAY INSTALLATIONA. Install walkways at access points to the roof, around rooftop equipment that may require

maintenance, and where indicated on the drawings.B. Walkway Pads: Adhere to the roofing membrane, spacing each pad at minimum of 1.0 inch (25

mm) and maximum of 3.0 inches (75 mm) from each other to allow for drainage.1. If installation of walkway pads over field fabricated splices or within 6 inches (150 mm) of a

splice edge cannot be avoided, adhere another layer of flashing over the splice andextending beyond the walkway pad a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) on either side.

2. Prime the membrane, remove the release paper on the pad, press in place, and walk onpad to ensure proper adhesion.

3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Inspection by Manufacturer: Provide final inspection of the roofing system by a Technical

Representative employed by roofing system manufacturer specifically to inspect installation forwarranty purposes (i.e. not a sales person).

B. Perform all corrections necessary for issuance of warranty.3.09 CLEANING

A. Clean all contaminants generated by roofing work from building and surrounding areas,including bitumen, adhesives, sealants, and coatings.

B. Repair or replace building components and finished surfaces damaged or defaced due to thework of this section; comply with recommendations of manufacturers of components andsurfaces.

C. Remove leftover materials, trash, debris, equipment from project site and surrounding areas.3.10 PROTECTION

A. Where construction traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, provide durableprotection and replace or repair damaged roofing to original condition.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 07 6200-1BIRMINGHAM, AL SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIMPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 07 6200SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM


A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, downspouts, sheetmetal roofing, and other items indicated in Schedule.

B. Reglets and accessories.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers.B. Section 07 5423 - Thermoplastic-Polyolefin Roofing (TPO): Roofing system.C. Section 07 6100 - Sheet Metal Roofing.D. Section 07 7100 - Roof Specialties: Preformed flashings and manufactured expansion joint

covers.E. Section 07 7200 - Roof Accessories: Roof-mounted units.F. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers.



Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.C. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.E. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.F. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010.G. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

[Metric]; 2010.H. ASTM B749 - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products;

2003 (Reapproved 2009).I. ASTM D2178/D2178M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and

Waterproofing; 2013a.J. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007

(Reapproved 2012)e1.K. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning

Contractors' National Association; 2012.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods,

flashings, terminations, and installation details.C. Samples: Submit two samples 8 inch x 8 inch inch (8 inch x 8 inch mm) in size illustrating metal

finish color.


1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and CDA Copper

in Architecture Handbook requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slopemetal sheets to ensure drainage.

B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Pre-Finished Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick; plain finishshop pre-coated with modified silicone coating.1. Modified Silicone Polyester Coating: Pigmented Organic Coating System, AAMA 2603;

baked enamel finish system.2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

B. Lead: ASTM B749, 2.5 lb/sq ft (0.99 mm) thick.C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666 Type 304, soft temper, 0.015 inch (0.4 mm) thick; smooth No. 4

finish.D. Asphalt Coated Copper Fabric (Masonry Thru-Wall Flashing): ASTM B370, width as shown in

drawings, 5 oz.1. Accessories as recommended by manufacturer.2. Basis of Design: Hohman & Barnard, Inc., C-Coat Flashing, with stainless steel

termination bar.2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Stainless steel, with soft neoprene washers.B. Underlayment: ASTM D2178, glass fiber roofing felt.C. Primer: Zinc chromate type.D. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd.E. Sealant: Type ____ specified in Section 07 9005.F. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I.G. Reglets: Recessed, surface mounted, as indicated type, galvanized steel; face and ends

covered with plastic tape .2.03 FABRICATION

A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.B. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, minimum 6 inches wide, interlocking with sheet.C. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch (13 mm); miter and seam corners.E. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use

sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.F. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch (450 mm) long legs; seam for rigidity,

seal with sealant.G. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form

drip.H. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches (50 mm) over roofing membrane. Return

and brake edges.


2.04 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATIONA. Gutters: SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Rectangular profile.B. Downspout Boots: Steel.C. Seal metal joints.


A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, regletsin place, and nailing strips located.

B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film

thickness of 15 mil (0.4 mm).3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only wherepermitted.

B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines

accurate to profiles.D. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners.E. Slope gutters 1/4 inch per 10 feet (2.1 mm per m), minimum.F. Connect downspouts to downspout boots. Grout connection watertight.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for field inspection requirements.B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with

specified requirements.3.05 SCHEDULE

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 07 7100-1BIRMINGHAM, AL ROOF SPECIALTIESPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 07 7100ROOF SPECIALTIES


A. Manufactured roof specialties, including copings, fascias, gravel stops, and vents.B. Roof control and expansion joint covers.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 7200 - Roof Accessories: Manufactured curbs, roof hatches, and snow guards.B. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers.



Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.C. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.D. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007

(Reapproved 2012)e1.E. NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors

Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates.F. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning

Contractors' National Association; 2012.G. SPRI ES-1 - Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems;

Single Ply Roofing Industry; 2003. (ANSI/SPRI ES-1)1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on shape of components, materials and finishes, anchor types and

locations.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration and dimension of components, adjacent construction,

required clearances and tolerances, and other affected work.D. Samples: Submit two appropriately sized samples of coping and gravel stop.E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions

requiring special attention.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual details.1. Maintain one copy on project site.


A. Roof Edge Flashings and Copings:1. Architectural Products Co: www.archprod.com.2. W.P. Hickman Company: www.wph.com.3. Metal-Era Inc: www.metalera.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Pipe and Penetration Flashings:


1. Portals Plus by Commercial Products Group of Hart and Cooley, Inc.:www.portalsplus.com.

2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.2.02 COMPONENTS

A. Roof Edge Flashings: Factory fabricated to sizes required; mitered, welded corners; concealedfasteners.1. Configuration: Fascia, cant, and edge securement for roof membrane;2. Pull-Off Resistance: Tested in accordance with SPRI ES-1 RE-1 and RE-2 to positive and

negative design wind pressure as defined by applicable code.3. Material: Extruded aluminum, 0.08 inch (2.0 mm) thick, minimum.4. Finish: 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride.5. Finish: Anodized natural (clear).6. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.7. Products:

a. W.P. Hickman Company; Extruded TerminEdge: www.wph.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Copings: Factory fabricated to sizes required; mitered, welded corners; concealed fasteners.1. Configuration: Concealed continuous hold down cleat at both legs; internal splice piece at

joints of same material, thickness and finish as cap; concealed stainless steel fasteners.2. Pull-Off Resistance: Tested in accordance with SPRI ES-1 RE-3 to positive and negative

design wind pressure as defined by applicable code.3. Material: Formed aluminum sheet, 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick, minimum.4. Finish: 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride.5. Finish: Anodized natural (clear).6. Color: As shown on drawings.7. Products:

a. W.P. Hickman Company; PermaSnap 2 Coping: www.wph.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Control and Expansion Joint Covers: Aluminum construction, designed for joint width shown onthe drawings. Include special formed corners, tees, intersections and wall flashings, eachsealed watertight.

D. Pipe and Penetration Flashing: Base of rounded aluminum, compatible with sheet metal roofsystems, and capable of accomodating pipes sized between 0.375 inches (9.5 mm) and 12inches (30.5 cm).1. Color: As shown on drawings.

E. Engineered Roof Perimeter Blocking: Prefabricated 20 gage, 0.036 inch (0.91 mm) galvanizedsteel retainer for lightweight concrete; with cleat to accept copings; attach to roof deck in lieu ofwood blocking at roof edge; for low slope roof installations.1. Style: Box.2. Product:

a. W.P. Hickman Company; EdgeBox: www.wph.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Roof Cement: ASTM D4586, Type II.

2.04 FINISHESA. Clear Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Class I clear anodic coating not less than

0.7 mils (0.018 mm) thick.B. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605;

multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as scheduled.



A. Verify that deck, curbs, roof membrane, base flashing, and other items affecting work of thisSection are in place and positioned correctly.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Coordinate installation of components of this section with installation of roofing membrane and

base flashings.C. Coordinate installation of sealants and roofing cement with work of this section to ensure water

tightness.D. Coordinate installation of flashing flanges into reglets.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 07 7200-1BIRMINGHAM, AL ROOF ACCESSORIESPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 07 7200ROOF ACCESSORIES


A. Manufactured curbs, equipment rails, and pedestals.B. Roof hatches, manual and automatic operation, including smoke vents.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking.B. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Roof accessory items fabricated from sheet

metal.C. Section 07 7100 - Roof Specialties: Other manufactured roof items.D. Section 07 7123 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products; 2013.B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used.

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.3. Installation methods.4. Maintenance requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: For non-penetrating rooftop supports, submit detailed layout developed for thisproject, with design calculations for loadings and spacings.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURED CURBS

A. Manufactured Curbs, Equipment Rails, and Other Roof Mounting Assemblies:1. AES Industries Inc.: www.aescurb.com.2. The Pate Company: www.patecurbs.com.3. Roof Products & Systems (RPS) by Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc:

www.rpscurbs.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Manufactured Curbs, Equipment Rails, and Other Roof Mounting Assemblies:Factory-assembled hollow sheet metal construction with fully mitered and welded corners,integral counterflashing, internal reinforcing, and top side and edges formed to shed water.1. Sheet Metal: Hot-dip zinc coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A653/A653M, SS

Grade 33 (230); G60 (Z180) coating designation; 18 gage, 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) thick.2. Roofing Cants: Provide integral sheet metal roofing cants dimensioned to begin slope at

top of roofing insulation; 1:1 slope; minimum cant height 4 inches (200 mm).


3. Manufacture curb bottom and mounting flanges for installation directly on roof deck, not oninsulation; match slope and configuration of roof deck.

4. Provide the layouts and configurations shown on the drawings.C. Curbs Adjacent to Roof Openings: Provide curb on all sides of opening, with top of curb

horizontal for equipment mounting.1. Provide preservative treated wood nailers along top of curb.2. Insulate inside curbs with 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) thick fiberglass insulation.3. Height Above Finished Roof Surface: 6 inches (152 mm), minimum.4. Height Above Roof Deck: 14 inches (356 mm), minimum.

D. Equipment Rails: Two-sided curbs in straight lengths, with top horizontal for equipmentmounting.1. Provide preservative treated wood nailers along top of rails.2. Height Above Finished Roof Surface: 6 inches (152 mm), minimum.3. Height Above Roof Deck: 14 inches (356 mm), minimum.

E. Pipe, Duct, and Conduit Mounting Pedestals: Vertical posts, minimum 8 inches (400 mm)square unless otherwise indicated.1. Provide sliding channel welded along top edge with adjustable height steel bracket,

manufactured to fit item supported.2. Height Above Finished Roof Surface: 6 inches (152 mm), minimum.3. Height Above Roof Deck: 14 inches (356 mm), minimum.

2.02 ROOF HATCHES, MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC OPERATIONA. Manufacturers - Roof Hatches:

1. Acudor Products Inc; Aluminum Roof Hatch: www.acudor.com.2. Bilco Company; Type S (ladder access, standard size, solid cover): www.bilco.com.3. Dur-Red Products: www.dur-red.com.4. Milcor by Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc: www.milcorinc.com.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Roof Hatches: Factory-assembled steel frame and cover, complete with operating and releasehardware.1. Style: Provide flat metal covers unless otherwise indicated.2. Mounting: Provide frames and curbs suitable for mounting on flat roof deck.3. Size(s): As indicated on drawings; single-leaf style unless indicated as double-leaf.4. For Ladder Access: Single leaf; 30 by 36 inches (762 by 914 mm).5. For Ships Ladder Access: Single leaf; 30 by 54 inches (762 by 1372 mm).6. For Stair Access: Single leaf; 30 by 96 inches (762 by 2438 mm).

C. Frames/Curbs: One-piece curb and frame with integral cap flashing to receive roof flashings;extended bottom flange to suit mounting.1. Material: Galvanized steel, 14 gage, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick.2. Finish: Factory prime paint.3. Insulation: 1 inch (25 mm) rigid glass fiber, located on outside face of curb.4. Curb Height: 12 inches (305 mm) from finished surface of roof, minimum.

D. Metal Covers: Flush, insulated, hollow metal construction.1. Capable of supporting 40 psf (1.92 kPa) live load.2. Material: Galvanized steel; outer cover 14 gage, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, liner 22

gage, 0.03 inch (0.76 mm) thick.3. Finish: Factory prime paint.4. Insulation: 1 inch (25 mm) rigid glass fiber.5. Gasket: Neoprene, continuous around cover perimeter.

E. Hardware: Steel, zinc coated and chromate sealed, unless otherwise indicated or required bymanufacturer.


1. Lifting Mechanisms: Compression or torsion spring operator with shock absorbers thatautomatically opens upon release of latch; capable of lifting covers despite 10 psf (475kPa) load.

2. Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type.3. Hold open arm with vinyl-coated handle for manual release.4. Latch: Upon closing, engage latch automatically and reset manual release.5. Manual Release: Pull handle on interior.6. Locking: Padlock hasp on interior.

2.03 NON-PENETRATING ROOFTOP ASSEMBLIESA. Non-Penetrating Rooftop Assemblies: Manufacturer-engineered and factory-fabricated, with

pedestal bases that rest on top of roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roofstructure and not penetrating the roofing assembly.1. Design Loadings and Configurations: As required by applicable codes.2. Support Spacing and Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent

indentation of roofing assembly.3. Steel Components: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in

accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.4. Hardware, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized

after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION




result for the substrate under the project conditions.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing weatherintegrity.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean installed work to like-new condition.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed products until completion of project.B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 07 8400-1BIRMINGHAM, AL FIRESTOPPINGPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 07 8400FIRESTOPPING


A. Firestopping systems.B. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire-resistance rated and smoke-resistant

assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Cutting and patching.B. Section 07 8100 - Applied Fireproofing.C. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum wallboard fireproofing.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems; 2013a.B. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems; 2007 (Reapproved

2011).C. ASTM E2307 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire

Barriers Using Intermediate-Scale, Multi-story Test Apparatus; 2010.D. ASTM E2837 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Continuity

Head-of-Wall Joint Systems Installed Between Rated Wall Assemblies and Nonrated HorizontalAssemblies; 2011.

E. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.F. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.G. UL 2079 - Standard for Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems; Underwriters

Laboratories Inc.; 2004.H. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly,

and firestopping test or design number.C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations.D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings

when tested in accordance with methods indicated.1. Listing in the current-year classification or certification books of UL, FM, or ITS (Warnock

Hersey) will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and:

1. Trained by the manufacturer.2. With minimum 3 years documented experience installing work of this type.3. Able to show at least 5 satisfactorily completed projects of comparable size and type.4. Licensed by authority having jurisdiction.


1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions

during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days afterinstallation of materials.

B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 FIRESTOPPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Manufacturers:1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com.2. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop.3. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com.4. Nelson FireStop Products: www.nelsonfirestop.com.5. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com.6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.C. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for

tested assembly design.D. Fire Ratings: See Drawings for required systems and ratings.

2.02 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTSA. Perimeter Fire Containment Firestopping: Use any system that has been tested according to

ASTM E2307 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of the floor assembly.1. Temperature Rise: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show T Rating

as indicated.2. Air Leakage: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show L Rating as

indicated.B. Head-of-Wall Firestopping at Joints Between Non-Rated Floor and Fire-Rated Wall: Use any

system that has been tested according to ASTM E2837 to have fire resistance F Rating equal torequired fire rating of floor or wall, whichever is greater.

C. Floor-to-Floor, Wall-to-Wall, and Wall-to-Floor Joints, Except Perimeter, Where Both AreFire-Rated: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 tohave fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of the assembly in which the jointoccurs.1. Air Leakage: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show L Rating as

indicated.2. Watertightness: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show W Rating as

indicated.3. Listing by UL, FM, or Intertek in their certification directory will be considered evidence of

successful testing.D. Through Penetration Firestopping: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM

E814 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of penetrated assembly.1. Temperature Rise: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show T Rating

as indicated.2. Air Leakage: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show L Rating as

indicated.3. Listing by UL, FM, or Intertek in their certification directory will be considered evidence of

successful testing.2.03 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.



A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that couldadversely affect bond of firestopping material.

B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond.C. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions, completely closing openings.B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having jurisdiction.C. Install labeling required by code.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 07 9005-1BIRMINGHAM, AL JOINT SEALERSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 07 9005JOINT SEALERS


A. Sealants and joint backing.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Sealants required in conjunction with air barriers andvapor retarders:

B. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants.C. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories.D. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic sealant.E. Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Sealant used as tile grout.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2010.B. ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2012.C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.D. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.E. ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or Expanded

Rubber; 2007.F. ASTM D1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Foam

(Closed-Cell); 2005 (Reapproved 2011).G. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Durometer Hardness; 2005

(Reapproved 2010).1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate the work with other sections referencing this section.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria,

substrate preparation, and color availability.C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Maintain one copy of each referenced document covering installation requirements on site.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.C. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and afterinstallation.

1.08 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.


C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtightseal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.


A. Gunnable and Pourable Sealants:1. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.2. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.3. Dow Corning Corporation: www.dowcorning.com.4. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com.5. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.6. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.7. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com.8. W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com.9. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Preformed Compressible Foam Sealers:1. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd: www.emseal.com.2. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 SEALANTSA. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M,

G, and A; single component.1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.2. Applications: Use for:

a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry.b. Joints between concrete and other materials.c. Joints between metal frames and other materials.d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.

3. Polyurethane Products:a. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.b. Pecora Corporation; DynaTrol II General Purpose Two Part Polyurethane Sealant:

www.pecora.com.c. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, noncuring.1. Applications: Use for:

a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work.b. Concealed sealant bead in siding overlaps.c. Products:

1) Pecora BA-982) Tremco Trempro JS 773

C. General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NFsingle component, paintable.1. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces.2. Applications: Use for:

a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.

3. Products:a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 + Silicone Acrylic Latex Caulking Compound:

www.pecora.com.


b. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.c. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Type ___ - Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Locations:1. Composition: Permanently tacky non-hardening butyl sealant.2. Applications: Use for concealed locations only:

a. Sealant bead between top stud runner and structure and between bottom stud trackand floor.

3. Products:a. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.b. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.c. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.d. Hilti, Inc.; CP 506 Smoke and Acoustical Sealant: www.us.hilti.com.e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

E. Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C920, Class 25, Uses T, I, Mand A; single component.1. Color: Gray.2. Applications: Use for:

a. Joints in sidewalks and vehicular paving.3. Products:

a. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.b. Pecora Corporation; NR-201 Self-Leveling Traffic and Loop Sealant:

www.pecora.com.c. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.

F. Self-Leveling Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, I, M, A, O; singlecomponent, chemical curing, non staining, non bleeding, capable of continuous waterimmersion, self-leveling type.1. Color: Color as selected.2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent.3. Service Temperature Range: -40 to 180 degrees F (-40 to 82 degrees C).4. Shore A Hardness Range: 20 to 35.5. Applications: Use for:

a. Horizontal Traffic Bearing Joints.6. Products:

a. Pecora Corporation; NR-201 Self-Leveling Traffic and Loop Sealant:www.pecora.com.

b. Vulkem 245.c. Tremco Inc., THC-900/THC-901.d. Sonneborn Sonolastic SL-2e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

G. Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A, G, M, O; single component,solvent curing, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, non-bleeding.1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent.3. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F (-54 to 82 degrees C).4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35.5. Applications: Use for:

a. Composite metal panel joints.b. Storefront, curtainwall, door exterior joints.

6. Products:a. Dow Corning Corporation; 795: www.dowcorning.com.b. Pecora Corporation; 895: www.pecora.com.


c. Tremco Global Sealants; SpecTrem 2: www.tremcosealants.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

H. Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses T,NT, A, G, M, O; singlecomponent, neutral curing, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, non-bleeding.1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent.3. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F (-54 to 82 degrees C).4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35.5. Applications: Use for:

a. EIFS joints.6. Products:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790: www.dowcorning.com.b. Pecora Corporation; 890: www.pecora.com.c. Tremco Global Sealants; SpecTrem 1: www.tremcosealants.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

I.2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;

compatible with joint forming materials.C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC;

oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit

application.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of

surfaces and material installation instructions.B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck

dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specificdimensions are indicated.

E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer

when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.H. Tool joints concave.


3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Protect sealants until cured.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 08 1113-1BIRMINGHAM, AL HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMESPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 08 1113HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES


A. Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames.B. Steel frames for wood doors.C. Fire-rated steel doors and frames.D. Thermally insulated steel doors.E. Steel glazing frames.F. Accessories, including glazing, louvers, and matching panels.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.B. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites.C. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field painting.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and

Facilities; International Code Council; 2009.B. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames;

2003 (R2008).C. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for

Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (R2011).D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.E. ASTM C1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by

Means of a Hot Box Apparatus; 2011.F. BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006.G. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors

and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2007.H. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013.I. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.J. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations,

reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and onecopy of referenced grade standard.

C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, andidentifying location of different finishes, if any.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified inthis section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation.


1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.


A. Steel Doors and Frames:1. Assa Abloy Ceco, Curries, or Fleming: www.assaabloydss.com.2. Republic Doors: www.republicdoor.com.3. Steelcraft, an Allegion brand; Product ____: www.allegion.com/us.4. Technical Glass Products; SteelBuilt Window & Door Systems: www.tgpamerica.com.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 DOORS AND FRAMESA. Requirements for All Doors and Frames:

1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1.2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges.3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges.4. Door Texture: Smooth faces.5. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as

indicated on drawings.6. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in

place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard.7. Galvanizing for Units in Wet Areas: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated

(galvannealed), manufacturer's standard coating thickness.8. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.

B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with morethan one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; forinstance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with therequirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirementsconflict, comply with the most stringent.

2.03 STEEL DOORSA. Exterior Doors :

1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless.2. Core: Polystyrene foam.3. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in

accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.4. Insulating Value: U-value of 0.50, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1363.5. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100.

B. Interior Doors, Non-Fire-Rated:1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 1, physical performance Level C, Model 1, full flush.2. Core: Vertical steel stiffeners.3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm).

C. Interior Doors, Fire-Rated:1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 1, full flush.2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C

("positive pressure").a. Rate of Temperature Rise Across Door Thickness for exit Doors: 250 F degrees (138

C degrees).b. Provide units listed and labeled by UL.c. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit.


3. Core: Mineral fiberboard.D. Panels: Same construction, performance, and finish as doors.

2.04 STEEL FRAMESA. General:

1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door.a. ANSI A250.8 Level 1 Doors: 16 gage frames.b. ANSI A250.8 Level 3 Doors: 14 gage frames.c. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8

for Level 1, 16 gage2. Finish: Same as for door.3. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches (100

mm) high to fill opening without cutting masonry units.4. Frames Wider than 48 Inches (1200 mm): Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into

frame head, flush with top.B. Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled.

1. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) inaccordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.

2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100.C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Knock-down type.D. Interior Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Knock-down type.

1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled.E. Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match

door frames, and as indicated on drawings.2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Louvers: Roll formed steel with overlapping frame; finish same as door components;factory-installed.1. In Fire-Rated Doors: UL-listed fusible link louver, same rating as door.2. Style: Standard straight slat blade.3. Louver Free Area: 50 percent.4. Fasteners: Concealed fasteners.

B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000, factory installed.C. Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered or butted

corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws.D. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center

mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.E. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames.

2.06 FINISH MATERIALSA. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM

HMMA 840.B. In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.


C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.D. Coordinate installation of hardware.E. Coordinate installation of glazing.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8.B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in (1.5 mm) measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 08 1416-1BIRMINGHAM, AL FLUSH WOOD DOORSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 08 1416FLUSH WOOD DOORS


A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated and non-rated.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry.B. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.C. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.D. Section 08 8000 - Glazing.E. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Site finishing of doors.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AWI (QCP) - Quality Certification Program, www.awiqcp.org; current edition at www.awiqcp.org.B. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.C. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2012.D. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.E. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers

Association; 2005.F. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013.G. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.H. WDMA I.S.1-A - Architectural Wood Flush Doors; Window and Door Manufacturers

Association; 2011.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and

characteristics.C. Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling,

blocking for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details.1. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards.

D. Specimen warranty.E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.F. Warranty, executed in Owner's name.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and

finishing.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum five years of documented experience.1. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of

fabrication and throughout the duration of the project.C. Quality Certification: Provide AWI Quality Certification Program inspection report and quality

certification of completed work.1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the work complies with requirements of AWS

Grade or Grades specified.2. Prior to delivery to the site provide shop drawings with certification labels.


3. Provide labels on each product when required by certification program.4. Upon completion of installation provide certificate certifying that the installation and

products meet the specified requirements.5. Arrange and pay for inspections required for certification.6. Replace, repair, or rework all work for which certification is refused.

D. Installed Fire Rated Door and Transom Panel Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire ratedclass as indicated.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or

wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges withtinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.

1.07 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements.B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,

defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors:1. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com.2. Haley Brothers: www.haleybros.com.3. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc: www.marshfielddoors.com.4. Oshkosh Architectural Door .5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. High Pressure Decorative Laminate Faced Doors:1. Ampco Products, Inc: www.ampco.com.2. Poncraft Door Co: www.poncraft.com.3. VT Industries, Inc: www.vtindustries.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 DOORS AND PANELSA. All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements.

1. Quality Level: Premium Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI ArchitecturalWoodwork Standards.

2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated.3. High Pressure Decorative Laminate Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated.

B. Exterior Doors: Flush solid core construction.1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm), unless otherwise indicated.

C. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction.1. Provide solid core doors at all locations .2. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with International

Building Code ("positive pressure"); UL or WH (ITS) labeled without any visible seals whendoor is open.

3. Wood veneer facing for field transparent finish where indicated on drawings.4. Wood veneer facing for field opaque finish where indicated on drawings.5. High pressure decorative laminate finish where indicated on drawings.


2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORESA. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type framed non-bonded particleboard

core (FPC), plies and faces as indicated above.B. Fire Rated Doors: Mineral core, Type FD, plies and faces as indicated above; with core

blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without through-bolting.C. Hollow Core Doors: Type Standard (SHC/FSHC); plies and faces as indicated above.

2.04 DOOR FACINGSA. Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: species as indicated in the drawings, veneer

grade as specified by quality standard, plain sliced, book veneer match, running assemblymatch; unless otherwise indicated.1. Vertical Edges: Any option allowed by quality standard for grade.2. Pairs: Pair match each pair; set match pairs within 10 feet (3 m) of each other when doors

are closed.3. Transoms: Continuous match to doors.

B. Veneer Facing for Opaque Finish: Medium density overlaid plywood.C. High Pressure Decorative Laminate Facing for Fire Doors: NEMA LD 3, SGF; color(s) as

indicated; textured, low gloss finish.D. High Pressure Decorative Laminate Facing for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: NEMA LD 3, HGS;

color(s) as indicated; textured, low gloss finish.E. Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof.

2.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTIONA. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails:

1. Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement.2. Provide solid blocking for other throughbolted hardware.

C. At exterior doors, provide aluminum flashing at the top and bottom rail and the sill of glazedopenings for full thickness and width of door.

D. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance withhardware requirements and dimensions.

E. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edgeclearances in accordance with specified quality standard.1. Exception: Doors to be field finished.

F. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.2.06 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS

A. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 5- Finishing for Grade specified and as follows:1. Transparent:

a. System - 5, Varnish, Conversion.b. Stain: As selected by Architect.c. Sheen: Satin.

B. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.


C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size oralignment.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.

1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements.B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.E. Coordinate installation of glazing.F. Install door louvers plumb and level.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.B. Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness.

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.B. Adjust closers for full closure.

3.05 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGSEND OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 08 3013-1BIRMINGHAM, AL HIGH SPEED ROLL-UP DOORPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 08 3013HIGH SPEED ROLL-UP DOOR


A. RYTEC- High-Speed Roll-up DoorsB. Wiring from electric circuit disconnect to operator to control station.C. Purchasing Account: The Owner has a national account with Rytec. The Contractor will contact

Rytec and include in the Contractors cost the actual Owner's negotiated price for the RYTECdoors. If the Owner has negotiated a longer warranty, the Contractor will include the longerWarranty in the project.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 4000: Support framing.B. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Power to disconnect.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012.B. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2012.C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical

Manufacturers Association; 2008.D. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays,

Rated 600 2000 Volts; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000 (R2005).E. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details, electrical

equipment.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and

installation details.D. Samples: Submit two slats, 6x12 inch (____x____ mm) in size illustrating shape, color and

finish texture.E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and procedures, adjustment and

alignment procedures.F. Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency and periodic adjustments

required.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by testing firm acceptable to theauthority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.


A. High Speed Overhead Coiling Doors:1. Rytec Corporation.

a. Sprial for non hurricane zonesb. Sprial HZ for hurricane zones.c. Spiral FV where indicated on drawings


2. Substitutions: Not permitted.2.02 HIGH SPEED ROLL-UP DOORS

A. Exterior Coiling Doors: Aluminum slat curtain.1. Door Panel:

a. Double walled aluminum slats.b. Nominal Slat Size: 6"x1 3/16"x required length.c. Weather Seal: Integral rubber between each panel.

2. Sprial Door:a. Provide eight clear vision slats, bottom vision panel located approximately 48" above

floor subject to manufacturer's requirements.3. Side Frames: Galvanized steel side frames with full height weatherseal on both sides to

seal against door panel.4. Botttom Bar: Extruded aluminum bottom bar with electric reversing edge. Door reverses

direction upon contact with any object.a. Provide dfual thru-beam photo-eye.

5. Counterbalance: Manufacturer's recommended number of extension springs in each sidecolumn. Mechanical release lever on side column allowing door to be operated in a powerfailure. No exterior mounted coil cord.

6. Drive System: 2 HP 209, 230/460 Volt, three phase motor with variable speed AC drive toallow soft acceleration and braking.

7. Travel Speed: Open; 60 inches per second. Close; 30 inches per second.8. Electrical Controls: AC drive system with self-diagnostic capability and pre-programmed

menu options housed in a NEMA 4 electrical enclusre with vision window. Includes cyclecounter and 2 digit display and self adjusting limit switches. Control Panel to be fullyassembled, wired and tested at factory.

9. Manufacturer's standard factory finish on all components.a. Capable of withstanding positive and negative wind loads of 20 psf (940 Pa), without

undue deflection or damage to components.b. Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard; primed steel.

2.03 MATERIALSA. Curtain Construction: Interlocking slats.

1. Slat Ends: Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and toprevent lateral movement.

2. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closedposition.

3. Weatherstripping: Moisture and rot proof, resilient type, located at jamb edges, bottom ofcurtain, and where curtain enters hood enclosure of exterior doors.

B. Aluminum Slats: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), aluminum alloy Type 6063, minimum thickness________.

C. Guide Construction: Continuous, of profile to retain door in place with snap-on trim, mountingbrackets of same metal.

D. Hood Enclosure: Internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape.E. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producing

torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holdingposition at mid-travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb (10 kg) nominal force tooperate.

2.04 ELECTRIC OPERATIONA. Electric Operators:

1. Motor Rating: 1/3 hp (250 W); continuous duty.2. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, full voltage, reversing magnetic motor starter.3. Controller Enclosure: NEMA 250 Type 1.


4. Opening Speed: 12 inches per second (300 mm/s).5. Brake: Adjustable friction clutch type, activated by motor controller.6. Manual override in case of power failure.

B. Control Station: Standard three button (OPEN-STOP-CLOSE) momentary control for eachoperator.1. 24 volt circuit.

C. Safety Edge: Located at bottom of curtain, full width, electro-mechanical sensitized type, wiredto stop operator upon striking object, hollow neoprene covered.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing

without distortion or stress.C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural

members only.D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.E. Coordinate installation of electrical service with Section 26 2717.F. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components.

3.02 TOLERANCESA. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).C. Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft (3 mm per 3 m) straight edge.

3.03 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean installed components.B. Remove labels and visible markings.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 08 3100-1BIRMINGHAM, AL ACCESS DOORS AND PANELSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 08 3100ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS


A. Wall access door and frame units.B. Ceiling access door and frame units.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.B. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of

adjoining work.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of all access door units.D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of all access units.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 ACCESS DOOR AND PANEL APPLICATIONS

A. Walls, Unless Otherwise Indicated:1. Material: Steel.2. Size: 12 x 12 inches (300 x 300 mm), unless otherwise indicated.3. Standard duty, hinged door.4. In All Wall Types: Surface mounted face frame and door surface flush with frame surface.

B. Walls in Wet Areas:1. Size: 12 x 12 inches (300 x 300 mm), unless otherwise indicated.2. Standard duty, hinged door.3. In All Wall Types: Surface mounted face frame and door surface flush with frame surface.

C. Fire Rated Walls: See drawings for wall fire ratings.1. Material: Steel.2. Size: 12 x 12 inches (300 x 300 mm), unless otherwise indicated.3. Uninsulated, single thickness door panel.

D. Ceilings, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Same type as for walls.1. Material: Steel.2. Size in Lay-in Grid Ceilings: To match grid module.3. Size in Other Ceilings: 12 x 12 inches (300 x 300 mm), unless otherwise indicated.4. Standard duty, hinged door.

2.02 WALL AND CEILING UNITSA. Manufacturers:

1. Acudor Products Inc: www.acudor.com.2. Cendrex, Inc: www.cendrex.com.3. Karp Associates, Inc: www.karpinc.com.4. Milcor by Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc: www.milcorinc.com.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 08 3100-2BIRMINGHAM, AL ACCESS DOORS AND PANELSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

B. Access Doors: Factory fabricated door and frame units, fully assembled units with corner jointswelded, filled, and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements withassemblies units are to be installed in.1. Style: Exposed frame with door surface flush with frame surface.2. Door Style: Single thickness with rolled or turned in edges.3. Frames: 16 gage, 0.0598 inch (1.52 mm), minimum.4. Double-Skinned Hollow Steel Door Panels: 16 gage, 0.059 inch (1.52 mm), minimum, on

both sides and all edges.5. Units in Fire Rated Assemblies: Fire rating as required by applicable code for the fire rated

assembly in which they are to be installed.6. Steel Finish: Primed.7. Primed Finish: Polyester powder coat; manufacturer's standard color.8. Size(s): As indicated.9. Hardware:

a. Hardware for Fire Rated Units: As required for listing.b. Hinges for Non-Fire-Rated Units: Concealed, constant force closure spring type.


A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place.C. Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 08 3323-1BIRMINGHAM, AL OVERHEAD COILING DOORSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 08 3323OVERHEAD COILING DOORS


A. Overhead coiling doors and shutters, operating hardware, fire-rated, non-fire-rated, and exterior,manual and electric operation.

B. Wiring from electric circuit disconnect to operator to control station.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 08 3326 - Overhead Coiling Grilles.B. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish.C. Section 28 3100 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Fire alarm interconnection.D. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Power to disconnect.E. Section 26 0534 - Conduit: Conduit from electric circuit to operator and from operator to control

station.F. Section 26 0534 - Conduit: Conduit from fire alarm system.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.B. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products; 2013.C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.D. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical

Manufacturers Association; 2008.F. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays,

Rated 600 2000 Volts; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000 (R2008).G. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.H. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013.I. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.J. UL 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems;

Current Edition, Including All Revisions.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details, electrical

equipment .C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and

installation details.D. Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency and periodic adjustments

required.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by testing firm acceptable to theauthority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.



A. Overhead Coiling Doors:1. Overhead Door Company, Inc .2. Substitutions: Not permitted.

2.02 COILING DOORSA. Exterior Coiling Doors: Steel slat curtain at non conditioned interior.

1. Capable of withstanding positive and negative wind loads of 20 psf (940 Pa), withoutundue deflection or damage to components.

2. Product: Overhead Door Model: Rolling Service 6203. Single thickness slats. (At non conditioned spaces)4. Sandwich slat construction with insulated core of closed cell type insulation; insulation (u-)

value: 0.50 BTU/hr sq ft deg F (2.84 W/sq m deg K)(At conditioned interior spaces)5. Nominal Slat Size: 2 inches (50 mm) wide x required length.6. Finish: Factory painted, Gray color.7. Guides: Angles; galvanized steel.8. Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard; primed steel, no "decals".9. Operation: See drawings and schedules.10. Mounting: As indicated.

B. Non-Fire-Rated Interior Coiling Doors: Steel slat curtain.1. Single thickness slats.2. Product: Overhead Door Company; Model Rolling Service 6103. Finish: Factory painted, Gray color.4. Guides: Angles; primed steel.5. Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard; primed steel, no "decals".6. Operation: See drawings and schedules7. Mounting: Surface mounted.8. Interior latch only.

C. Fire-Rated Coiling Doors: Steel slat curtain; conform to NFPA 80.1. 1-1/2 hour fire rating.2. Product: Overhead Door Company; Model Rolling Service 630 with Fire Minuteman reset

feature.3. Provide products listed and labeled by UL or ITS (Warnock Hersey) as suitable for the

purpose specified and indicated.4. Oversized Openings: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction

indicating approval of fire rated units and operating hardware assembly.5. Nominal Slat Size: 2 inches (50 mm) wide x required length.6. Finish: Factory painted, grey color.7. Guides: Angles; primed steel.8. Frame Sill: Angles; Steel angle sill for doors not closing to floor.9. Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard; primed steel, no "decals".10. Release Mechanism: Fire alarm system activated with automatically governed closing

speed.11. Electric operation.12. Mounting: Surface mounted.13. Interior latch only.

2.03 MATERIALSA. Curtain Construction: Interlocking slats.

1. Slat Ends: Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and toprevent lateral movement.


2. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closedposition.

3. Weatherstripping: Moisture and rot proof, resilient type, located at jamb edges, bottom ofcurtain, and where curtain enters hood enclosure of exterior doors.

B. Steel Slats: Minimum 22 gage ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet.C. Guide Construction: Continuous, of profile to retain door in place , mounting brackets of same

metal.D. Steel Guides: Formed from galvanized steel sheet, 16 gage; 3 inch wide; complying with ASTM

A653/A653M.1. Galvanizing: Minimum G90/Z275 coating.2. Prime paint.

E. Hood Enclosure: Internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape.1. Prime paint.

F. Hardware:1. Latching: Inside mounted, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch bar with feature to

keep in locked or retracted position with provision for padlocks (padlocks by owner).G. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producing

torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holdingposition at mid-travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb (10 kg) nominal force tooperate, counterbalance in steel tube or pipe barrel, supporting curtain with defelction limited to0.03 inch per for of span..1. Life cycles: Operating components and systems shall have a minimum life expectancy of

100,000 cycles for exterior non-rated doors and 20,000 cycles for fire rated doors.2.04 ELECTRIC OPERATION

A. Operator, Controls, Actuators, and Safeties: Comply with UL 325; provide products listed by atesting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Electric Operators:1. Model: High cycle or large doors; Overhead Door Company Model RDB.2. Model: Low cycle (20,000 cycles or less): Overhead Door Company Model RG.3. Mounting: Side mounted.4. Motor Enclosure:

a. Exterior doors: NEMA MG 1 Type 4; open drip proof.b. Interior doors: NEMA MG 1 Type 1; open drip proof.

5. Motor Rating: 1/2 hp (375 W); continuous duty.6. Motor Voltage: See Electrical Drawings.7. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, full voltage, reversing magnetic motor starter.8. Controller Enclosure: NEMA 250 Type 1.9. Opening Speed: 12 inches per second (300 mm/s).10. Brake: Adjustable friction clutch type, activated by motor controller.11. Manual override in case of power failure.

C. Control Station: Standard three button (OPEN-STOP-CLOSE) momentary control for eachoperator.1. 24 volt circuit.2. Surface mounted (CMU or Concrete), Recessed (Metal Stud)

D. Safety Edge: Low cycle Doors; Located at bottom of curtain, full width, electro-mechanicalsensitized type, wired to stop operator upon striking object, hollow neoprene covered.

E. Safety Edge: High cycle doors; Provide photo-electric safety device.



A. Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. In addition, install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80.C. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing

without distortion or stress.D. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural

members only.E. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.F. Coordinate installation of electrical service with Section 26 2717.G. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components.H. Complete wiring from fire alarm system.I. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in

Section 07 9005.3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).C. Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft (3 mm per 3 m) straight edge.

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Clean installed components.B. Remove labels and visible markings.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 08 3326-1BIRMINGHAM, AL OVERHEAD COILING GRILLESPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 08 3326OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES


A. Overhead coiling metal grilles and operating hardware, manual and electric operation.B. Wiring from electric circuit disconnect to operator to control station.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 08 3323 - Overhead Coiling Doors.B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Cylinder cores and keys.C. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Power to disconnect.D. Section 26 0534 - Conduit: Conduit from electric circuit to operator and from operator to control

station.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2013.

B. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.

C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National ElectricalManufacturers Association; 2008.

D. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays,Rated 600 V; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000 (R2008).

E. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.F. UL (EAUED) - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters

Laboratories Inc.; current edition.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details, electrical

equipment .C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and

installation details.D. Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency.

1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTSA. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories

Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Overhead Coiling Grilles:1. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc: www.alpinedoors.com.2. Cornell Iron Works, Inc: www.cornelliron.com.3. The Cookson Company: www.cooksondoor.com.4. Wayne-Dalton, a Division of Overhead Door Corporation: www.waynedalton.com.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 GRILLE AND COMPONENTSA. Grille: Aluminum; horizontal bar curtain, coiling on overhead counterbalanced shaft.


1. Finish: No. 4.2. Finish: Anodized, color as selected.3. Lock: Inside cylinder lock.4. Electric operation.5. Mounting: Within framed opening.

B. Curtain: Round horizontal bars connected with vertical links.1. Horizontal bars: 5/16 inch (8 mm) diameter.2. Bar spacing: 1 1/2 inch (38 mm) on center.3. Tube spacers: 1/2 inch (13 mm) diameter.4. Spacer spacing: 3 1/4 inch (81 mm) on center.5. Vertical links: 5/8 x 1/8 inch (16 x 3 mm) flat bar.6. Link spacing: 6 inch (150 mm) on center.7. Bar Ends: Provide with nylon runners for quiet operation.8. Bottom Bar: Back-to-back angles with tubular resilient cushion.

C. Guides: Extruded aluminum angles, of profile to retain grille in place with snap-on trim,mounting brackets of same metal.

D. Hood Enclosure: Sheet metal; completely covering operating mechanisms; internally reinforcedto maintain rigidity and shape, no "decals".1. Material: Same metal as grille.2. Finish: No. 4.

E. Hardware:1. Lock Cylinders: Specified in Section 08 7100.2. Latch Handle: Interior handle.

F. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producingtorque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holdingposition at mid-travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb (10 kg) nominal force tooperate.

2.03 MATERIALSA. Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).

2.04 ELECTRIC OPERATIONA. Electric Operators:

1. Mounting: Side mounted.2. Motor Enclosure:

a. Interior grilles: NEMA MG 1 Type 1; open drip proof.3. Motor Rating: 1/3 hp (250 W); continuous duty.4. Motor Voltage: 120 volt, single phase, 60 Hz.5. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, full voltage, reversing magnetic motor starter.6. Controller Enclosure: NEMA 250 Type 1.7. Opening Speed: 12 inches per second (300 mm/s).8. Brake: Adjustable friction clutch type, activated by motor controller.9. Manual override in case of power failure.

B. Control Station: Standard three button (OPEN-STOP-CLOSE) momentary control for eachoperator.1. 24 volt circuit.2. Surface mounted.

C. Safety Edge: Located at bottom of curtain, full width, electro-mechanical sensitized type, wiredto stop operator upon striking object, hollow neoprene covered.



A. Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install grille unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing

without distortion or stress.C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural

members only.D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.E. Coordinate installation of electrical service with Section 26 2717.F. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).C. Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft (3 mm per 3 m) straight edge.

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust grille, hardware and operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Clean grille and components.B. Remove labels and visible markings.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 08 4413-1BIRMINGHAM, AL GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 08 4413GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS


A. Aluminum-framed curtain wall, with vision glazing and glass and metal infill panels.B. Perimeter sealant.C. Firestopping between curtain wall and edge of floor slab.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Weld plates embedded in concrete for attachment

of anchors.B. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Steel attachment members.C. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel attachment devices.D. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Perimeter air and vapor seal between glazing system and

adjacent construction.E. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.F. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Entrance framing and doors.G. Section 08 4229 - Automatic Entrances.H. Section 08 8000 - Glazing.I. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Metal stud and gypsum board wall at interior of

curtain wall.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; AmericanArchitectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.

B. AAMA 501.2 - Field Check of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems forWater Leakage; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009 (part of AAMA 501).

C. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; AmericanArchitectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.

D. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of CivilEngineers; 2011.

E. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2013.

F. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.

G. ASTM C794 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2010.H. ASTM C1184 - Standard Specification for Structural Silicone Sealants; 2013.I. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across theSpecimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).

J. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the exterior enclosure.B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this

section; require attendance by all affected installers.


1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly,

anchorage and fasteners, glazing and infill, internal drainage details and ________.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances,

affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field weldingrequired.

D. Samples: Submit two samples 6x6 inches in size illustrating finished aluminum surface,glazing, infill panels, glazing materials.

E. Test Reports: Submit results of full-size mock-up testing. Reports of tests previouslyperformed on the same design are acceptable.

F. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics and engineeringcalculations, and identify dimensional limitations; include load calculations at points ofattachment to building structure.

G. Report of field testing for water leakage.H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's

name and registered with manufacturer.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under directsupervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work andlicensed at the State in which the Project is located.

B. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminumglazing systems with minimum three years of documented experience.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed

coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F (5 degrees C).Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.

1.09 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units,

including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.D. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish.

Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 BASIS OF DESIGN

A. Pressure Cap Four Sides; Not Unitized, Field Assembled.1. Basis of Design: Kawneer North America, Series 1600, System 1, 2-1/4 inch (61 mm)

wide face.2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall:1. Kawneer North America: www.kawneer.com.


2. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope: www.oldcastlebe.com.3. United States Aluminum Corp: www.usalum.com.4. YKK AP America Inc: www.ykkap.com.5. Substitutions: Not permitted.

2.03 CURTAIN WALLA. Aluminum-Framed Curtain Wall: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing

members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.1. Finish: Class I natural anodized.

a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.b. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or

dissimilar metals with bituminous paint.2. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and

secured; prepared to receive anchors; fasteners and attachments concealed from view;reinforced as required for imposed loads.

3. Construction: Eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, prevent vibrationharmonics, and prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces.

4. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network anywater entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moistureoccurring within system.

B. Structural Performance Requirements: Design and size components to withstand the followingload requirements without damage or permanent set.1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with the requirements of the applicable code.

a. Measure performance by testing in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using testloads equal to 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximumpressure.

2. Seismic Loads: Design and size components to withstand seismic loads and swaydisplacement in accordance with the requirements of ASCE 7.

3. Movement: Accommodate the following movement without damage to components ordeterioration of seals:a. Expansion and contraction caused by 180 degrees F (82 degrees C) surface

temperature.b. Expansion and contraction caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F (95

degrees C) over a 12 hour period.c. Movement of curtain wall relative to perimeter framing.d. Deflection of structural support framing, under permanent and dynamic loads.

C. Water Penetration Resistance: No uncontrolled water on indoor face when tested as follows:1. Test Pressure Differential: 10 lbf/sq ft (480 Pa).

D. Air Leakage: Maximum of 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft (0.3 L/s/sq m) of wall area, when tested inaccordance with ASTM E283 at 6.27 pounds per square foot (300 Pa) pressure differentialacross assembly.

2.04 COMPONENTSA. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, drainage holes and internal weep

drainage system.B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000.

2.05 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).B. Fasteners: Stainless steel; type as required or recommended by curtain wall manufacturer.C. Exposed Flashings: 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick aluminum sheet; finish to match framing

members.


D. Structural Glazing Adhesive: Silicone, neutral cure; formulated specifically for structural sealantglazing and complying with ASTM C1184.1. Ultraviolet radiation resistant for 2000 to 4000 micro-watts minimum for 21 days.2. Adhesion when subjected to ultraviolet radiation through glass in accordance with ASTM

C794 without failure.3. Minimum adhesion tensile strength of 100 psi (690 kPa).4. Tested for compatibility with glazing accessories and weatherseal sealant.

E. Weatherseal Sealant: Silicone, same type as glazing adhesive.F. Perimeter Sealant: Type scheduled and specified in Section 07 9005.G. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration

requirements.H. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08 8000.

2.06 FINISHESA. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating or AAMA

612 clear anodic coating with electrolytically deposited organic seal; not less than 0.7 mils(0.018 mm) thick.

B. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A42 Integrally colored anodic coating orAAMA 612 electrolytically deposited colored anodic coating with electrolytically depositedorganic seal; not less than 0.7 mils (0.018 mm) thick.


A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of

this section.C. Verify that anchorage devices have been properly installed and located.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and

other irregularities.C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional

tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.F. Install sill, head, and eave edge flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to

form water tight dam.G. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.H. Structural Adhesive Glazing: Install glazing adhesive and weatherseal sealant in accordance

with adhesive manufacturer's instructions.I. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07 9005.J. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be

satisfactorily repaired.3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft (1.5 mm/m) non-cumulative or 0.5inches per 100 ft (12 mm/30 m), whichever is less.

B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).


C. Sealant Space Between Curtain Wall Mullions and Adjacent Construction: Maximum of 3/4 inch(19 mm) and minimum of 1/4 inch (6 mm).

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for independent testing and inspection

requirements. Inspection will monitor quality of installation and glazing.B. Test installed curtain wall for water leakage in accordance with AAMA 501.2.C. Replace curtain wall components that have failed field testing and retest until performance is

satisfactory.3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating sash for smooth operation.3.06 CLEANING

A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean

wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.

3.07 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 08 7100-1BIRMINGHAM, AL DOOR HARDWAREPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 08 7100DOOR HARDWARE


A. Hardware for wood, hollow steel, and aluminum doors.B. Hardware for fire-rated doors.C. Electrically operated and controlled hardware.D. Lock cylinders for doors for which hardware is specified in other sections.E. Thresholds.F. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.B. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors.C. Section 08 3323 - Overhead Coiling Doors: Lockable coiling doors.D. Section 08 3326 - Overhead Coiling Grilles: Lockable coiling grilles.E. Section 08 3613 - Sectional Doors: Hardware for same, except cylinders; installation of

cylinders.F. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Hardware for doors in storefront, including:

1. Integral weatherstripping.2. Narrow stile locks.3. Closers.4. Installation of lock cylinders provided under this section.

G. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Hardware for same except cylinders;installation of cylinders.

H. Section 28 3105 - Fire Alarm System Equipment: Electrical connection to activate door closers.1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

A. See Section 01 2100 - Allowances, for allowances affecting this section.1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings andFacilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design).

B. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings andFacilities; International Code Council; 2009.

C. BHMA A156.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; Builders HardwareManufacturers Association, Inc.; 2008 (ANSI/BHMA A156.4).

D. BHMA A156.6 - American National Standard for Architectural Door Trim; Builders HardwareManufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.6).

E. BHMA A156.8 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Overhead Stops and Holders;Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.8).

F. BHMA A156.22 - American National Standard for Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems,Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/BHMA A156.22).

G. DHI (LOCS) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doorsand Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 2004.

H. DHI WDHS.3 - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors;Door and Hardware Institute; 1993; also in WDHS-1/WDHS-5 Series, 1996.


I. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013.J. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products onto which door hardware

will be installed.B. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation to manufacturers and fabricators of products

requiring internal reinforcement for door hardware.C. Convey Owner's keying requirements to manufacturers.

1.06 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Hardware Schedule: Detailed listing of each item of hardware to be installed on each door. Use

door numbering scheme as included in the Contract Documents. Identify electrically operateditems and include power requirements.

C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed equipment, services, andconduit.

D. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, andinspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.

E. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier.F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in

Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.G. Maintenance Materials and Tools: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of

project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Tools: One set of all special wrenches or tools applicable to each different or special

hardware component, whether supplied by the hardware component manufacturer or not.1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Standards for Fire-Rated Doors: Maintain one copy of each referenced standard on site, foruse by Architect and Contractor.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified inthis section with minimum three years of documented experience.

C. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial doorhardware with three years of experience.

D. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to assist inthe work of this section.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to

match hardware schedule.1.09 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide ten year warranty for door closers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 DOOR HARDWARE - GENERAL

A. Provide all hardware specified or required to make doors fully functional, compliant withapplicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated.

B. Provide all items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer.


C. Provide products that comply with the following:1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes.2. ADA Standards for Accessible Design.3. ANSI/ICC A117.1, American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and

Facilities.4. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80.5. All Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors : Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose

specified and indicated.6. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the

purpose specified and indicated.D. Finishes:

1. Hinges on metal doors shall be primed.2. Hinges on wood doors shall match finish of adjacent hardware.3. Storefront hardware;

a. Clear anodized storefront: Brushed chrome.b. Color anodized storefront: Oil rubbed bronze.

4. Except as noted Primary finish: Brushed Chrome.2.02 HINGES

A. Hinges: Provide hinges on every swinging door.1. Provide five-knuckle full mortise butt hinges unless otherwise indicated.2. Provide ball-bearing hinges at all doors having closers.3. Provide hinges in the quantities indicated.4. Provide non-removable pins on exterior outswinging doors.5. Where electrified hardware is mounted in door leaf, provide power transfer hinges.

B. Quantity of Hinges Per Door:1. Doors From 60 inches (1.5 m) High up to 90 inches (2.3 m) High: Three hinges.2. Doors 90 inches (2.3 m) High up to 120 inches (3 m) High: Four hinges.

2.03 PUSH/PULLSA. Push/Pulls/Plates: Comply with BHMA A156.6.

1. Profile: Square Corner.2. Push plate size: 6 x 16 inches3. Pull plate size: 4 x 16 inches4. Pulls: one inch diameter with 8 inch centers5. Kickplate height: 12 inches

2.04 LOCKS AND LATCHESA. Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring locking.

1. Hardware Sets indicate locking functions required for each door.2. If no hardware set is indicated for a swinging door provide an office lockset.3. Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to

have no outside trim.4. Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to

have no locking or no outside trim.B. Lock Cylinders: Manufacturer’s standard tumbler type, six-pin standard core.

1. Provide cams and/or tailpieces as required for locking devices required.C. Keying: Grand master keyed.

1. Include construction keying.2. Key to existing keying system (for additions only).3. Supply keys in the following quantities:

a. 5 master keys.b. 5 grand master keys.


c. 6 construction keys.d. 2 change keys for each lock.

D. Latches: Provide a latch for every door that is not required to lock, unless specifically indicated"push/pull" or "not required to latch".

2.05 FLUSHBOLTSA. Flushbolts: Lever extension bolts in leading edge of door, one bolt into floor, one bolt into top of

frame.1. Pairs of Swing Doors: At inactive leaves, provide flush bolts of type as required to comply

with code.2. Floor Bolts: Provide dustproof strike except at metal thresholds.

B. Coordinators: Provide on doors having closers and self-latching or automatic flushbolts toensure that leaves close in proper order.

2.06 CLOSERSA. Closers: Complying with BHMA A156.4.

1. Provide surface-mounted, door-mounted closers unless otherwise indicated.2. Provide a door closer on every exterior door.3. Provide a door closer on every fire- and smoke-rated door. Spring hinges are not an

acceptable self-closing device unless specifically so indicated.4. On pairs of swinging doors, if an overlapping astragal is present, provide coordinator to

ensure the leaves close in proper order.2.07 STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Stops: Complying with BHMA A156.8; provide a stop for every swinging door, unless otherwiseindicated.1. Provide wall stops, unless otherwise indicated.2. If wall stops are not practical, due to configuration of room or furnishings, provide

overhead stop.3. Stop is not required if positive stop feature is specified for door closer; positive stop feature

of door closer is not an acceptable substitute for a stop unless specifically so stated.2.08 GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS

A. Gaskets: Complying with BHMA A156.22.1. On each exterior door, provide weatherstripping gaskets, unless otherwise indicated; top,

sides, and meeting stiles of pairs.a. Where exterior door is also required to have fire or smoke rating, provide gaskets

functioning as both smoke and weather seals.2. On each exterior door, provide door bottom sweep, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Thresholds:1. At each exterior door, provide a threshold unless otherwise indicated.

a. Full saddle: Finish floor at same elevation on both sides of door.b. Half saddle: Finish floor at different elevation on each side of door.c. No threshold on interior doors with finish floor at same elevation on both sides of the

door.2. Field cut threshold to frame for tight fit.

C. Fasteners At Exterior Locations: Non-corroding.2.09 PROTECTION PLATES AND ARCHITECTURAL TRIM

A. Protection Plates:1. Kickplate: Provide on push side of every door with closer, except storefront and all-glass

doors.B. Drip Guard: Provide projecting drip guard over all exterior doors unless they are under a

projecting roof or canopy.


2.10 KEY CONTROLSA. Facility Manager's Key Cabinet: Sheet steel construction, piano hinged door with key lock.

1. Mounting: Wall-mounted.2. Capacity: Actual quantity of keys, plus 10 percent additional capacity.3. Size key hooks to hold 6 keys each.4. Finish: Baked enamel, grey color.5. Key cabinet lock to building keying system.


A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire-rated doors and frames arepresent and properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correctcharacteristics.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.C. Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80.D. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As listed in

Schedule, unless otherwise noted:1. For steel doors and frames: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural

Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames."2. For wood doors: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware

for Wood Flush Doors."3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 7000.B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. Clean finished hardware per

manufacturer's instructions after final adjustments has been made. Replace items that cannotbe cleaned to manufacturer's level of finish quality at no additional cost.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 7000.B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.

3.06 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS.END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 08 8000-1BIRMINGHAM, AL GLAZINGPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 08 8000GLAZING


A. Glass.B. Glazing compounds and accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework: Cabinets with requirements for glass shelves

.B. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers.C. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material.D. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and borrowed lites.E. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors: Glazed lites in doors.F. Section 08 3200 - Sliding Glass Doors: Glazing furnished by door manufacturer.G. Section 08 3613 - Sectional Doors: Glazed lites in doors.H. Section 08 4229 - Automatic Entrances: Glazing furnished as part of door assembly.I. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Glazing furnished by storefront manufacturer.J. Section 08 4413 - Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls: Glazing furnished by wall manufacturer.K. Section 08 5113 - Aluminum Windows: Glazing furnished by window manufacturer.L. Section 08 6300 - Metal-Framed Skylights: Glazing furnished by skylight manufacturer.M. Section 08 8300 - Mirrors.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition.B. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,

Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2011).C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.D. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1.E. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass;

2012.F. ASTM C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2009e1.G. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.H. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings;

2012a.I. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation;

2010.J. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2009.K. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008.L. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2012.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of

this section; require attendance by all affected installers.


1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics,

size limitations, special handling or installation requirements.C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental

characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.D. Samples: Submit two samples 12x12 inch in size of glass units.E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Insulating Glass Units: One of each glass size and each glass type.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and GANA Sealant Manual for glazing

installation methods. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum three years documented experience.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C).B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing

compounds.1.08 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for seal

failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units.C. Laminated Glass: Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for delamination,

including replacement of failed units.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GLAZING TYPES2.02 EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES

A. Structural Design Criteria: Select type and thickness to withstand dead loads and wind loadsacting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with applicablecode.1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E1300 to determine glass type and thickness.2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery

of glazing materials.3. Thicknesses listed are minimum.

B. Air and Vapor Seals: Provide completed assemblies that maintain continuity of buildingenclosure vapor retarder and air barrier:1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections.2. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly

from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant.2.03 GLASS MATERIALS

A. Float Glass Manufacturers:1. AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc: www.na.agc-flatglass.com.2. Guardian Industries Corp: www.sunguardglass.com.3. Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com/na.4. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgideascapes.com.


5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.B. Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated.

1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazingselect).

2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048.3. Tinted Types: Color and performance characteristics as indicated.4. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements for

wind load design regardless of specified thickness.C. Laminated Glass (for skylights, if any): Float glass laminated in accordance with ASTM C1172.

1. Laminated Safety Glass: Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II.2. Plastic Interlayer: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) thick, minimum.3. Where fully tempered is specified or required, provide glass that has been tempered by the

tong-less horizontal method.4. Manufacturers:

a. AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc: www.na.agc-flatglass.com.b. Cardinal Glass Industries: www.cardinalcorp.com.c. Viracon, Apogee Enterprises, Inc: www.viracon.com.d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.04 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITSA. Manufacturers:

1. Any of the manufacturers specified for float glass.2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated.1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190.2. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners.3. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant.4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air.

2.05 GLAZING COMPOUNDSA. Manufacturers:

1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.2. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com.3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.4. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Butyl Sealant : Single component; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; ShoreA hardness of 10 to 20; black color; non-skinning.

C. Silicone Sealant : Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss ofproperties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A,and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected.

2.06 GLAZING ACCESSORIESA. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C864 Option I.

Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot (25 mm for each square meter) of glazing or minimum 4inch (100 mm) x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) x height to suit glazingmethod and pane weight and area.

B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I.Minimum 3 inch (75 mm) long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suitapplication, self adhesive on one face.

C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper 12x12 inch; black color.1. Manufacturers:


a. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.b. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTMC864 Option I; black color.

E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may

impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.B. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and GANA Sealant Manual.C. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 CLEANINGA. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.B. Remove labels after Work is complete.C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.

3.04 PROTECTIONA. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark

heat absorbing or reflective glass units.END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 08 8300-1BIRMINGHAM, AL MIRRORSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 08 8300MIRRORS


A. Glass mirrors.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry: Wood frames for mirrors.B. Section 10 2800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories: Metal-framed mirrors.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety

Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2010.B. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1.C. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.D. ASTM C1503 - Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror; 2008 (Reapproved 2013).E. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2009.F. GANA (TIPS) - Mirrors Handle with Extreme Care: Tips For the Professional on the Care and

Handling of Mirrors; National Association of Mirror Manufacturers; 2004(http://www.mirrorlink.org/members/technical.h

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data on Mirror Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics,

size limitations, special handling or installation requirements.C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in

Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install mirrors when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C).B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing

compounds.1.06 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of

same.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS

A. Mirror Glass - General: Select materials and/or provide supports as required to limit mirroredglass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials,whichever is less.

2.02 GLAZING COMPOUNDSA. Silicone Sealant : ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M and A; single component;

chemical curing; non-bleeding, non-staining, cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; black color.2.03 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness.

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 08 8300-2BIRMINGHAM, AL MIRRORSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness.C. Mirror Attachment Accessories: Stainless steel clips.D. Mirror Adhesive: Chemically compatible with mirror coating and wall substrate.


A. Verify that openings for mirrored glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to

receive mirrors.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. Prime

surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.C. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193 for solvent release sealants. Install

sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install mirrors in accordance with GANA recommendations.B. Set mirrors plumb and level, free of optical distortion.C. Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including countertops or

backsplashes.3.04 CLEANING

A. Remove wet glazing materials from finish surfaces.B. Remove labels after work is complete.C. Clean mirrors and adjacent surfaces.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 08 9200-1BIRMINGHAM, AL LOUVERED EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURESPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 08 9200LOUVERED EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES


A. Louvered aluminum screens for concealing rooftop equipment.B. Fasteners and accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Superstructure support and bracing of rooftop screens

and grilles.B. Section 07 5432 - Thermoplastic Polyolefin Roofing: Treating pentrations for suport of rooftop

screens.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010.B. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2013.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.2. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, and details of connections and bracing.1. Include structural calculations indicating compliance with wind loading requirements.2. Show field measurements of roof openings on shop drawings.

D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chipsrepresenting manufacturer's full range of available finishes, colors, and textures.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type

specified in this section, with not less than ten years of documented experience.1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for handling of grille and screen products.

1.07 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Submit manufacturer's standard ten-year finish warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT SCREENS - GENERAL

A. Wind Resistance: Design grilles and screens, including superstructure support system, towithstand positive and negative wind loading in accordance with applicable building code.

2.02 LIGHTWEIGHT PITCHED LOUVERED SCREENSA. Construction: Individual roll-formed aluminum blades snapped onto reinforced aluminum

stringers spaced at 24 in (610 mm) on center, which in turn are supported by customsuperstructure.

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 08 9200-2BIRMINGHAM, AL LOUVERED EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURESPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

1. Vertical Stringers: Stamped aluminum members formed into a U-shape in plan, alloy3003-H25, per ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), 2.625 in (66.7 mm) deep, and configured for22.5 degree louver pitch, allowing 30 percent free air flow.

2. Louver Blades: Alloy 3005-H26, per ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), 3.375 in (85.7 mm)aluminum slats roll-formed into shallow channel shape and designed to snap onto verticalstringers.

B. Aluminum Finish: Low gloss polyester enamel paint, roller coated over pretreated aluminumand baked at 400 degrees F (204 degrees C).1. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

C. Overall Screen Configuration: Dimensions, details, and layout as indicated on the drawings.2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Miscellaneous Trim: Aluminum sheet, alloy 3005-H26 or equivalent per ASTM B209 (ASTMB209M), formed to shapes indicated and finished to match other components.

B. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, as approved by manufacturer of rooftopequipment screens.




A. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the bestresult for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install rooftop equipment screens in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and

approved shop drawings.B. Form tight joints and fit exposed connections accurately.C. Provide all necessary fastenings and anchors required for a complete installation. Install units

plumb, level, and in proper alignment with adjacent work.3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.B. Protect metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by application of a heavy coating of

bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry or dissimilar metals.C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 09 2116-1BIRMINGHAM, AL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIESPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 09 2116GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES


A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.B. Metal stud wall framing.C. Metal channel ceiling framing.D. Acoustic insulation.E. Gypsum sheathing.F. Cementitious backing board.G. Gypsum wallboard.H. Joint treatment and accessories.I. Water-resistive barrier over exterior wall sheathing.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Exterior wind-load-bearing metal stud framing.B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing and sheathing.C. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.D. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Acoustic insulation.E. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Acoustic sealant.F. Section 09 3000 - Tiling (Tile): Tile backing board.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer

Units; 2013.1.B. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications

for Cementitious Backer Units; 2013.1.C. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing

Gypsum Board; 2012.D. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2013.E. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light

Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.F. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive

Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2011.G. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.H. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel

Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)in Thickness; 2011.

I. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for theApplication of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs;2007 (Reapproved 2013).

J. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and GypsumVeneer Base; 2010a.

K. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use asSheathing; 2013.


L. ASTM C1278/C1278M - Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel; 2007a(Reapproved 2011).

M. ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing; 2013.N. ASTM C1325 - Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cement

Substrate Sheets; 2008b.O. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014.P. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of

Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012.Q. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound

Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.R. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010.S. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2013.T. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum Association; 2012.U. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2012.V. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing

system.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application andfinishing, with minimum three years of experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.1. See PART 3 for finishing requirements.

B. Interior Partitions Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the followingcharacteristics:1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on

tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.C. Shaft Walls at HVAC Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:

1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Sustained loads of 5 lbf/sq ft (0.24 kPa) with maximummid-span deflection of L/240.

2. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 35-39 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based ontests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.

D. Shaft Walls at Elevator Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the followingcharacteristics:1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Intermittent loads of 5 lbf/sq ft (0.24 kPa) with maximum

mid-span deflection of L/240.2. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 35-39 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on

tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.E. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:

1. Fire Rated Partitions: Listed Assembly; 1 and 2 hour rating.2. Fire Rated Shaft Walls: Listed Assembly; 1 hour rating hour rating.

2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALSA. Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:


1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com.2. Marino: www.marinoware.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of sizeand properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximumdeflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf (240 Pa).1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces.2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.3. Ceiling Channels: C shaped.4. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch (22 mm).

C. Loadbearing Studs for Application of Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 05 4000. D. Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties

necessary to comply with ASTM C754 and specified performance requirements.1. Manufacturers - Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories:

a. Same manufacturer as other framing materials.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

E. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.F. Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of

sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and fastened asindicated on drawings.

2.03 BOARD MATERIALSA. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:

1. American Gypsum: www.americangypsum.com.2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com.4. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com.5. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes tominimize joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.2. Unfaced fiber-reinforced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1278/C1278M, suitable for

paint finish, of the same core type and thickness may be substituted for paper-facedboard.

3. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly;if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed.

4. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch (16 mm).b. Ceilings: 1/2 inch (13 mm).

5. Paper-Faced Products:a. American Gypsum; EagleRoc Regular Gypsum Wallboard and FireBloc Type X

Gypsum Wallboard.b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock.c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Gypsum Wallboard.d. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Panels.e. Substitutions: Not permitted.

6. Glass Mat Faced Products:a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus.b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus Abuse-Resistant.c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus Impact-Resistant Interior Panels.d. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP Interior Extreme.e. Substitutions: Not permitted.


C. Backing Board For Wet Areas: One of the following products:1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including tub and shower surrounds, shower

ceilings, and food preparation.2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.3. ANSI Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based; aggregated Portland cement panels

with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces complying with ANSI A118.9 orASTM C1325.a. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).b. Products:

1) Custom Building Products; _____: www.custombuildingproducts.com.2) National Gypsum Company; _____: www.nationalgypsum.com.3) USG Corporation; _____: www.usg.com.4) Substitutions: Not permitted.

D. Backing Board For Non-Wet Areas: Water-resistant gypsum backing board as defined in ASTMC1396/C1396M; sizes to minimum joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thinset tile, except in wet areas.2. Type: Regular and Type X, in locations indicated.3. Type X Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm).4. Regular Board Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm).5. Edges: Tapered.6. Products:

a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensShield Tile Backer.b. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

E. Ceiling Board: Special sag-resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M;sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.2. Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm).3. Edges: Tapered.4. Products:

a. American Gypsum; Interior Ceiling Board.b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Interior Ceiling.c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Span 24 Ceiling Board.d. National Gypsum Company; High Strength Brand Ceiling Board.e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

F. Exterior Sheathing Board: Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: Exterior sheathing, unless otherwise indicated.2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.3. Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum substrate as defined in ASTM

C1177/C1177M.4. Core Type: Regular and Type X, as indicated.5. Type X Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm).6. Regular Board Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm).7. Edges: Square, for vertical application.8. Glass Mat Faced Products:

a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc Brand.b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensGlass Sheathing.c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand eXP Extended Exposure Sheathing.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

G. Shaftwall and Coreboard: Type X; 1 inch (25 mm) thick by 24 inches (610 mm) wide, beveledlong edges, ends square cut.


1. Paper Faced Type: Gypsum shaftliner board or gypsum coreboard as defined ASTMC1396/C1396M; water-resistant faces.

2. Products:a. American Gypsum; Shaft Liner.b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Shaftliner Type X.c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand 1" Fire-Shield Shaftliner.d. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand 1" Fire-Shield Shaftliner XP

(mold-resistant).e. Pacific Coast Building Products, Inc; PABCORE Gypsum Shaftliner Board type X.f. Temple-Inland Building Products by Georgia-Pacific, LLC; SilentGuard Gypsum

Shaftliner.g. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Gypsum Liner Panels.h. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Gypsum Liner Panels--Enhanced (mold-resistant).

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: 3

1/2 inches.B. Acoustic Sealant: Non-hardening, non-skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board. C. Water-Resistive Barrier: No. 15 asphalt felt.D. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance.E. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project

conditions.1. Tape: 2 inch (50 mm) wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as

otherwise indicated.2. Chemical hardening type compound.

F. High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex-based coating for spray application, designed totake the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish.

G. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch (0.7 mm) In Thickness, to WoodMembers, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated forexterior locations.

H. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.8 to 2.8 mm) inThickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steelstuds.


A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.3.02 SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION

A. Shaft Wall Framing: Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.1. Install studs at spacing required to meet performance requirements.

B. Shaft Wall Liner: Cut panels to accurate dimension and install sequentially between specialfriction studs.

3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATIONA. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated.

1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200.2. Install bracing as required at exterior locations to resist wind uplift.

C. Studs: Space studs as permitted by standard.1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations.


2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track inaccordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintainclearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs withcontinuous bridging.

D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using notless than double studs at jambs.

E. Standard Wall Furring: Install at concrete walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not morethan 4 inches (100 mm) from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place onalternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches (600 mm) on center.1. Orientation: Vertical.2. Spacing: As indicated.

F. Furring for Fire Ratings: Install as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and to GA-600requirements.

G. Blocking: Install mechanically fastened steel sheet blocking for support of:1. Framed openings.2. Wall mounted cabinets.3. Plumbing fixtures.4. Toilet partitions.5. Toilet accessories.6. Wall mounted door hardware.

3.04 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATIONA. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around

electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. In non-fire-rated construction, seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, andrough-in boxes.

3.05 BOARD INSTALLATIONA. Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end

joints, especially in highly visible locations.B. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of

assembly listing.C. Exterior Sheathing: Comply with ASTM C1280. Install sheathing vertically, with edges butted

tight and ends occurring over firm bearing.D. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members and plywood substrate where

indicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions.3.06 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated.1. Not more than 30 feet (10 meters) apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet (16 meters)

long.B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated.

3.07 JOINT TREATMENTA. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board and Exterior Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Use fiberglass joint

tape, bedded and finished with chemical hardening type joint compound.B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:

1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwiseindicated.


2. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish and other areasspecifically indicated.

3. Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish.4. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the

completed construction.5. Level 0: Temporary partitions and surfaces indicated to be finished in later stage of

project.C. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to

receive finishes.1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

D. Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surfaceafter joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish.

E. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended bymanufacturer.

3.08 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet

(3 mm in 3 m) in any direction.END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 09 3000-1BIRMINGHAM, AL TILINGPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 09 3000TILING


A. Tile for floor applications.B. Tile for wall applications.C. Tile for shower receptors.D. Cementitious backer board as tile substrate.E. Ceramic accessories.F. Ceramic trim.G. Non-ceramic trim.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 1400 - Fluid-Applied Waterproofing.B. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers.C. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Installation of tile backer board.D. Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures: Shower receptor.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of

Ceramic Tile - Version; 2013.1.B. ANSI A108.1A - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in

the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1.C. ANSI A108.1B - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a

Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar;2013.1.

D. ANSI A108.1C - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in theWet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a CuredPortland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1.

E. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withOrganic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2013.1.

F. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withDry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1.

G. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withChemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 2013.1.

H. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withChemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 2013.1.

I. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withModified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 2013.1.

J. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework;2013.1.

K. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation ofCementitious Backer Units; 2013.1.

L. ANSI A108.12 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withEGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1.

M. ANSI A108.13 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Load Bearing,Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone; 2013.1.


N. ANSI A118.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Dry-Set Cement Mortar; 2013.1.O. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar;

2013.1.P. ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for High Performance Cement

Grouts for Tile Installation; 2013.1.Q. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications

for Cementitious Backer Units; 2013.1.R. ANSI A118.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Load Bearing, Bonded,

Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation; 2013.1.S. ANSI A118.12 - American National Standard Specifications for Crack Isolation Membranes for

Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation; 2013.1.T. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation - Version; 2013.1.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of

this section; require attendance by all affected installers.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories.

Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions

with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, andsetting details.

D. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 x 18 inches (450 x450 mm) in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.

E. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removalmethods, and polishes and waxes.

F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Tile: 10 square feet (1 square meters) of each size, color, and surface finish

combination.1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Maintain one copy of and ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 and TCNA (HB) on site.B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5

years of documented experience.1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment.B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) during installation

of mortar materials.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 TILE

A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer.1. Basis of Design: Manufacturer listed in the Finish Schedule in the Drawings.2. Allowed Manufacturer's (unless finish schedule indicates no substitutions allowed):


a. American Olean Corporation: www.americanolean.com.b. Dal-Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com.c. Autostone Floor Systems: www.autostoneusa.comd. Summitville Tiles, Inc: www.summitville.com.e. Crossville Ceramics; wwwcrossvilleinc.com.f. Substitutions: Not permitted.from products indicated on the drawings.

2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIESA. Ceramic Accessories: Glazed finish, same color and finish as adjacent field tile; same

manufacturer as tile.B. Ceramic Trim: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove ceramic shapes in

sizes coordinated with field tile.1. Applications: Use in the following locations:

a. Open Edges: Bullnose.b. Inside Corners: Jointed.c. Floor to Wall Joints: Cove base.

2. Manufacturer: Same as for tile.C. Non-Ceramic Trim: Brushed stainless steel, style and dimensions to suit application, for setting

using tile mortar or adhesive.1. Applications: Use in the following locations:

a. Open edges of wall tile.b. Open edges of floor tile.c. Wall corners, outside and inside.d. Transition between floor finishes of different heights.e. Thresholds at door openings.f. Expansion and control joints, floor and wall.g. Borders and other trim as indicated on drawings.

2. Manufacturer:a. Schluter-Systems: www.schluter.com.

1) Schiene - Tile edge protection and transitions.(a) Satin Anodized Aluminum or Satin Stainless Steel

2) Trep-E - Stair nosing Profile3) Ren-U - Floor tranistion

(a) Satin Anodized Aluminum or Satin Stainless Steel4) Reno-T - T shaped floor transition

(a) Satin Anodized Aluminum or Satin Stainless Steel5) Dilex-BT - Expansion Joint

(a) Satin Stainless Steelb. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 SETTING MATERIALSA. Provide setting materials made by the same manufacturer as grout.B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.4.

1. Application(s): Use this type of bond coat where indicated and where no other type ofbond coat is indicated.

2. Products:a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX X 77 MICROTEC: www.ardexamericas.com.b. AVM Industries, Inc; Thin-Set 780: www.avmindustries.com.c. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE 254 Platinum: www.laticrete.com.d. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete 720 Marble Pro: www.merkrete.com.e. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand; Permalastic System: www.prospec.com.f. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.1.


2.04 GROUTSA. Manufacturers:

1. ARDEX Engineered Cements: www.ardexamericas.com.2. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand; ProColor Sanded Tile Grout: www.prospec.com.3. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.4. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE PERMACOLOR Grout: www.laticrete.com.5. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Non-Sanded Color Grout: www.merkrete.com.6. Bonsal American, Inc. www.sakrete.com .7. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Polymer Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout.1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout is

indicated.2. Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch wide and larger; use unsanded grout for joints less

than 1/8 inch wide.3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.4. Products:

a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX FG-C MICROTEC: www.ardexamericas.com.b. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.c. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE PERMACOLOR Grout:

www.laticrete.com.d. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Non-Sanded Color Grout:

www.merkrete.com.e. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand; ProColor Sanded Tile Grout: www.prospec.com.f. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Tile Sealant: Gunnable, silicone, siliconized acrylic, or urethane sealant; moisture and mildewresistant type.1. Applications: Between tile and plumbing fixtures.2. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.3. Products:

a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX SX: www.ardexamericas.com.b. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE LATASIL: www.laticrete.com.c. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Colored Caulking: www.merkrete.com.d. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand; ProColor Advantage Caulk: www.prospec.com.e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.05 THIN-SET ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Concrete Floor Slab Crack Isolation Membrane: Material complying with ANSI A118.12; not

intended as waterproofing.1. Thickness: 30 mils (.75 mm), maximum.2. Crack Resistance: No failure at 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) gap, minimum.3. Products:

a. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane:www.laticrete.com.

b. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc.; Merkrete Fracture Guard 5000: www.merkrete.com.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Waterproofing Membrane at Showers and Tiled Tubs: Specifically designed for bonding tocementitious substrate under thick mortar bed or thin-set tile; complying with ANSI A118.10.1. Type: Mortar-bonded sheet.2. Material: Chlorinated polyethylene sheet membrane with polyester fabric laminated to both

sides, 30 mils (0.8 mm), thick, minimum.3. Products:

a. Noble Company; NobleSeal TS: www.noblecompany.com.


b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.C. Backer Board: Cementitious type complying with ANSI A118.9; high density, glass fiber

reinforced, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick; 2 inch (50 mm) wide coated glass fiber tape for joints andcorners.


A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type ofwork and are ready to receive tile.

B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.

C. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moistureemission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within the following limits:1. Moisture emission rate: Not greater than 3 lb per 1000 sq ft (7.1 kg per 100 sq m) per 24

hours when tested using calcium chloride moisture test kit for 72 hours.2. Alkalinity: pH range of 5-9.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Protect surrounding work from damage.B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable

flatness tolerances.D. Install backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions.

Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of setting material to a feather edge.3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install tile, thresholds, and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable requirements ofANSI A108.1A thru A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB) recommendations.

B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases

neatly. Align floor joints.D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout

joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout.E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.F. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings.G. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.H. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.I. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.J. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.K. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.L. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.

3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODSA. Over exterior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F102, with

standard grout.3.05 INSTALLATION - SHOWERS AND BATHTUB WALLS

A. At tiled shower receptors install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method B415, mortar bed floor,and W244, thin-set over cementitious backer unit walls.

B. Grout with standard grout as specified above.


C. Seal joints between tile work and other work with sealant Type ____ specified in Section 079005.

3.06 INSTALLATION - WALL TILEA. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W244,

using membrane at toilet rooms.B. Over interior concrete and masonry install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W202,

thin-set with dry-set or latex-Portland cement bond coat.C. Over metal studs without backer install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W241, mortar

bed, with membrane where indicated.3.07 CLEANING

A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.3.08 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 09 5100-1BIRMINGHAM, AL ACOUSTICAL CEILINGSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 09 5100ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS


A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.B. Acoustical units.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Placement of special anchors or inserts

for suspension system.B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of special anchors or inserts for

suspension system.C. Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking: Placement of special anchors or inserts for suspension

system.D. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Acoustical insulation.E. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Acoustical sealant.F. Section 08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels: Access panels.G. Section 21 1300 - Fire Suppression Sprinklers: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system.H. Section 23 3700 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling.I. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of

Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2013a.B. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels; 2013.C. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2008e1.D. NFPA 286 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling

Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth; 2011.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed,sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work iscompleted, tested, and approved.

B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning.C. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components.D. Samples: Submit two full size samples illustrating material and finish of acoustical units.E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Acoustical Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the

products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.


B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing theproducts specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F (16 degrees C), and maximum

humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. Manufacturers:1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com.2. Acoustic Ceiling Products, Inc.: www.acpideas.com.3. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.4. Hunter Douglas Contract: www.hunterdouglascontract.com.5. USG: www.usg.com.6. Substitutions: Not permitted. See drawings for schedule products.

B. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A.C. Plastic Lay-in Ceiling Panels Type _____: Complying with NFPA 286, Class A: _______.

1. Size: 24 x 24 inches (600 x 600 mm).2. Louver cell size: 1/2" x 1/2" by 1/2" nominal.3. Minimum 0.065" wall thickness, injection molded.4. Shielding angle: 45 degrees.5. Surface Texture: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.6. Color: White., translucent.

2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)A. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com.2. Acoustic Ceiling Products, Inc.: www.acpideas.com.3. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.4. Chicago Metallic Corporation: www.chicagometallic.com.5. Hunter Douglas Contract: www.hunterdouglascontract.com.6. USG: www.usg.com.7. Substitutions: Not permitted. See drawings for scheduled products.

B. Suspension Systems - General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and interlockingcomponents, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips asrequired.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic

requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified.B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid.

1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face ofgrid.

C. Acoustical Insulation: Specified in Section 07 2100.1. Thickness: 2 inch (50 mm).

D. Acoustical Sealant For Perimeter Moldings: Specified in Section 07 9005.E. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.


B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximumdeflection of 1:360.

B. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with otherwork.

C. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Wherecarrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.

D. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearestaffected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.

E. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead loadto exceed deflection capability.

F. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches (150 mm) of eachcorner, or support components independently.

G. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.H. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with

other interruptions.1. Use longest practical lengths.2. Overlap and rivet corners.

3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITSA. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to

appearance and function.C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.F. Cutting Acoustical Units:

1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.G. Install plastic lay-in panels at following minimum distance from conventional light sources:

3.04 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m).B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 09 5470-1BIRMINGHAM, AL METAL PLANK CEILING SYSTEMPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 09 5470METAL PLANK CEILING SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARYA. Section Includes:

1. LEED Data: www.ecoscorecard.com2. Perforated and un-perforated metal ceiling panels3. Acoustical backing4. Suspension systems5. Accessories; provide other necessary items including devices for attachment overhead

construction, secondary members, splines, splices, connecting clips, wall connectors, wallangles, and other devices required for a complete installation.

6. Supplemental support framing: Provide fully engineered secondary framing as required tomeet code, conforming to layout shown in drawings, to support direct-hung metal ceilingssuspension system.

7. Coordinate layout and installation of items penetrating or being installed in ceiling systemswith responsible trades.

B. Related Sections / Work:1. 1. Sections 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed metal Framing2. 2. Sections 09 20 00 - Plaster and Gypsum Board3. 3. Sections 09 50 00 - Acoustical Ceilings4. 4. Sections 09 90 00 - Paintings and Coatings5. 5. Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning6. 6. Division 26 - Electrical

C. Alternates (Substitutions):1. Prior approval: unless otherwise provided for in the contract documents, proposed product

substitutions may be submitted no later than 10 working days prior to the date establishedfor receipt of bids. Approval of a proposed substitution is contingent upon the Architect’sreview of the proposal for acceptability. Approved products will be set forth by addenda. Ifsubstitute products have not been approved by addenda, but are included in a bid, thespecified products shall be provided without additional compensation.

2. Submittals which do not provide adequate data for the product evaluation will not beconsidered. The proposed substitution must meet the requirements for this section,including but not necessarily limited to the following: single source materials supplier (ifspecified in Section 1.5); panel design, size, composition, color and finish; suspensionsystem component profiles and sizes; and compliance with the referenced standards

D. This Section covers the general requirements only for Acoustical Metal Ceilings as shown onthe drawings. The supplying and installation of additional accessory feature and other items notspecifically mentioned herein, but which are necessary to make a complete installation shallalso be included or clarified accordingly.

E. Qualification Data:1. Test Reports: Certified reports from independent agency substantiating structural

compliance to windloads and other governing requirements.2. Certificates:

a. Data substantiating manufacturer and installer qualifications.b. Certified data attesting fire rated materials comply with specifications.

3. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Detailed installation instructions and maintenance data.


1.03 REFERENCESA. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. E 84 - “Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials”2. E 488 - “Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry

Elements”3. B 209 - “Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate”4. C 423 - “Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by Reverberation Room

Method”5. E 580 - “Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical

Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Moderate Seismic Restraint”6. C 635 - “Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and

Lay-in Panel Ceilings”7. C 636 - “Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspensions Systems for

Acoustical and Lay-in Panels”8. A 641 - “Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire”9. A 653 - “Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron

Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip process.10. E 1264 - Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products”11. E 1477 - Standard Test Method for Luminous Reflectance factor of Acoustical Materials by

use of Integrating-Sphere Reflectometers”12. D 1044 - Practice for Abrasion Resistance13. D 1002 - Practice for Adhesion Resistance

B. Applicable LEED Environmental Categories and Credits and performance requirements asindicated:1. Material and Resources (MR)

a. MR Credit 4.1 & 4.2 - Recycled Contentb. MR Credit 5.1 & 5.2 - Regional Materialsc. MR Credit 7.0 - Certified Wood

2. Indoor Environmental Quality (EQ)a. EQ Credit 4.1 - Low Emitting Materials, Adhesives & Sealantsb. EQ Credit 4.1 - Low Emitting Materials, Paintsc. EQ Credit 4.4 - Low Emitting Materials, Composite Wood & Agrifiber

3. Innovation in Design (IC)a. IC Credit 1.1 - Enhanced Acoustical Performance

1.04 1.4 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Manufacturer’s published literature, including specifications.B. LEED Submittal Data: Manufacturer’s product data for each product specified in this section

per ecoscorecard.com.C. Product Certification: Manufacturer’s certifications that products comply with specified

requirements and governing codes including product data, laboratory test reports and researchreports showing compliance with specified standards.

D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for reflected ceiling plans (RCP’s), drawn to scale, andindicating penetrations and ceiling mounted items. Show the following details:1. Reflected Ceiling Plan(s): Indicating metal ceiling layout, ceiling mounted items and

penetrations.2. Suspension System, Carrier and Component Layout.3. Details of system assembly and connections to building components.

E. Samples for Verification: Full-size units (or as specified below) of each type of ceiling assemblyindicated; in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range ofvariations expected in these characteristics. Submit samples for each type specified.1. 11-inch square metal panel units.


2. 11-inch long samples of each exposed molding or trim.3. 11-inch long samples of each suspension component.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer/Installer Qualifications:

1. Provide metal ceiling system components produced by a single manufacturer with aminimum 5 years experience in actual production of specified products and with resourcesto provide consistent quality in appearance and physical properties, without delaying thework.

2. Provide suspension system components produced by a single manufacturer to providecompatible components for a complete metal ceiling system installation.

3. Perform installations using a firm with installers having no less than 3 years of successfulexperience on projects of similar size and requirements.

B. Regulatory Requirements:1. Fire Rating Performance Characteristics: Install system to provide a flame spread of 0 -

25, complying with certified testing to ASTM E 84.2. Structural Criteria: Install and certify system to comply with structural and wind load

requirements of governing codes.3. Installation Standard for Suspension System: Comply with ASTM C 636.

C. Mock-Up: Prior to beginning installation erect a mock-up section, where directed, using allsystem components.

D. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct a conference, prior to start of installation, to reviewsystem requirements, shop drawings, and all coordination needs.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGA. Deliver system components in manufacturer’s original unopened packages, clearly labeled.B. Store components in fully enclosed dry space. Carefully place on skids, to damage from

moisture and other construction activities.C. Handle components to prevent damage to surfaces and edges, and to prevent distortion and

other physical damage.1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Begin system installations only after spaces are enclosed and weather-tight, and after all wetwork and overhead work have been completed.

B. Prior to starting installations, allow materials to reach ambient room temperature and humidityintended to be maintained for occupancy.

1.08 WARRANTYA. Provide specified manufacturer’s warranty against defects in workmanship, discoloration, or

other defect considered undesirable by the Architect or Employer.B. This warranty shall remain in effect for a minimum period of one (1) year from date of initial

acceptance.1.09 MAINTENANCE & EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Maintenance Instructions: Provide manufacturers standard maintenance and cleaninginstructions for finishes provided.

B. Extra Materials: Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, arepackaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.Only typical system components are included with attic stock.1. Acoustical Metal Ceiling Pan Units: Full-size units equal to 2 percent (2%) of amount

installed.2. Ceiling Suspension System Components: Quantity of each grid and exposed component

equal to 2 percent (2%) of amount installed.


PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Provide “Luxalon” Hook-On metal plank ceiling system manufactured by Hunter DouglasArchitectural Products, Inc., 5015 Oakbrook Parkway, Suite 100, Norcross, GA 30093, USA.Ph. (800) 366-4327.

2.02 MATERIALSA. Metal Plank Ceiling System for (interior) (exterior) installations:B. Panel Profile Type: Hook on, (.032”) (.040”) (.050”) (.063”) inch thick aluminum with square

edges1. Width: (12 inches)(24 inches) Width: (12 inches)(24 inches)2. Length: (24 inches)(48 inches)(60 inches)(72 inches)(96 inches)3. Other sizes available, Contact Hunter Douglas4. Joint Style: Closed, butt joint.

C. Hook-On Suspension System:1. Plank Type: Hook-On plank formed with two ends to hook securely onto runners.2. Structural Classification: (intermediate duty) (heavy duty).3. Primary runners: 1 1/2 inches deep, 16 Ga., galvanized steel “C” channels.4. Hangers: 1 1/2” deep, 16 Ga., cold rolled steel “C” channels.5. Hanger wire: 12 Ga. pre-stretched galvanized steel.6. Secondary runners: 18 Ga. Pre-punched galvanized steel, 1 5/8 inches (41 mm) deep,

Z-shaped.7. Connectors: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) diameter, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, 2 inch(51 mm) deep U

bolts with flat plate and nuts.D. Seismic / Wind Uplift Compression Struts: 1 1/2 inch (38 mm) deep, 16 Ga., cold rolled steel “C”

channels.E. Perforations: (Non Perforated)(Perforation #____)

1. Standard perforations, see website: www.hunterdouglascontract.com/ceilings<http://www.hunterdouglascontract.com/ceilings>.

2. Standard perforation border ¼”3. Other optional patterns available. Contact Hunter Douglas.

F. Panel Finish1. Paint; color to be selected by architect

a. a. Applied Polyesterb. b. Powder coat

2. Anodized (interior only)3. Film Profiled Wrapped (interior only)4. Wood veneer (interior only)

2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Suspension System Carrier/Channel Splices: Manufacturer’s standard splices with matching

profile and attachment holes.B. Wall Moldings / Trim: Box mold (standard).C. Clips: Manufacturer’s standard hold-down, security and seismic clips.D. Access Panels: Manufacturer’s standard hinged style at locations indicated.E. Acoustic Material: (Non-woven black fabric) (Non-woven black fabric with 1 inch thick glass

fiber, 1 1/2 pcf density, enclosed in black polyethylene)(1 inch thick glass fiber, 1 1/2 pcf density,enclosed in black polyethylene)

F. Custom Panels and Trim Pieces: Fabricate panels for dropped soffit returns and similarconditions from materials and finishes to match selected ceiling plank.


G. Plenum Access Tool: Manufacturer’s standard for removing snap-in type panels.H. Lighting Fixtures (Modular Type “M” or “MT” flange) and HVAC diffusers: Optional.

PART 3- EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical metal panels attach or abut, withInstaller present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections thataffect installation and anchorage, and other conditions affecting performance of metal panelceilings.

B. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whoseinstallation is specified in other Sections.

B. B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical metal pan units to balanceborder widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width units atborders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

C. Survey substrate for wall attachment to assure squareness and proper elevation for wall panelinstallation.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. General: Install acoustical metal pan ceilings, per manufacturers shop drawings provided, per

manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with publications referenced below.1. ClSCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook.2. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations - ASTM C 636.3. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint - ASTM E 5804. IBC (International Building Code) standard for Seismic Zone for local area.

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's approved structural substrates and as follows:1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling

plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces

by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means.3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produce hanger

spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacing required to support standardsuspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers inform of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members andhangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referencedstandards and publications.

4. Where used secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports abovewith a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or toinserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure; that are appropriate for substrate;and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevatedtemperatures.

5. Space hangers not more than 48 inches on center, along each member supported directlyfrom hangers, unless otherwise indicated; and provide hangers not more than 8 inchesfrom ends of each member. Supply supporting calculations from licensed StructuralEngineer verifying hanger spacing meets all requirements, when spacing exceed thoserecommended.

6. Fine level grid to 1/8 inch in 10 feet from specified elevation(s), square and true.7. Adjust suspension system runners so they are square (within .5 degree from 90 degrees)

and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinkedmembers.


C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports acceptable to Architect /Engineer and or inspector. Suspend bracing from building's structural members and / orstructural deck, as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steeldeck, or steel deck tabs(unless directed otherwise).

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area andwhere necessary to conceal edges of acoustical metal pan. Method of edge trim attachmentand design of edge trims to be approved by Architect.1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 18” O.C. and not more than

6” from ends, leveling with ceding suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8” in 10’. Mitercorners accurately and connect securely.

2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim without priorwritten approval. Or unless detailed otherwise.

E. Scribe and cut acoustical metal panel units for accurate fit at penetrations by, other workthrough ceilings. Stiffen edges of cut units as required to eliminate evidence of buckling orvariations in flatness exceeding referenced standards for stretcher-leveled metal sheet.

F. Install acoustical metal panel units in coordination with suspension system.1. Align joints in adjacent courses to form uniform, straight joints parallel to room axis in both

directions, unless otherwise indicated. Install directionally patterned or textured panels indirections indicated on approved shop drawings. Panel-joints shall flow smoothly and in astraight line within 1/8” in 10’. Intersections shall be continuous.

2. Fit adjoining units to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut units for accurate fit at bordersand around construction penetrating ceiling.

3. Remove protective film from panels only when space is completely clean and free ofairborne particles. Use white cotton gloves for final installation of panels into grid system.

3.04 ADJUST AND CLEANA. Adjust components to provide uniform tolerances.B. Replace all ceiling panels that are scratched, dented or otherwise damaged.C. Clean exposed surfaces with non-solvent, non-abrasive commercial type cleaner.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 09 6500-1BIRMINGHAM, AL RESILIENT FLOORINGPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 09 6500RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 2 PRODUCTS1.01 TILE FLOORING

A. Vinyl Composition Tile: Homogeneous, with color extending throughout thickness, and:1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1066, of Class corresponding to type

specified.2. Size: 12 x 12 inch (305 x 305 mm).3. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).4. Pattern: Solid color.5. Manufacturers:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com.b. Mannington Mills, Inc: www.mannington.com.c. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company; Product ____: www.johnsonite.com.d. other manufacturers as indicated on the drawings. .e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Rubber Tile: Homogeneous color and pattern throughout thickness, and:1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1344, of Class corresponding to type

specified.2. Design: as indicated on the drawings..3. Size: 12 x 12 inch (305 x 305 mm).4. Overall Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).5. Pattern: Solid color.6. Manufacturers:

a. Burke Flooring: www.burkeflooring.com.b. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company; Product ____: www.johnsonite.com.c. Flexco, Inc: www.flexcofloors.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Feature Strips: Of same material as tile, 8 inch wide.1.02 RESILIENT BASE

A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove,and as follows:1. Height: 4 inch (100 mm).2. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick.3. Finish: Satin.4. Length: Roll.5. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards.6. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops.7. Manufacturers:

a. Burke Flooring: www.burkemercer.com.b. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company; Product ____: www.johnsonite.com.c. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com.d. other manufacturers as indicated on the drawings. .e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

1.03 ACCESSORIESA. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.B. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring

manufacturer.C. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring.

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 09 6500-2BIRMINGHAM, AL RESILIENT FLOORINGPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

D. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer.PART 3 EXECUTION2.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks thatmight telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners,and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.

B. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilientflooring installation by testing for moisture and pH.1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring

manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.C. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.

2.02 PREPARATIONA. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other

defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.B. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.

2.03 INSTALLATIONA. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.D. Fit joints tightly.E. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.F. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate

flooring under centerline of door.G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where

indicated.H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce

tight joints.2.04 TILE FLOORING

A. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unlessmanufacturer's instructions say otherwise.

2.05 RESILIENT BASEA. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches (45 mm) between

joints.B. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.

2.06 CLEANINGA. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2.07 PROTECTIONA. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 09 6800-1BIRMINGHAM, AL CARPETINGPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 09 6800CARPETING


A. Carpet, direct-glued.B. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete

slabs and floors to receive adhesive-applied carpet.B. Section 22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties: Plumbing floor cover plate with recess for

carpet.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM D2859 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile FloorCovering Materials; 2006 (Reapproved 2011).

B. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;2011.

C. CRI (CIS) - Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2009.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams, direction of carpet pile and

pattern, location of edge moldings and edge bindings .C. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance

characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.D. Samples: Submit two samples 18x18 inch (____x____ mm) in size illustrating color and pattern

for each carpet and cushion material specified.E. Submit two, 12 inch (____ mm) long samples of edge strip for each color specified.F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.G. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,

and suggested schedule for cleaning.H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional requirements.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet withminimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum three yearsdocumented experience.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation.B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) ambient temperature 24 hours prior to, during

and 24 hours after installation.C. Ventilate installation area during installation and for 72 hours after installation.


A. Carpet:


1. As indicated on the drawings .2. Substitutions: Not permitted.

2.02 CARPETA. Carpet Type As indicated on the drawings.:

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Sub-Floor Filler: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer.B. Seam Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer.C. Contact Adhesive: Recommended by carpet manufacturer; releasable type.


A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type ofwork and are ready to receive carpet.

B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding ofadhesives to sub floor surfaces.

C. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooringinstallation by testing for moisture and pH.1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material

manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.D. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and

other defects with sub-floor filler.C. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is

cured.D. Clean substrate.

3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERALA. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.B. Install carpet and cushion in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI Carpet

Installation Standard.C. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.D. Lay out carpet and locate seams in accordance with shop drawings:

1. Locate seams in area of least traffic, out of areas of pivoting traffic, and parallel to maintraffic.

2. Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings.3. Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same direction on adjacent

pieces.4. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.5. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area.

E. Install carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform appearance.3.04 DIRECT-GLUED CARPET

A. Double cut carpet seams, with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed.Apply seam adhesive to cut edges of woven carpet immediately.

B. Apply contact adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by manufacturer. After sufficientopen time, press carpet into adhesive.


C. Apply seam adhesive to the base of the edge glued down. Lay adjoining piece with seamstraight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps.

D. Roll with appropriate roller for complete contact of adhesive to carpet backing.E. Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions.

3.05 INSTALLATION ON STAIRSA. Use one piece of carpet for each tread and the riser below. Apply seam adhesive to all cut

edges.B. Install carpet with pile direction in the length of the stair.C. Adhere carpet tight to stair treads and risers.

3.06 CLEANINGA. Remove excess adhesive from floor and wall surfaces without damage.B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 09 6813-1BIRMINGHAM, AL TILE CARPETINGPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 09 6813TILE CARPETING


A. Carpet tile, fully adhered.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concreteslabs and floors.

B. Section 09 6800 - Carpeting: Broadloom carpet.C. Section 22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties: Plumbing floor cover plate with recess for

carpet.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;2011.

B. CRI (CIS) - Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2009.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of joints.C. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance

characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.D. Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color

selected.E. Submit two, 12 inch long samples of edge strip.F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.G. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,

and suggested schedule for cleaning.H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Carpet Tiles: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed of each color and pattern

installed.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet tile withminimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum three yearsdocumented experience.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS2.02 MATERIALS

A. Carpet Tile : Tufted, manufactured in one color dye lot.2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer.B. Edge Strips: Embossed aluminum, satin natural color.

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 09 6813-2BIRMINGHAM, AL TILE CARPETINGPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

C. Adhesives: Acceptable to carpet tile manufacturer, compatible with materials being adhered:maximum VOC content as requlated by local jurisdiction.


A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type ofwork and are ready to receive carpet tile.

B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding ofadhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces.

C. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooringinstallation by testing for moisture and pH.1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material

manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.D. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and

other defects with sub-floor filler.C. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is

cured.D. Vacuum clean substrate.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.B. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI Carpet Installation

Standard.C. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match.D. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.E. Lay carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building

lines.F. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate.G. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions.H. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces.B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 09 7200-1BIRMINGHAM, AL WALL COVERINGSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 09 7200WALL COVERINGS


A. Surface preparation and prime painting.B. Wall covering .

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM F793 - Standard Classification of Wallcovering by Use Characteristics; 2010a.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on wall covering and adhesive.C. Samples: Submit two samples of wall covering, 24x24 inch (____x____ mm) in size illustrating

color, finish, and texture.D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.E. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of covered surfaces.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products

specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this

section with minimum three years of experience.1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Inspect roll materials at arrival on site, to verify acceptability.B. Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling and cold temperatures.C. Do not store roll goods on end.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature

ranges required by the adhesive or wall covering product manufacturer.B. Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, during, and after installation of adhesive and wall

covering.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 BASE BID MANUFACTURER

A. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Koroseal/RJF International; Product ____: www.koroseal.com.2. MDC Wallcoverings; Product ____: www.mdcwall.com.3. Substitutions: Not permitted.

2.02 MATERIALSA. Wall Covering : Vinyl coated fabric roll stock, conforming to the following:

1. Total Weight: 20 oz/sq yd (_____ g/sq m).2. Roll Width: 54 inches (_____ mm).3. Color: As scheduled on the drawings..

B. Adhesive: Type recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application to substrate.C. Substrate Filler: As recommended by adhesive and wall covering manufacturers; compatible

with substrate.D. Substrate Primer and Sealer: Alkyd enamel type.

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 09 7200-2BIRMINGHAM, AL WALL COVERINGSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014


A. Verify that substrate surfaces are prime painted and ready to receive work, and conform torequirements of the wall covering manufacturer.

B. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply wallcoverings if moisture content of substrate exceeds level recommended by wall coveringmanufacturer.

C. Verify flatness tolerance of surfaces does not vary more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m)nor vary at a rate greater than 1/16 inch/ft (1.5 mm/300 mm).

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Fill cracks in substrate and smooth irregularities with filler; sand smooth.B. Wash impervious surfaces with tetra-sodium phosphate, rinse and neutralize; wipe dry.C. Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,

escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.D. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces that affect work of this section. Remove existing

coatings that exhibit loose surface defects.E. Marks: Seal with shellac those that may bleed through surface finishes.F. Apply one coat of primer sealer to substrate surfaces. Allow to dry. Lightly sand smooth.G. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Apply adhesive and wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Use wall covering in pattern sequence.C. Razor trim edges on flat work table. Do not razor cut on gypsum board surfaces.D. Apply wall covering smooth, without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. Eliminate air pockets and

ensure full bond to substrate surface. Butt edges tightly.E. Horizontal seams are not acceptable.F. Do not seam within 2 inches (50 mm) of internal corners or within 6 inches (150 mm) of external

corners.G. Install wall covering before installation of bases and items attached to or spaced slightly from

wall surface.H. Cover spaces above and below windows, above doors, in pattern sequence from roll.I. Where wall covering tucks into reveals, or metal wallboard or plaster stops, apply with contact

adhesive within 6 inches (150 mm) of wall covering termination. Ensure full contact bond.J. Remove excess adhesive while wet from seam before proceeding to next wall covering sheet.

Wipe clean with dry cloth.3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean wall coverings of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants.B. Reinstall wall plates and accessories removed prior to work of this section.

3.05 PROTECTIONA. Do not permit construction activities at or near finished wall covering areas.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 09 9000-1BIRMINGHAM, AL PAINTING AND COATINGPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 09 9000PAINTING AND COATING


A. Surface preparation.B. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings.C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and

unless otherwise indicated, including the following:1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before

installing equipment.2. Elevator pit ladders.3. Exposed surfaces of steel lintels and ledge angles.4. Mechanical and Electrical:

a. In finished areas, paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated andexposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, andelectrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated.

b. In finished areas, paint shop-primed items.c. On the roof and outdoors, paint all equipment that is exposed to weather or to view,

including that which is factory-finished.d. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that

are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visiblesurfaces.

e. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboardcabinets to match face panels.

D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having

factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of

equipment.5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated.6. Glass.7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items.B. Section 05 5100 - Metal Stairs: Shop-primed items.C. Section 09 9600 - High-Performance Coatings.D. Finish Schedule on the Drawings.

1.03 DEFINITIONSA. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for

Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.B. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications;

2012.C. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and

Wood-Base Materials; 2007.


1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for

each:1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category

(e.g. "alkyd enamel").2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47).3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of

each system.4. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

C. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coatedsurfaces.

D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Paint and Coatings: 1 gallon (4 L) of each color; store where directed.3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified,

with minimum three years documented experience.B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with

minimum three years experience.1.07 MOCK-UP

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.B. Provide panel, 8 feet long by 8 feet wide, illustrating each coating color, texture, and finish.C. Locate where directed.D. Mock-up may remain as part of the work.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand

code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, andinstructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and amaximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer'sinstructions.

1.09 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature

ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of

substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the

humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) for interiors;

50 degrees F (10 degrees C) for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer'sinstructions.

E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F (18 degrees C) forinterior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.


F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles (860 lx) measured mid-height at substrate surface.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the samemanufacturer; no exceptions.

B. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extentpossible.

C. Paints:1. Base Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore Co..2. Duron, Inc: www.duron.com.3. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: www.ppgaf.com.4. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com.5. Porter6. ICI

D. Transparent Finishes:1. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com.

E. Stains:1. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com.

F. Primer Sealers: Same manufacturer as top coats.G. Block Fillers: Same manufacturer as top coats.H. Substitutions: Not permitted.

2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERALA. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.

1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily anduniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated underconditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testingand field experience.

3. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from asingle production run.

4. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedureis specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.

B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, useprimer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.

C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the

following:a. Architectural coatings VOC limits of the State in which the Project is located.

2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water addedat project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics.E. Colors: As indicated on drawings

1. Allow for minimum of three colors for each system, unless otherwise indicated, withoutadditional cost to Owner.

2. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as thewall/ceiling they are mounted on/under.


2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding

materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specificallyindicated or not; commercial quality.

B. Patching Material: Latex filler.C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.


A. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared.B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any

condition that may potentially affect proper application.D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes

unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.2. Plaster and Stucco: 12 percent.3. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.4. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.5. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,

escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate

and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.F. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or

alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodiumphosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corrodingmetals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.

G. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot primedefects after repair.

H. Plaster Surfaces to be Painted: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latexpatching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize highalkali surfaces.

I. Insulated Coverings to be Painted: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton.J. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with

solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.K. Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC-SP 2 (hand tool

cleaning) or SSPC-SP 3 (power tool cleaning) followed by SSPC-SP 1 (solvent cleaning).L. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld

splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand or powertool wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of


phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paintentire surface; spot prime after repairs.

M. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primerand rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces withsolvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.

N. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Sealknots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer hasdried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.

O. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing,seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealerhas dried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25percent with thinner.

P. Exterior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter.Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calkingcompound after prime coat has been applied. Back prime concealed surfaces beforeinstallation.

Q. Exterior Wood to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter; sealknots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calkingcompound after sealer has been applied. Prime concealed surfaces.

R. Wood Doors to be Field-Finished: Seal wood door top and bottom edge surfaces with clearsealer.

S. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.3.03 APPLICATION

A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electricalcomponents and paint separately.

B. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeksafter installation of woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 4 weeks.

C. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.D. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is

applied.E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.F. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many

coats as necessary for complete hide.G. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.H. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior

to applying next coat.I. Wood to Receive Transparent Finishes: Tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain

before set. Wipe excess from surface.J. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed

prior to finishing.3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection.B. Owner will provide field inspection.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and

remove daily from site.


3.06 PROTECTIONA. Protect finished coatings until completion of project.B. Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09911 - PAINT SCHEDULEPraxis3 Architects

Interior Walls

Space Substrate Manufacturer Primer Final Coat(s) Sheen

Showroom Gypsum Board Duron 04-125 Int Latex Sealer Ultra Deluxe Acrylic Latex Low Sheen- 2 coats

Low Sheen, 36 Series

Benjamin Moore 253 Super Spec 286 Super Spec Enamel

Eggshell

Sherwin Williams PrepRite 200 Wall Primer, B28W200

ProMar 200 Latex Wall Paint - 2 coats

Eg-shell, B20-2200

Sales Offices Gypsum Board Duron 04-125 Int Latex Sealer Plastic Kote Acrylic Latex-2 coats

Eggshell, 29 series


Eggshell


Duration Home Latex Wall Paint - 2 coats

Satin - A97 Series

Customer Lounge Gypsum Board Duron 04-125 Int Latex Sealer Plastic Kote Acrylic Latex-2coats

Eggshell, 29 series


Eggshell


Duration Home Latex Wall Paint - 2 coats

Satin - A97 Series

Back of house offices

Gypsum Board Duron 04-125 Int Latex Sealer Ultra Deluxe Acrylic Latex Low Sheen- 2 coats



Eggshell



Eg-shell, B20-2200

Service Drive Gypsum Board Duron 04-125 Int Latex Sealer Tile-Clad HS Epoxy-2 coats

Gloss-B62Z

Benjamin Moore 253 Super Spec m22 Alkyd urethane gloss enamel

Gloss


Tile-Clad HS Epoxy - 2 coats

Gloss - B62Z Series

CMU or Concrete (precast or tilt-up)

Duron 16-110-55 Dura Crete HP Acrylic Block Filler

Tile-Clad HS Epoxy-2 coats

Gloss-B62Z

Benjamin Moore CMU - 285 blockfiller Concrete 068 sealer

m42 waterborne polyamide gloss epoxy

Gloss

Sherwin Williams Heavy Duty Block Filler, B42W46


Gloss - B62Z Series

Parts Department CMU or Concrete (precast or tilt-up)


Tile-Clad HS Epoxy-2 coats

Gloss-B62Z

Benjamin Moore CMU - 285 blockfiller Concrete - 068 sealer


Gloss



Gloss - B62Z Series

Gypsum Board Duron 04-125 Int Latex Sealer Tile-Clad HS Epoxy, 2 coats

Gloss, B62Z

Benjamin Moore 253 Super SpecSherwin Williams PrepRite 200 Wall Primer,

B28W200Tile-Clad HS Epoxy - 2 coats

Gloss - B62Z Series

09911 - 1


Service Shop CMU or Concrete (precast or tilt-up) (Epoxy wainscot)


Tile-Clad HS Epoxy, 2 coats

Gloss, B62Z

Benjamin Moore CMU - blockfiller Concrete- 068 sealer


Gloss

Sherwin Williams Heavy Duty Block Filler, B4246


Gloss - B62Z Series

CMU or Concrete (above epoxy wainscot)


Ultra Deluxe Acrylic Latex Low Sheen- 2 coats


Benjamin Moore CMU - 285 blockfiller Conrete - 068 sealer GWB 253 Super Spec


Gloss



Eg-shell - B20-2200

GWB (above expoxy wainscot)

Duron 04-125 Int Latex Sealer Ultra Deluxe Acrylic Latex Low Sheen- 2 coats


Benjamin Moore 253 Super Spec 309 Impervex Acrylic Enamel

Gloss



Eg-shell - B20-2200

Tech Support Areas

CMU Duron 16-110-55 Dura Crete HP Acrylic Block Filler

Ultra Deluxe Acrylic Latex Low Sheen- 2 coats


Benjamin Moore 285 blockfiller m42 waterborne polyamide gloss epoxy

Gloss



Eg-shell - B20-2200

GWB Duron 04-125 Int Latex Sealer Ultra Deluxe Acrylic Latex Low Sheen- 2 coats


Benjamin Moore 253 Super Spec sealer 309 Impervex Acrylic Enamel

Gloss



Eg-shell - B20-2200

09911 - 2


Interior Ceilings

Showroom Gypsum Board Duron 04-125 Int Latex Sealer Pro Kote Supreme Interior Latex, 2 coats

Flat, 59 Series

Benjamin Moore 253 Super Spec Sealer 286 Super Spec Enamel

Eggshell


ProMar 400 Latex Wall paint - 2 coats

Flat, B30-400 Series

Metal structure, exposed ducts, etc. (Dry Fog)

Duron ProCryl Universal Waterbased Primer, B66-310

Water Based Acrylic Dryfall

Flat, B42 Series

Benjamin Moore MO7 Universal Metal primer

M53 Sweep-up Acrylic Dryfall

Flat

Sherwin Williams ProCryl Universal Waterbased Primer, B66-310 Series


Flat - B42 Series

Shop and Parts Metal structure, exposed ducts, etc. (Dry Fog)

Duron ProCryl Universal Waterbased Primer, B66-310


Flat, B42 Series

Benjamin Moore M07 Universal Metal Primer

M53 Sweep-up Acrylic Dryfall

Flat



Flat - B42 Series

09911 - 3


Exterior

Exterior CMU or Concrete (elastomeric)

Duron 16-110 Dura Crete HP Acrylic Block Filler

80-920 Smooth Maxflex Acrylic High Build Elastomeric Coating

Flat

Benjamin Moore CMU -285 Super Spec Block filler: Concrete 068 Acrylic Primer

055 Moorlastic 100% Acrylic Elastomeric Coating

Low Lustre

Sherwin Williams Loxon Block Surfacer, A24W200

SherLastic Elastomeric -2 coats

Flat - A5 Series

Hollow Metal Frames and Doors

Steel Duron ProCryl Universal Waterbased Primer, B66-310

Dura Clad Pre-Catalyzed (single component) Acrylic Urethane,

Gloss, 902-Series

Benjamin Moore MO7 Universal Metal Primer: -or- M42-70 Waterborne Polyamide Epoxy Primer

M22 Alkyd Urethane Enamel: -or- M73 Waterborne Urethane

High Gloss


Industrial Urethane Enamel - 2 coats

Gloss - B54 Series

Pipe Bollards Steel Duron ProCryl Universal Waterbased Primer, B66-310

Dura Clad Pre-Catalyzed (single component) Acrylic Urethane

Gloss, 902-Series

Benjamin Moore MO7 Universal Metal Primer: -or- M42-70 Waterborne Polyamide Epoxy Primer

M22 Alkyd Urethane Enamel: -or- M73 Waterborne Urethane

High Gloss



Gloss - B54 Series

Steel Detailing Steel Duron 33-010 Dura Clad 50 Alkyd White Primer

Dura Clad Alkyd Gloss Enamel-2 coats

Gloss-12 Series

Benjamin Moore MO6 Alkyd Metal Primer: -or- M42-70 Waterbrone Epoxy Primer

M22 Alkyd Urethane Enamel -or- M73 Waterborne Acrylic Urethane

Gloss

Sherwin Williams Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer, B50Z Series


Gloss - B54 Series

Ceilings Gypsum Board Duron 08-124 Bond N Seal Primer

Ultra Deluxe Exterior 100% Acrylic

Flat, 18-916 Series Satin, 165 Series

Benjamin Moore 023 Fresh Start Acrylic Primer

185 Super Spec 100% Acrylic Paint

Low Lustre

Sherwin Williams A-100 Exterior Latex Primer, B42 Series

A-100 Exterior Latex House Paint - 2 coats

Satin - A82 Series

09911 - 4

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 09 9600-1BIRMINGHAM, AL HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 09 9600HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS


A. High performance coatings.B. Special preparation of surfaces.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2013a.B. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004).C. SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004).D. SSPC-SP 5 - White Metal Blast Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 2007.E. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 2007.F. SSPC-SP 7 - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 2007.G. SSPC-SP 10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 2000 (Ed. 2007).

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data indicating coating materials .C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions

requiring special attention.D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.E. Maintenance Data: Include cleaning procedures and repair and patching techniques.F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. Extra Coating Materials: 1 gallon (4 liters) of each type and color.2. Label each container with manufacturer's name, product number, color number, and room

names and numbers where used.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Maintain one copy of each referenced document that applies to application on site.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.C. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section approved

by manufacturer.1.06 MOCK-UP

A. Provide mock-up, 4 feet long by 4 feet wide, illustrating coating, for each specified coating.B. Locate where directed.C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not install materials when temperature is below 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) or above 90

degrees F (32 degrees C).B. Maintain this temperature range, 24 hours before, during, and 72 hours after installation of

coating.


C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles (860 lx) measured mid-height at substrate surface.D. Restrict traffic from area where coating is being applied or is curing.

1.08 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.


A. High-Performance Coatings:1. Carboline Company: www.carboline.com.2. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: www.ppgaf.com.3. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.protective.sherwin-williams.com/industries.4. Tnemec Company, Inc: www.tnemec.com.5. Substitutions: Not permitted.

2.02 MATERIALSA. Coatings - General: Provide complete multi-coat systems formulated and recommended by

manufacturer for the applications indicated, in the thicknesses indicated; number of coatsspecified does not include primer or filler coat.1. Lead content: Not greater than 0.06 percent by weight of total nonvolatile content.2. Chromium content, as hexavalent chromium, zinc chromate, or strontium chromate:

None.3. Maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) content: As required by applicable

regulations.4. Colors: Selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

B. Epoxy Coating: Two coats, water-based epoxy, gloss finish.C. Urethane Coating: Two coats, two-part, aliphatic moisture-curing polyurethane, gloss finish.D. Epoxy Floor Coating: Two coats, two-part, polyamide epoxy, non-skid finish.E. Masonry Filler: Vehicle and resin compatible with topcoats, Portland cement and sand,

formulated for applied thickness of 30-40 mils (0.8-1.0 mm) .F. Primers: As recommended by coating manufacturer for specific substrate, unless otherwise

specified.G. Shellac: Pure, white type.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the coating

manufacturer. Obtain and follow manufacturer's instructions for examination and testing ofsubstrates.

C. Cementitious Substrates: Do not begin application until substrate has cured 28 days minimumand measured moisture content is not greater than 16 percent.

D. Masonry: Verify masonry joints are struck flush.E. Wood: Do not begin application if substrate has moisture content over 12 percent.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean surfaces of loose foreign matter.B. Remove substances that would bleed through finished coatings. If unremovable, seal surface

with shellac.


C. Remove finish hardware, fixture covers, and accessories and store.D. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent.E. Ferrous Metal:

1. Solvent clean.2. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using power tools

according to SSPC-SP 3.F. Protect adjacent surfaces and materials not receiving coating from spatter and overspray; mask

if necessary to provide adequate protection. Repair damage.3.03 PRIMING

A. Apply primer to all surfaces, unless specifically not required by coating manufacturer. Apply inaccordance with coating manufacturer's instructions.

B. Concrete: Prior to priming, patch with masonry filler to produce smooth surface.C. Concrete Masonry: Apply masonry filler to thickness required to fill holes and produce smooth

surface; minimum thickness of 30 mils (0.8 mm).3.04 COATING APPLICATION

A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, to thicknesses specified.B. Apply in uniform thickness coats, without runs, drips, pinholes, brush marks, or variations in

color, texture, or finish. Finish edges, crevices, corners, and other changes in dimension withfull coating thickness.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and

remove daily from site.B. Clean surfaces immediately of overspray, splatter, and excess material.C. After coating has cured, clean and replace finish hardware, fixtures, and fittings previously

removed.3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished work from damage.END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 10 1101-1BIRMINGHAM, AL VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 10 1101VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS


A. Markerboards.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports.B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Concealed supports in metal stud walls.C. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Finishing of wood frame and chalkrail.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2004.B. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009.C. ASTM A424 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, for Porcelain Enameling; 2009a.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on markerboard and trim.C. Maintenance Data: Include data on regular cleaning, stain removal .

1.05 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide five year warranty for markerboard to include warranty against discoloration due to

cleaning, crazing or cracking, and staining.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Visual Display Boards:1. MooreCo, Inc: www.moorecoinc.com.2. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc: www.claridgeproducts.com.3. Polyvision Corporation (Nelson Adams): www.polyvision.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDSA. Markerboards: Porcelain enamel on steel, laminated to core.

1. Color: White.2. Metal Face Sheet Thickness: 0.024 inch, 24 gage (0.61 mm).3. Core: Particleboard, manufacturer's standard thickness, laminated to face sheet.4. Backing: Aluminum foil, laminated to core.5. Size: As indicated on drawings.6. Frame: Extruded aluminum, with concealed fasteners.7. Frame Finish: Anodized, natural.8. Accessories: Provide chalk tray.

2.03 MATERIALSA. Porcelain Enameled Steel Sheet: ASTM A424, Type I, Commercial Steel, with fired-on vitreous

finish.B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; wood chips, set with waterproof resin binder, sanded faces.C. Foil Backing: Aluminum foil sheet, 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick.

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 10 1101-2BIRMINGHAM, AL VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.B. Verify that internal wall blocking is ready to receive work and positioning dimensions are as

indicated on shop drawings.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install boards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Secure units level and plumb.

3.03 CLEANINGA. Clean board surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Remove temporary protective cover at date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 10 1400-1BIRMINGHAM, AL SIGNAGEPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 10 1400SIGNAGE

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Exit signs required by code.


Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design).B. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and

Facilities; International Code Council; 2009.1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended bymanufacturer.

B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Flat Signs:1. Manufacturer as indicated on the drawings..2. ASI-Modulex, Dallas Texas, (214) 352-9140 if no manufacturer indicated.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONSA. Accessibility Compliance: All signs are required to comply with ADA Standards for Accessible

Design and ANSI/ICC A 117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in theevent of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specificrequirements.

B. Signs as indicated on the drawing door schedule.2.03 SIGN TYPES

A. Flat Signs: Signage media without frame.1. Edges: Square.2. Corners: Square.3. Clear Cover: For customer produced sign media, provide clear cover of polycarbonate

plastic, glossy on back, non-glare on front.4. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Tape adhesive.5. Size: 8 inches x 8 inches by 0.125 inches thick.

B. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated:1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font.2. Character Case: Upper case only.3. Background Color: Solid color selected from manufacturers standard colors..4. Character Color: Selected from manufacturers standard color.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive.

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 10 1400-2BIRMINGHAM, AL SIGNAGEPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014


A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.C. Locate signs where indicated:

1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of sign at 60inches (1525 mm) above finished floor.

2. If no location is indicated obtain Owner's instructions.D. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 10 2113.13-1BIRMINGHAM, AL METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 10 2113.13METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS


A. Metal toilet compartments.B. Urinal screens.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Concealed steel support members.B. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Concealed steel support members.C. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports.D. Section 10 2800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A424 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, for Porcelain Enameling; 2009a.B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.C. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in walls andceilings.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall supports,

door swings.C. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories.D. Samples: Submit two samples of partition panels, 4 x 4 inch (____x____ mm) in size illustrating

panel finish, color, and sheen.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Metal Toilet Compartments:1. General Partitions Mfg. Corp: www.generalpartitions.com.2. Global Steel Products Corp: www.globalpartitions.com.3. Metpar Corp: www.metpar.com.4. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MATERIALSA. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.

2.03 COMPONENTSA. Toilet Compartments: Powder coated steel, floor-mounted unbraced.B. Doors, Panels, and Pilasters: Sheet steel faces, pressure bonded to sound deadening core,

formed and closed edges; corners made with corner clips or mitered, welded, and groundsmooth.1. Panel Faces: 20 gage (0.9 mm).2. Door Faces: 22 gage (0.8 mm).3. Pilaster Faces: 20 gage (0.9 mm).


4. Reinforcement: 12 gage (2.5 mm).C. Door and Panel Dimensions:

1. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm).2. Door Width: 24 inch (610 mm).3. Door Width for Handicapped Use: 36 inch (915 mm), out-swinging.4. Height: 58 inch (1 473 mm).

D. Pilasters: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) thick, of sizes required to suit compartment width and spacing.E. Urinal Screens: Wall mounted with two panel brackets, and floor-to-ceiling vertical upright

consisting of pilaster anchored to floor and ceiling.F. Urinal Screen Splash Panels: Stainless steel sheet 30 inch (760 mm) wide x 42 inch (1 066

mm) high mounted on partitions adjacent to urinals. Fasten with stainless steel screws spaced8 inches (20 mm) on center.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Pilaster Shoes: Formed ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 3 inch (175

mm) high, concealing floor fastenings.1. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with

pilaster.B. Head Rails: Hollow stainless steel tube, 1 x 1-5/8 inch (25 x 41 mm) size, with anti-grip strips

and cast socket wall brackets.C. Brackets: Satin stainless steel.D. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type.

1. For attaching panels and pilasters to brackets: Through-bolts and nuts; tamper proof.E. Hardware: Satin stainless steel:

1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door.2. Thumb turn or sliding door latch with exterior emergency access feature.3. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door

latch.4. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door.5. Provide door pull for outswinging doors.

2.05 FINISHINGA. Stainless Steel Compartments: No. 4 finish.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.C. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures.D. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch (9 to 13 mm) space between wall and panels and between wall and end

pilasters.C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices.D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm).


B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch (3 mm).C. Maximum opening between panels, door or offset from wall is 1/2 inch. Installations exceeding

this will be removed and replaced at the contractors sole expense.3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16inch (5 mm).

B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out swingingdoors to closed position.

C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane.END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 10 2800-1BIRMINGHAM, AL TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIESPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 10 2800TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 09 2116-Gypsum Board Assemblies: Concealed supports for accessories, including inwall framing and plates and above ceiling framing.

B. Section 08 8300 - Mirrors: Other mirrors.C. Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Ceramic washroom accessories.D. Section 10 2113.13 - Metal Toilet Compartments.


Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design).B. ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel

Tubing for General Service; 2013.C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.D. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.E. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1.F. ASTM C1503 - Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror; 2008 (Reapproved 2013).G. ASTM F2285 - Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Diaper Changing

Tables for Commercial Use; 2004 (Reapproved 2010).1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceilingsupports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function,

attachment methods.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products listed are made by Bobrick Washroom equipment, Inc.: www.bobrick.com.B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. A & J Washroom Accessories Inc: www.ajwashroom.com.2. American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com.3. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com.4. Substitutions: Not permitted.

C. All items of each type to be made by the same manufacturer.2.02 MATERIALS

A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged completewith anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.1. Grind welded joints smooth.2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 10 2800-2BIRMINGHAM, AL TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIESPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

B. Keys: Provide two keys for each accessory to Owner; master key all lockable accessories.C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, Type 304 or 316.E. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with

G90/Z275 coating.F. Mirror Glass: Float glass, ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, protective

and physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503.G. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof.H. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof, security type.I. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for

component and substrate.2.03 FINISHES

A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted.B. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.

2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIESA. As indicated on the Toilet Accessories Schedules in the drawings.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions in locations indicated on the

drawings.B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.C. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated.D. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as indicated on

drawingsEND OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 10 4400-1BIRMINGHAM, AL FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIESPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 10 4400FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES


A. Fire extinguishers.B. Fire extinguisher cabinets.C. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.B. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013.B. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current

edition.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions.C. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features.D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.E. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher

ingredients.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fire Extinguishers:1. Ansul, a Tyco Business; Cleanguard: www.ansul.com.2. Pyro-Chem, a Tyco Business; Product ____: www.pyrochem.com.

B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories:1. Basis of Design:

a. Larsens Manufacturing Co.; Product: Aluminum 2409-R2, Vertical Duo, Vertical whitelettering.

2. Acceptable manufacturers:a. Ansul, a Tyco Business; Product ____: www.ansul.com.b. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com.c. Potter-Roemer: www.potterroemer.com.d. Pyro-Chem, a Tyco Business; Product ____: www.pyrochem.com.e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERSA. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable

codes, whichever is more stringent.B. Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gage.

1. Class: A:B:C.2. Size: 10 pound (4.54 kg).3. Finish: Baked polyester powder coat, red color.

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 10 4400-2BIRMINGHAM, AL FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIESPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETSA. Metal: Formed aluminum; ____ inch (.05 mm) thick.B. Cabinet Configuration: Recessed or semi-recessed at finished steel stud framed walls with

finished ceiling and floor.C. Cabinet Configuration: Surface mounted at finshed spaces with CMU walls.D. Bracket mounted: Parts and Storage spaces.

1. Sized to accommodate accessories.2. Trim: Flat, 1 1/2 inch wide face.3. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form perimeter trim

and door stiles.E. Door: 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch. Hinge doors for 180

degree opening with two butt hinge. Provide nylon catch.F. Door Glazing: Glass, clear, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick tempered. Set in resilient channel gasket

glazing.G. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors.H. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.I. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Anodized to color as selected.J. Finish of Cabinet Interior: Anodized aluminum..

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, chrome-plated.B. Cabinet Signage: Letters "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in white vinyl, self adhering, pre-spaced

lettering, mounted vertically on glass and rotated 90 degrees to the space floor..PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Secure rigidly in place.C. Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets prior to Substantial Completon inspection.

Include tag indicating acceptable charge pressure, charge date and service agent.END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 10 5100-1BIRMINGHAM, AL LOCKERSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 10 5100LOCKERS


A. Solid plastic lockers.B. Locker benches.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete base construction.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on locker construction, sizes and accessories.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locker plan layout, numbering plan and color selection chart.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect locker finish and adjacent surfaces from damage.


A. Solid Plastic Lockers:2.02 LOCKER APPLICATIONS

A. Student Lockers: Single tier solid plastic (HDPE) lockers, recessed mounted.1. Width: 12 inches (300 mm).2. Depth: 18 inches (450 mm).3. Height: 72 inches (1,830 m).4. Fittings: Hat shelf, 2 coat hooks.5. Locking: Padlock hasps, for padlocks provided by Owner.6. Provide sloped top.

B. Locker Benches: Stationary type; bench top of laminated birch; painted steel pedestals.1. Height: 18" 2. Length: As indicated on the drawings.

2.03 SOLID PLASTIC LOCKERSA. Lockers: Factory assembled, made of high density polyethylene (HDPE) panels, homogenous

color throughout, with mortise and tenon joints with stainless steel fasteners or heat fused joints.1. Doors: Full overlay without frame.2. Ventilation: By open space between the back of the door and locker body.3. Door Color: To be selected by Architect.4. Body Color: Manufacturer's standard white or light color.

B. Component Thicknesses:1. Doors: 1/2 inch (13 mm) minimum thickness.

C. Solid Plastic Panels: High Density polyethylene (HDPE) formed under high pressure into solidplastic components.

D. Hinges: Full height of locker, manufacturer's standard heavy duty type.E. Locks: Locker manufacturer's standard type of style indicated above.


A. Verify that prepared bases are in correct position and configuration.

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 10 5100-2BIRMINGHAM, AL LOCKERSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

B. Verify bases and embedded anchors are properly sized.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Install lockers plumb and square.C. Place and secure on prepared base.D. Secure lockers with anchor devices to suit substrate materials. Minimum Pullout Force: 100 lb

(445 N).E. Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation.F. Install end panels, filler panels, and sloped tops.G. Install accessories.H. Replace components that do not operate smoothly.

3.03 CLEANINGA. Clean locker interiors and exterior surfaces.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 12 2113-1BIRMINGHAM, AL HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 12 2113HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS


A. Horizontal slat louver blinds.B. Operating hardware.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood blocking for attachment of headrail

brackets.1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. WCMA A100.1 - Safety of Corded Window Covering Products; Window CoveringManufacturers Association; 2012. (ANSI/WCMA A101.1)

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordinate the placement of concealed blocking to support blinds.

1.05 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics.C. Samples: Submit two samples, ____ inch (____ mm) long illustrating slat materials and finish,

cord type and color.D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Blind Assemblies: One of each size.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Horizontal Louver Blinds:1. Hunter Douglas; ____: www.hunterdouglas.com.2. Levolor Contract; ____: www.levolorcontract.com.3. SWFcontract, a division of Spring Window Fashions, LLC.; ____: www.swfcontract.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 BLINDS AND BLIND COMPONENTSA. Blinds: Horizontal slat louvers hung from full-width headrail with full-width bottom rail; manual

control of raising and lowering by cord with full range locking; blade angle adjustable by controlwand; complying with WCMA A100.1.

B. Metal Slats: Spring tempered pre-finished aluminum; radiused slat corners, with manufacturingburrs removed.1. Width: 1 inch (___ mm).2. Thickness:.008 inch (____ mm).3. Color: As selected.

C. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene cord, ladder configuration.D. Head Rail: Pre-finished, formed aluminum box, with end caps; internally fitted with hardware,

pulleys, and bearings for operation; same depth as width of slats

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 12 2113-2BIRMINGHAM, AL HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

1. Color: Same as slats .E. Bottom Rail: Pre-finished, formed steel with top side shaped to match slat curvature; with end

caps. Color: Same as headrail.F. Lift Cord: Braided nylon; continuous loop.

1. Free end weighted.G. Control Wand: Extruded hollow plastic; hexagonal shape.

1. Removable type.2. Length of window opening height less 3 inches (75 mm).3. Color: As selected .

H. Headrail Attachment: Wall brackets.I. Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer.

2.03 FABRICATIONA. Determine sizes by field measurement.B. Fabricate blinds to fit within openings with uniform edge clearance of 1/4 inch (____ mm).


A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work.B. Ensure structural blocking and supports are correctly placed.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Secure in place with flush countersunk fasteners.

3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch (6 mm).B. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust blinds for smooth operation.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Clean blind surfaces just prior to occupancy.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 12 2492-1BIRMINGHAM, AL MOTORIZED ROLLER SHADESPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 12 2492MOTORIZED ROLLER SHADES

PART 1 - GENERAL1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes1. Motor operated Roller Shades

B. Related work includes the following:1. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry2. Section 08520: Aluminum Windows

1.02 REFERENCESA. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 701B. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 302 Flammability of Interior

MaterialsC. California Administrative Code Title 19D. Federal Standard 191 Method 5903 (used by Port Authority of New York and New Jersey for

drapery, curtain, and upholstery material)E. Boston Fire Department Teat BFD IX-1F. New York State Uniform Fire Prevention and Building Code

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Subject under provisions of Section 01330 - Submittal ProceduresB. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets shall be submitted for each product specified,

including:,1. Preparation instructions and recommendations2. Finishes, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components3. Construction and installation instructions4. Manufacturers recommendations for maintenance and cleaning

C. Drawings and Diagrams: Product details, installation details, working and assembly drawingsshall be supplied as requested.

D. Sample: Responsible contracting officer or agent shall supply one sample shade of each typespecified in this contract for approval. Supplied units shall be furnished complete with allrequired components, mounting and associated hardware, instructions and warranty.

E. Electric shade motors shall comply with UL standards. Copy of compliance available forsubmission upon request.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Supplier: Manufacturer, subsidiary or licensed agent shall be approved to supply the products

specified, and to honor any claims against product presented in accordance with warranty.B. Installer: Installer or agent shall be qualified to install specified products by prior experience,

demonstrated performance and acceptance of requirements of manufacturer, subsidiary, orlicensed agent. Installer shall be responsible for an acceptable installation.

C. Uniformity: Provide Manual Roller Shades of only one manufacturer for entire project.D. Mock up: Provide (1) mock-up shade for each roller shade type/assembly specified.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGA. Product shall be delivered to site in manufacturer’s original packaging.B. Product shall be handled and stored to prevent damage to materials, finishes and operating

mechanisms.


1.06 JOB CONDITIONSA. Prior to shade installation, building shall be enclosed.B. Interior temperature shall be maintained between 60° F. and 90° F. during and after installation;

relative humidity shall not exceed 80%. Wet work shall be complete and dry.1.07 WARRANTY

A. Lifetime Limited Warranty. Fabrics warranted for 5 years. Specific product warranties availablefrom manufacturer or its authorized agent.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

A. Hunter Douglas Contract/ 12250 Parkway Centre Dr. / Poway, CA 92064/ Phone: 800-727-8953Fax: 800-205-9819/ Website: www.hunterdouglascontract.com<http://www.hunterdouglascontract.com/>, or architect approved equivalent. Contact thefollowing for project assistance and dealer referral @ 800-964-2580: (Mideast/Midwest) KeithBurgess ext. #827311, (Southern/Central) Christopher Hagen ext. #827312,(Western/Mountain/Upper Midwest) David Cover ext. #827313, (Northeast) Patrick LeClair ext.#827314, (Southwest) Matthew Craven ext. #827317

B. Request for substitutions must be approved by architect minimum of 30 days prior to close ofbid.

2.02 MOTORIZED ROLLER SHADESA. PRODUCT: Hunter Douglas Contract “RB 500 Motorized Roller Shades”B. MATERIALS:

1. FABRICS: Inherently anti-static, flame retardant, fade and stain resistant, light filtering,room darkening, & blackout fabrics providing 0% - 14% openness factors. Fabric weightsto range between 6.00 oz/sq.yd. - 20.70 oz/sq.yd., containing fiberglass, PVC, polyester,acrylic, vinyl laminates, cotton, & vinyl coatings. Finish selected by architect frommanufacturer’s available contract colors.

2. ROLLER SHADE MOTORS: Design of shade motors is based on the WhisperHDC100RQ and HDC200RQ control system manufactured by Hunter Douglas ContractWindow Coverings.a. MOTORS:

1) Tubular, asynchronous (non-synchronous) motors with a 3 conductor keyed ACpower plug at the motor head that can be detached at the motor head assemblydirectly. Concealed inside roller shade tube. Quiet operation of up to 44dBawithin 3’.

2) Intelligent AC motor 115 VAC, 50-60 Hz, thermally protected, lifetime lubricated,equipped with an internal thermal overload protector. Maximum current draw notto exceed 0.9 amps when operating up to an overall width of 156”, or amaximum current of 1.8 amps when operating 156”+ overall width.

3) Provide the ability to set limit stop positioning (maximum up/down limits) through3 clear buttons with internal LED’s.

4) Use motors rated at the same nominal speed for all rollershades in the sameroom.

5) Total hanging weight of shade band shall not exceed 80 percent of the ratedlifting capacity of 6Nm when operating up to 156” overall width, and 12Nm whenoperating 156”+ overall width.

6) Motors must include an embedded Motor Control System without requiring anyexternal motor logic control system outside of the motor assembly unit itself.

b. KEYPAD/LOCAL USER OVERRIDE:1) Allow for keypad switch control for up to 24 buttons connected directly to the

Whisper RQ motor assembly to allocate for individual and group control, with up


to four intermediate stop positions. When utilizing intermediate stop positions, allshades in the same room must be able to perfectly align with each other alongthose programmed intermediate stops.

2) Connect local wall switches/keypads directly to the motor assembly itself via alow voltage (DC) CAT5/RJ25 cable. A low voltage (DC) splitter is used toconnect the keypad to the motor, and to allow for communication/directconnection to adjacent motors in the same network.

3) Controls shall be Master and Subgroup switching for all three elevations, asindicated in Contract Documents.

c. CONTROL SYSTEMS:1) Design of motor control system is based on the Whisper RQ control system

manufactured by Hunter Douglas Contract Window Coverings, or equal.3. Motor Control System:

a. Must be integrated into the motor unit itself. External motor control systems thatrequire “home run” 110v line voltage will not be accepted.

b. Motor Control System must provide bidirectional feedback, allowing for two-waycommunication between the motor with embedded internal motor control system andit’s point of communication.

c. Motor control system allows for backward compatibility to allow for the add-on ofbuilding automation system integration, audio-visual systems, third party light controlsystems, light sensors, Radio Frequency and Infrared Remote operation, all throughmeans of plugging into the splitter via a low voltage (DC) CAT6/RJ25 plug-in.

d. Allow for up to 100 Whisper RQ Motors to be networked together to allow for mastergroup controlling or integration with third-party light control and building automationsystems.

e. Allow for up to four intermediate stop positioning via the keypad/local-user override, orup to 98 intermediate stop positioning if accepting commands via serial input(computer, third party light control systems, or automation systems)

f. Allow for operation of all motors via a computer on the GUI PRO system..g. Reconfiguration of switch shall not require rewiring of the hardwired line voltage motor

power supply wiring, or the low voltage control wiring. Reconfiguration of switchgroups shall be accomplished within the motor control device (Whisper RQ withembedded internal motor control system)

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. DUAL ROLLER SHADES: Universal mount steel brackets with 2 separate solar and room

darkening blackout roller shades operating independently of each other.B. ROLLER TUBE: Circular-shaped aluminum tube extruded from alloy and temper 6063 T-6.

2”outside diameter extruded tube to have a .063” wall thickness (2.5” outside diameter to have a.079” wall thickness). Heavily reinforced with minimum six internal ribs providing additionaltensile strength and allows for secure placement of clutch & end plug.

C. HEAVY DUTY TUBE BEARING PLUG: Die cast metal and reinforced idler assembly containingspring loaded end plug with positive locking wheel allows for up to 7/8” adjustment and providesfor a secure installation and removal of shade. Locking tube bearing plug contains minimum 6ribs and inserted a minimum of 2-3/8” into roller tube.

D. BOTTOM BAR: Extruded aluminum weight in a Sealed Pocket Hem Bar, or RB Bottom Bar forfabrics that are not seamable. Bottom bar is for tracking adjustments and provides uniform look.

E. MOUNTING HARDWARE: Manufacturer’s standard heavy duty bracket constructed ofhardened 1/8” thick steel to support full weight of shade with bracket & screw hole covers toprovide uniform look. Integrated leveling device for enhanced level adjustment of overall shade.Locking mechanism on bracket adapter provides for a secure installation and removal of theshade.


F. FASCIA: L shape removable aluminum extrusion valance that attaches to brackets andconceals roller shade.

G. ROLLER SHADE POCKET: Extruded aluminum alloy U shape housing for recessed mountingin acoustical tile or drywall ceilings. 5.25” (or 9”) in diameter with aluminum closure mount.

H. BLOCKOUT SYSTEM: Extruded aluminum side channel with concealed mounting brackets.Bottom bar with nylon wool pile to prevent light leakage.

I. ADDITIONAL AVAILABLE OPTIONS: RB500 Bottom Bar, Reverse Roll, Detachable Spline,Internal Auto Stop Mechanism, Coupled and Banded

2.04 FABRICATIONA. Shade measurements shall be accurate to within + 1/8” or as recommended in writing by

manufacturer.2.05 FABRICS

A. FABRIC selection from the following: (0% Openness) Avila Twilight, Edessa Twilight, GenevaTwilight, Flocke, Morocco, Pima, Sheerweave 7000, Sheerweave 7100, Sheerweave 7300 (1%Openness) GlacierScreen HD2001, GreenScreen Revive 1%, E Screen 7501,Vizela,Sheerweave 7350, Sheerweave 2701, Sheerweave 4800 (3% Openness) GlacierScreenHD1003, GlacierScreen HD2003, GreenScreen Eco, GreenScreen Revive 3%, T Screen, EScreen 7503, E Screen 7703 KoolBlack, M Screen 8503, T Screen, Sheerweave 2410,Sheerweave 2410 Performance +, Infinity2, Sheerweave 2703, Sheerweave 4400, Sheerweave4600, Sheerweave 4650, (4% Openness) Star 2115 (5% Openness) GlacierScreen HD1005, EScreen 7505, E Screen 7705 KoolBlack, Cortina, Satine, M Screen 8505, M Screen Deco,SilverScreen, Sheerweave 2000, Sheerweave 2390, Sheerweave 2390 Performance +,Sheerweave 2705, Sheerweave 4000, Sheerweave 4500, Sheerweave 4550, Sheerweave4700, Sheerweave 5000, (7% Openness) Siena (10% Openness) GlacierScreen HD1010, EScreen 7510, Vienne, New Orleans, Sheerweave 2100, Sheerweave 2360, Sheerweave 2710,Sheerweave 4100 (12% Openness) Natte (14% Openness) A Screen, Sheerweave 3000.

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 INSPECTION:

A. SUBCONTRACTOR shall be responsible for inspection on site, approval of mounting surfaces,installation conditions and field measurement for this work.

B. OTHER INTERACTING TRADES shall receive drawings of shade systems, dimensions,assembly and installation methods from subcontractor upon request.

3.02 INSTALLATION:A. INSTALLATION shall comply with manufacturer’s specifications, standards and procedures as

detailed on contract drawings.B. ADEQUATE CLEARANCE shall be provided to permit unencumbered operation of shade and

hardware.C. CLEAN finish installation of dirt and finger marks. Leave work area clean and free of debris.

3.03 DEMONSTRATION:A. Demonstrate operation method and instruct owner’s personnel in the proper operation and

maintenance of the roller shades.3.04 SCHEDULE:

A. EXTERIOR WINDOWS:B. INTERIOR RELIGHTS:

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 12 3600-1BIRMINGHAM, AL COUNTERTOPSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 12 3600COUNTERTOPS


A. Countertops for architectural cabinetwork.B. Countertops for manufactured casework.C. Wall-hung counters and vanity tops.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework.B. Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures: Sinks.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ANSI A161.2 - Performance Standards for Fabricated High Pressure Decorative Laminate

Countertops; 1998.B. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use;

2009.C. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2013a.E. AWI (QCP) - Quality Certification Program, www.awiqcp.org; current edition at www.awiqcp.org.F. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.G. ISFA-2 - Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; International Solid Surface

Fabricators Association; 2001 (2013).H. MIA (DSDM) - Dimensional Stone Design Manual; VII, 2007.I. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.J. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.K. WI (CCP) - Certified Compliance Program (CCP); current edition at

www.woodworkinstitute.com/certification.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.3. Specimen warranty.

C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings ofcabinets and casework specified in other sections.

D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer'sfull range of available colors and patterns.

E. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements.F. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and

repair of countertop surfaces.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Same fabricator as for cabinets on which tops are to be installed.B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator.


1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,

in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limitsrecommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products underenvironmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES

A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural WoodworkStandards.

B. Plastic Laminate Countertops: High pressure decorative laminate sheet bonded to substrate.1. Laminate Sheet, Unless Otherwise Indicated: NEMA LD 3 Grade HGS, 0.048 inch (HGS,

1.2 mm) nominal thickness.a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450,

maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.b. NSF approved for food contact.c. Wear Resistance: In addition to specified grade, comply with NEMA LD 3 High Wear

Grade requirements for wear resistance.d. Laminate Core Color: Same as decorative surface.e. Finish: Matte or suede, gloss rating of 5 to 20.f. Surface Color and Pattern: As indicated on drawings.g. Manufacturers:

1) Formica Corporation : www.formica.com.2) Lamin-Art, Inc : www.laminart.com.3) Panolam Industries International, Inc\Nevamar : www.nevamar.com.4) Panolam Industries International, Inc\Pionite : www.pionitelaminates.com.5) Wilsonart International, Inc : www.wilsonart.com.6) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2. Exposed Edge Treatment: Square, substrate built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch (32 mm)thick; covered with matching laminate.

3. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction.4. Fabricate in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Quality Standards Illustrated Custom Grade.

C. Solid Surfacing Countertops: Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuoussubstrate.1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 1/2 inch (12 mm), minimum.2. Solid Surfacing Sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Complying with ISFA-2 and NEMA LD

3; acrylic or polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous andcapable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surfacecoating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness.a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450,

maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.b. NSF approved for food contact.c. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss rating of 5 to 20.d. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.e. Manufacturers:

1) Dupont : www.corian.com.2) Formica Corporation : www.formica.com.3) Avonite Surfaces : www.avonitesurfaces.com.


4) Wilsonart International, Inc : www.wilsonart.com.5) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

3. Other Components Thickness: 1/2 inch (12 mm), minimum.4. Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) thick; square edge;

use marine edge at sinks.5. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches (102 mm)

high.6. Skirts: As indicated on drawings.

D. Stainless Steel Countertops: ASTM A666 Type 304 stainless steel sheet; 16 gage, 0.06 inch(1.5 mm) nominal sheet thickness.1. Finish: 4B satin brushed finish.2. Exposed Edge Shape: Straight turndown with return; 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) high face, 1/2

inch (12 mm) return to face of case; reinforced with hardwood or steel.3. Back and End Splashes: Same material; welded 1/4 inch (6 mm) radius coved joint to

countertop; square top edge with 1 inch (25 mm) wide top surface and minimum 1/2 inch(12 mm) turndown;

4. Splash Dimensions: 4 inch (100 mm) high by 1 inch (25 mm) thick, unless otherwiseindicated.

2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade, A-C veneer grade, minimum 5-ply;

minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick; join lengths using metal splines.B. Medium Density Fiberboard for Supporting Substrate: ANSI A208.2.C. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of

materials being joined.D. Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, white.

2.03 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.

1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch (25 mm) except where top butts

against cabinet or wall.3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or

unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes.B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise

indicated.1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof

glue.2. Height: 4 inches (102 mm), unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches (3657 mm) long in one piece; join pieces withadhesive sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.

D. Stainless Steel: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches (3657 mm) long in one piece including nosingsand back and end splashes; accurately fitted mechanical field joints in lengths over thatdimension are permitted.1. Weld joints; grind smooth and polish to match.2. Provide stainless steel hat channel stiffeners, welded or soldered to underside, where

indicated on drawings.3. Provide wall clips for support of back/end splash turndowns.4. Sound Deadening: Apply water resistant, fire resistant sound deadening mastic to entire

bottom surface.E. Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, brackets, and braces as indicated on drawings,

finished to match.




preparation before proceeding.C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets

are installed in proper locations.3.02 PREPARATION


result for the substrate under the project conditions.3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level;shim where required.

B. Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate boardof 5/8 inch (16 mm).

C. Attach stainless steel countertops using stainless steel fasteners and clips.D. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.

3.04 TOLERANCESA. Variation From Horizontal: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), maximum.B. Offset From Wall, Countertops: 1/8 inch (3 mm) maximum; 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) minimum.C. Field Joints: ___ inch (1/32 mm) wide, maximum.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.

3.06 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed products until completion of project.B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 12 4840-1BIRMINGHAM, AL FOOT GRID ENTRANCE SYSTEMSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 12 4840FOOT GRID ENTRANCE SYSTEMS


A. Section includes: [Entrance matting systems, including recessed and surface mountedaluminum foot grids]

B. Related Sections: Section(s) related to this section include:C. 1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.D. 2. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames.E. 3. Section 08212 - Stile and Rail Wood Doors.F. 4. Section 08710 - Door Hardware.

1.02 REFERENCESA. Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this

specification section to extent indicated. The Standards listed here are identified with adesignation number, title or other designation established by the issuing authority.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):C. ASTM D2047 Coefficient of Friction (James Method)

1. ASTM E648 Critical Radiant Flux2. ASTM B117 Product Corrosion to Salt3. LEED-NC version 3

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONA. Performance Requirements: Provide [recessed aluminum entrance floor mat system], which

has been manufactured and installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturerwithout defects, damage or failure.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and

Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.B. Product data: Submit product data, including manufacturer's specification sheet and installation

instructions for specified products. Include methods of installation and substrate preparation foreach type of substrate.

C. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components,including anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures.

D. Samples: Submit samples for each type and color of exposed entrance mat, frames andaccessories required. Provide sample of mat materials.

E. Quality Assurance Submittals: (1) Certified test reports showing compliance with specifiedperformance characteristics and physical properties, and (2) Manufacturer’s InstallationInstructions.

F. Closeout Submittals: (1) Cleaning & Maintenance Data (Include methods for maintaininginstalled products and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental tofinishes and performance), and (2) Warranty.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer: Installer should be highly experienced in performing work of this section, having

previously done work similar to that required for this project.1.06 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING

A. Ordering: Comply with Manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements toavoid construction delays.


B. Delivery: Deliver materials in Manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged packaging.C. Storage: Store materials at temperature and in humidity conditions recommended by

manufacturer and protect from exposure to harmful weather conditions.D. Installation: Except as otherwise indicated herein, sequencing or scheduling for performance of

work of this section in relation with other work is Contractor's option. Delay installation of matsuntil near time of substantial completion for the project.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Temperature: Maintain temperature where products will be installed before, during and after

installation as recommended by Manufacturer.B. Field Measurements: Where possible, verify actual measurements by field measuring before

fabrication and include measurements in shop drawings. To avoid construction delays,coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule based upon construction progress.


A. Provide Nuway® foot grille by Mats Inc., PO Box 839, 37 Shuman Avenue, Stoughton, MA,02072; telephone 800-628-7462 or 781-344-1536; fax 781-344-1537; www.matsinc.com<http://www.matsinc.com>.

B. Forbo Flooring SystemsC. Amarco Products

2.02 MATERIALS2.03 RECESSED ALUMINUM FOOT GRILLE MATERIALS

A. Recessed Aluminum Foot Grid: Nuway® Tuftiguard Plain with unbuffed rubber wiper strips withaluminum extrusion only.

B. Recessed Aluminum Foot Grid: Nuway® Tuftiguard Design with choice of colored buffed rubberwiper strips with aluminum scraper bars.

C. Options for Recessed Aluminum Foot Grid:1. Thickness [7/16”] [11/16”] [linear mats].2. Wiper Strip Colors: Charcoal selected from manufacturer’s standard colors of buffed

fibered reinforced rubber strip.3. Scraper Bar Colors: Aluminum4. Construction: Closed5. Frame type: [Ramp frame 7/16 inch depth only] [Schluter frame - 7/16] [Deep frame 1 inch

depth]6. Fabrication for Recessed Aluminum Foot Grids and framing will have the following

characteristics:a. Size: Fabricate entrance mats as units, but do not exceed manufacturer’s size

recommendation.b. Joints: Where joints in the entrance mats are necessary space them symmetrically

and away from normal traffic ways.c. Entrance Mats with Curved Perimeter: Provide full size templates to the manufacturer

to ensure accurate fabrication.1) Mats Frames: Fabricate frames in single lengths. Where frame dimensions

exceed maximum available lengths, use minimum number of pieces possiblewith hairline joints equally spaced.

2) Corners: Miter corners.3) Protective Coating: Coat surface off frame, which will contact cementitious

material with zinc chromate primer conforming to SAE AMS 3110F.4) Surface Mounted Frames: Mats Inc. matting systems standard ramp surface

frame, drill and counter sunk to receive floor-fixing screws.


7. Testing and Standardsa. ASTM D2047 Coefficient of Friction (James Method): 0.79b. ASTM E648 Critical Radiant Flux: Class 1c. ASTM B117 Product Corrosion to Salt: Able to sustain 100 hours of salt fog without

any notable changesd. LEED-NC version 3

1) IEQ Credit 5: Nuway is designed for permanent installation.2) MR Credit 4: 8.73% pre-consumer and 26.19% post-consumer recycled for

Standard Nuway Model (12mm, Classic, closed construction, charcoal wiperstrips with aluminum scraper bars)

3) MR Credit 4: 4.19% - 8.73% pre-consumer and 12.56% - 26.19% post-consumerrecycled for all other models with aluminum scraper bars.

4) MR Credit 5: Project may be located within 500 miles of the manufacturingfacility.

5) Rolling load Standard Model (12mm, Classic, closed construction, charcoalwiper strips with aluminum scraper bars): 1,000 lbs/wheel

2.04 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONSA. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions where floor mats will be installed. Do not proceed withinstallation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Sub floor shall be clean and dry, andwithin acceptable tolerances.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Sizes: Shop-fabricate units of floor mat to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated. Where

not indicated otherwise, provide single unit for each mat installation, but do not exceedmanufacturer's maximum size recommendation for units intended for removal and cleaning.Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes.Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner unitswithout joints. Where possible, verify sizes by field measurement before shop fabrication.

B. Accessories: Where indicated for recessed or wall-to-wall applications, provide aluminumframework as recommended by manufacturer General: Strictly comply with manufacturer’sinstallation instructions and recommendations. Coordinate installation with adjacent work toensure proper clearances and to prevent tripping hazards.

3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA. General Cleaning: Refer to Manufacturer’s Cleaning and Maintenance Instructions.B. Owner’s Personnel: Instruct Owner’s personnel in proper maintenance procedures.C. Protection: Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction and

until acceptance.END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 14 2400-1BIRMINGHAM, AL HYDRAULIC ELEVATORSPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 14 2400HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS


A. A. This Section specifies hydraulic elevators.B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section and are

performed by other trades.1. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: protection of floor

openings and personnel barriers; temporary power and lighting.2. Section 02200 - Earthwork: excavation for cylinder well casing.3. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: elevator pit, elevator motor and pump foundation,

and grouting thresholds.4. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: masonry hoistway enclosure, building-in and grouting

hoistway door frames, grouting thresholds.5. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: pit ladder, divider beams, support for entrances and

rails, and hoisting beam at top of hoistway.6. Section 07145 - Cementitious Waterproofing: waterproofing of elevator pit.7. Section 15500 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning: ventilation and temperature

control of elevator equipment room.8. Section 16100 - Electrical: electrical service to main disconnect in elevator machine room;

electrical power for elevator installation and testing; electrical-disconnecting device toelevator equipment prior to activation of sprinkler system; electrical service for machineroom; machine room and pit receptacles with ground-fault current protection; lighting inmachine room and pit; wiring for telephone service to machine room.

9. Section 16720 - Fire Alarm Systems: fire and smoke detectors and interconnectingdevices; fire alarm signal lines to contacts in the machine room.

10. Section 16740 - Telephone Systems: ADAAG-required emergency communicationsequipment.

1.02 REFERENCESA. Comply with applicable building codes and elevator codes at the project site, including but not

limited to the following:1. ANSI A117.1, Buildings and Facilities, Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically

Handicapped People2. ADAAG, Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines3. ANSI/NFPA 70, National Electrical Code4. ANSI/NFPA 80, Fire Doors and Windows5. ASME/ANSI A17.1, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators6. ANSI/UL 10B, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies7. Applicable Building Codes8. All other local applicable codes

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:A. Performance Requirements and General Characteristics:

1. Type: Twin hydraulic plungers.2. Quantity of Elevators: 13. Number of Stops: See drawings4. Number of Openings: See drawings.5. Rise: See drawings6. Rated Load: 2500lbs7. Rated Speed: 100 feet per minute8. Car Dimensions (inside): 6' 8" wide x 4' 3" deep9. Cab height: 8' 0"


10. Hoistway Dimensions: 8' 4" wide x 5' 9" deep11. Entrance Dimensions: 3' 6" X 7' 0"12. Entrance Type: Single slide13. Stopping Accuracy: +/- 1/4" (6.4 mm) under any loading condition or direction of travel.14. Main Power Supply: 480 Volts +/- 5% of normal, 3 Phase, with a separate

equipment-grounding conductor.15. Lighting Power Supply: 120 Volts, 1 Phase, 15 Amp, 60 Hz.

B. Simplex Collective Operation: Using a microprocessor-based controller, operation shall beautomatic by means of the car and hall buttons. If all calls in the system have been answered,the car shall park at the last landing served.

C. Operating Features:1. Full Collective Operation2. Single Speed Fan3. On/Off Light Switch4. Solid State Starting5. Remote elevator monitoring REM(r) ready6. Firefighters' Service Phase I & II7. Top of Car Inspection8. Car-Stall Protection

D. Additional Features1. Description Emergency return unitA battery-powered emergency return unit shall be

provided so that in the event of a power outage the unit will return the car to the lowestdesignated landing, open the doors and shut down.

E. Door Control Features:1. Closed Loop Door Operator is a closed loop, microprocessor based door operator system.

The door operator will facilitate smooth operation under varying environmental influencessuch as, temperature, wind, friction, and component variation. The processor will monitorthe door's actual position and velocity compared to its desired position and velocity. Ifvariations are detected in the profile the command will be automatically corrected. TheClosed Loop Door Operator control system shall not require machine room door controlequipment.

2. Door noise not to exceed 58dBA.3. Door control to open doors automatically when car arrives at a landing in response to a

normal hall or car call.a. Elevator doors shall be provided with a reopening device that will stop and reopen the

car door(s) and hoistway door(s) automatically should the door(s) become obstructedby an object or person.

b. Primary door protection shall consist of a two dimensional, multi-beam arrayprojecting across the car door opening. Under normal operation and for any doorposition, the system shall detect as a blockage an opaque object that is equal to orgreater than 1.3 inches (33 mm) in diameter when inserted between the car doors atvertical positions from within 1 inch (25 mm) above the sill to 71 inches (1800 mm)above the sill. Under degraded conditions (one or more blocked or failed beams), theprimary protection shall detect opaque objects that are equal to or greater than 4inches (100 mm) in diameter for the same vertical coverage. If the systemperformance is degraded to the point that the 4 inch object cannot be detected, thesystem shall maintain the doors open or permit closing only under nudging forceconditions.

c. The door reopening device shall also include a secondary, three dimensional,triangular infrared multi-beam array projecting across the door opening and extendinginto the hoistway door zone. The door opening device will cause the doors to reopenwhen it detects a person(s) or object(s) entering or exiting the car in the area betweenthe hoistway doors or the entryway area adjacent to the hoistway doors.


d. The size of the secondary protection zone shall vary as the door positions vary duringopening and closing. The width of the zone shall be approximately one-third the sizeof the separation between the doors (or door and strike plate for single-slide doors)and shall be approximately centered in the door separation. In order to minimizedetection of hallway passers-by that are not entering the elevator, the maximum zonepenetration into the entryway shall not exceed 20 inches for any door separation.Normal penetration depth into the entryway from the car doors shall be about 14inches for a door separation of 42 inches. The penetration shall reduce proportionallyas the doors close. At door separations of 18 inches or less the secondary protectionsystem may cease its normal operation since the depth of the zone recedes to whereit is inside the hoistway doors. The vertical coverage of the secondary protection shallbe about 19 inches (480 mm) above the sill to about 55 inches (1400 mm) above thesill (mid-thigh to shoulder of a typical adult).

e. The secondary protection shall have an anti-nuisance feature which will ignoredetection in the secondary zone after continual detection occurs for a significant timeperiod in the secondary zone without corresponding detection in the primaryprotection zone; i.e. a person/object is in the entryway but does not enter. Normalsecondary protection shall be re-enabled whenever detection occurs in the primaryzone.

f. The reaction time of the door detector sub-system shall not exceed 60 millisecondswhen both primary and secondary protection capabilities are active; nor 40milliseconds when the secondary protection is disabled.

4. Door nudging operation to occur if doors are prevented from closing for an adjustableperiod of time.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each system proposed for use. Include

the following:1. Signal and operating fixtures, operating panels and indicators2. Cab design, dimensions and layout3. Hoistway-door and frame details4. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements5. Expected heat dissipation of elevator equipment in machine room (BTU)

B. Shop Drawings: Submit approval layout drawings. Include the following:1. Car, guide rails, buffers and other components in hoistway2. Maximum rail bracket spacing3. Maximum loads imposed on guide rails requiring load transfer to building structure4. Loads on hoisting beams5. Clearances and travel of car6. Clear inside hoistway and pit dimensions7. Location and sizes of access doors, hoistway entrances and frames

C. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturer's standard operations andmaintenance manual.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer: Provide elevators manufactured by a firm with a minimum of 10 years

experience in fabrication of elevators equivalent to those specified. Elevator manufacturer shallbe ISO9002 Certified.

B. Installer: The manufacturer shall install elevators.C. Regulatory Requirements: Elevator system design and installation shall comply with the latest

versions of ASME A17.1 and applicable local codes.D. Elevator shall be designed in response to Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility

Guidelines (ADAAG).


E. Permits and Inspections: Provide licenses and permits and perform required inspections andtests.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGA. Should the building or the site not be prepared to receive the elevator equipment at the agreed

upon date, the General Contractor will be responsible to provide a proper and suitable storagearea on or off the premises.

B. Should the storage area be off-site and the equipment not yet delivered, then the elevatorcontractor, upon notification from the General Contractor will divert the elevator equipment tothe storage area. If the equipment has already been delivered to the site, then the GeneralContractor shall transport the elevator equipment to the storage area. The cost of elevatorequipment taken to storage by either party, storage, and redeliver to the job site shall not be atthe expense of the elevator contractor.

1.07 WARRANTYA. The elevator contractor's acceptance is conditional on the understanding that their warranty

covers defective material and workmanship. The guarantee period shall not extend longer thanone (1) year from the date of substantial completion or acceptance thereof by beneficial use,whichever is earlier, of each elevator. The guarantee excludes: ordinary wear and tear,improper use, vandalism, abuse, misuse, or neglect or any other causes beyond the control ofthe elevator contractor and this express warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express orimplied, including any warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.

1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICEA. Maintenance service consisting of regular examinations, adjustments and lubrication of the

elevator equipment shall be provided by the elevator contractor for a period of 12 months afterthe elevator has been turned over for the customer's use. This service shall not besubcontracted but shall be performed by the elevator contractor. All work shall be performed bycompetent employees during regular working hours of regular working days and shall includeemergency 24-hour callback service. This service shall not cover adjustments, repairs orreplacement of parts due to negligence, misuse, abuse or accidents caused by persons otherthan the elevator contractor. Only genuine parts and supplies as used in the manufacture andinstallation of the original equipment shall be provided.


A. Provide hydraulic elevators manufactured by1. Otis Elevator Company (Basis of Design)2. Schindler Elevator Company3. Kone Elevator Company4. ThyssenKrupp Elevator

B. Substitutions: Not Allowed.2.02 EQUIPMENT: GENERAL

A. The hydraulic system shall be of compact design suitable for operation under the requiredpressure. The power component shall be mounted in the hydraulic-fluid storage tank. Thecontrol valve shall control flow for up and down directions hydraulically and shall include anintegral check valve. A control section including control solenoids shall direct the main valveand control: up and down starting, acceleration, transition from full speed to leveling speed, upand down stops, pressure relief and manual lowering. All of these functions shall be fullyadjustable for maximum smoothness and to meet contract conditions. System to be providedwith a muffler and a shut-off valve.

B. A microprocessor-based controller shall be provided, including necessary starting switchestogether with all relays, switches, solid-state components and hardware required for operation,


including door operation, as described herein. A three-phase overload device shall be providedto protect the motor against overloading.

C. A manual lowering feature shall permit lowering the elevator at slow speed in the event of powerfailure or for adjusting purposes.

D. A low voltage monitoring device shall be provided to protect against incorrect operation duringlow voltage (building power) occurrences.

E. Circuit Identification: All electrical wires throughout the elevator electrical system shall bemarked with a unique circuit identifying number appearing four (4) times per foot.

F. Pressure Switch.2.03 EQUIPMENT: HOISTWAY COMPONENTS

A. Plunger(s) and Cylinder(s): Each cylinder shall be constructed of steel pipe of sufficientthickness and suitable for the operating pressure. The top of each cylinder shall be equippedwith a cylinder head with a drip ring to collect any oil seepage as well as an internal guide ringand self-adjusting packing. Each plunger shall be constructed of selected steel tubing or pipe ofproper diameter machined true and smooth with a fine polished finish. Each plunger shall beprovided with a stop ring electrically welded to it to prevent the plunger from leaving the cylinder.Each plunger and cylinder shall be installed plumb and shall operate freely with minimumfriction.

B. Car Guide Rails: Tee-section steel rails with brackets and fasteners.C. Buffer: Helical coil spring type.D. Wiring: Wiring for hoistway electrical devices included in scope of the elevator system, hall

panels, pit emergency stop switch, and the traveling cable for the elevator car.E. Entrances:

1. Frames: Entrance frames shall be of bolted construction for complete one-piece unitassembly. All frames shall be securely fastened to fixing angles mounted in the hoistwayand shall be UL fire rated steel. Sills shall be extruded aluminum.

2. Doors: Entrance doors shall be of hollow metal construction with vertical internal channelreinforcements.

3. Fire Rating: Entrance and doors shall be UL fire rated for 1-1/2 hour.4. Entrance Finish: #4 Satin stainless steel5. Entrance Markings: Entrance jambs shall be marked with 4 inch x 4 inch (102 mm x 102

mm) plates having raised floor markings with Braille adjacent. Markings shall be providedon both sides of the entrance.

6. Sight Guards:2.04 EQUIPMENT CAB COMPONENTS

A. Car Frame: A suitable car frame shall be provided with adequate bracing to support the platformand car enclosure. The buffer striking plate on the underside of the car-frame platformassembly must fully compress the spring buffer mounted in the pit before the plunger reachesits lower limit of travel.

B. Platform, Heavy Loading Type: The car platform shall be arranged to accommodate one-pieceloads weighing up to 25% of the rated capacity, such as wheeled carts, stretchers, etc. Theplatform shall be recessed as needed for scheduled floor finish (i.e; 5/16 inch for tile flooring, oras required for carpet specified).

C. Cab Walls: Cab walls to have attached (non-removable) vertical panels with plastic laminate onfront and back.

D. Car front and door Finish: #4 Satin stainless steel.E. Car Top: Made of wood material clad on both sides with a natural finish aluminum panel.F. Ceiling: Low-Voltage downlight DC-125 suspended ceiling will have panels laminated with

natural satin finish. Set with incandescent down lights, four per panel.


G. Emergency Car Lighting: An emergency power unit employing a 6 volt, sealed rechargeablebattery and totally static circuits shall be provided to illuminate the elevator car and providecurrent to the alarm bell in the event of building power failure.

H. Emergency Pulsating Siren: Siren mounted on top of the car that is activated when the Alarmbutton in the car-operating panel is engaged. Siren shall have a rated sound pressure level of80 dba at a distance of 3.0 m from the device. Siren shall respond with a delay of not morethan 1 second after the switch or push button has been pressed.

I. Cab Wiring: All wiring on the elevator cab shall use factory wired harnesses with Wago CageClamp plugs and receptacles, and shall terminate behind the car operating panel.

J. Exhaust Fan: An exhaust fan shall be mounted on the car top.K. Utility outlet: A 125-volt 15-ampere utility outlet with ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection

shall be furnished on top of the cab.L. Handrails: Round Tubular Metal 1-1/2" (38mm) satin stainless steel finish provided on the rear

of the car enclosure.M. Threshold: AluminumN. Emergency Exit Contact: An electrical contact shall be provided on the car-top exit where

required by code.O. Protective pad: Protective pad hooks and quilted fire retardant protective pad shall be provided.

2.05 EQUIPMENT: SIGNAL DEVICES AND FIXTURESA. Car-Operating Panel: A panel shall be provided which contains all push buttons, key switches,

and message indicators for elevator operation. Each push button shall have Braille and raisedfloor markings provided.

B. Car Fixture Finish: Satin stainless steelC. Standard Fixture: Applied car operating panel shall be furnished. It shall contain a bank of round

metal mechanical illuminated buttons. Flush mounted to the panel and marked to correspond tothe landings served, an emergency call button, door open and door close buttons, and switchesfor lights, inspection and the exhaust fan. The emergency call button shall be connected to abell that serves as an emergency signal. All buttons to have raised numerals and Braillemarkings. LED halo illumination with Green LED halo illumination with 1/8" projecting targets.

D. Car Position Indicator: A digital, LED car position indicator shall be integral to the car operatingpanel.

E. A hands free telephone shall be provided which is designed in response to ADAAGrequirements integral with the car operating panel.

F. Hall Fixtures: Hall fixtures shall be provided with necessary push buttons and key switches forelevator operation. Raised floor markings with Braille shall be provided for each push-button.Hall fixtures shall have a satin stainless steel finish.

G. Landing Passing Signal: A chime bell shall sound in the car to tell a passenger that the car iseither stopping at or passing a floor served by the elevator.

H. Car Lantern and Chime: A directional lantern visible from the corridor shall be provided in thecar entrance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Use field dimensions to examine conditions of substrates, supports, and other conditions underwhich this work is to be performed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions arecorrected.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Installation of all elevator components except as specifically provided for elsewhere by others.


3.03 DEMONSTRATIONA. The elevator contractor shall make a final check of each elevator operation with the Owner or

Owner's representative present prior to turning each elevator over for use. The elevatorcontractor shall determine that control systems and operating devices are functioning properly.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 31 3116-1BIRMINGHAM, AL TERMITE CONTROLPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 31 3116TERMITE CONTROL


A. Chemical soil treatment.1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Title 7, United States Code, 136 through 136y - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and RodenticideAct; United States Code; 1947 (Revised 2001).

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Indicate toxicants to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule,

intended application rate.C. Certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of toxicants.D. Record moisture content of soil before application.E. Maintenance Data: Indicate re-treatment schedule .F. Warranty: Submit warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing this type of work and:

1. Having minimum of 2 years documented experience.2. Approved by manufacturer of treatment materials.3. Licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

1.05 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Provide five year installer's warranty against damage to building caused by termites.

1. Include coverage for repairs to building and to contents damaged due to building damage.Repair damage and, if required, re-treat.


A. Manufacturers:1. Bayer Environmental Science Corp: www.backedbybayer.com/pest-management.2. FMC Professional Solutions: www.fmcprosolutions.com.3. Syngenta Professional Products: www.syngentaprofessionalproducts.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Toxicant Chemical: EPA approved; synthetically color dyed to permit visual identification oftreated soil.

2.02 MIXESA. Mix toxicant to manufacturer's instructions.


A. Verify that soil surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, and ready to receivetreatment.

B. Verify final grading is complete.3.02 APPLICATION

A. Comply with requirements of U.S. EPA and applicable state and local codes.

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 31 3116-2BIRMINGHAM, AL TERMITE CONTROLPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

B. Spray apply toxicant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.C. Apply toxicant at following locations:D. Under slabs, apply toxicant immediately prior to installation of vapor barrier.E. At foundation walls, apply toxicant immediately prior to finish grading work outside foundations.F. Apply extra treatment to structure penetration surfaces such as pipe or ducts, and soil

penetrations such as grounding rods or posts.G. Re-treat disturbed treated soil with same toxicant as original treatment.H. If inspection or testing identifies the presence of termites, re-treat soil and re-test.

3.03 PROTECTIONA. Do not permit soil grading over treated work.

END OF SECTION

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 32 3113-1BIRMINGHAM, AL CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATESPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

SECTION 32 3113CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES


A. Fence framework, fabric, and accessories.B. Excavation for post bases; concrete foundation for posts.C. Manual gates and related hardware.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete anchorage for posts.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM A121 - Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Carbon Steel Barbed Wire; 2013.B. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products; 2013.C. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.D. ASTM A392 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric; 2011a.E. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.F. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2013.G. ASTM F567 - Standard Practice for Installation of Chain-Link Fence; 2011.H. ASTM F1083 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)

Welded, for Fence Structures; 2010.I. CLFMI CLF 2445 - Product Manual; Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; 1997.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Provide data on fabric, posts, accessories, fittings and hardware.C. Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions,

hardware anchorage, and schedule of components.D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of property perimeter posts

relative to property lines and easements.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in thissection, with not less than three years of documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

A. Materials and Components: Conform to CLFMI Product Manual.B. Fabric Size: CLFMI Heavy Industrial service.C. Intermediate Posts: Type I round.D. Terminal, Corner, Rail, Brace, and Gate Posts: Type I round.

2.02 ACCESSORIESA. Caps: Cast steel galvanized; sized to post diameter, set screw retainer.B. Fittings: Sleeves, bands, clips, rail ends, tension bars, fasteners and fittings; steel.

AUDI BIRMINGHAM 32 3113-2BIRMINGHAM, AL CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATESPRAXIS3-13036 ???? 2014

C. Extension Arms: Cast steel galvanized, to accommodate 3 strands of barbed wire, single arm,vertical.

D. Hardware for Single Swinging Gates: 180 degree hinges, 2 for gates up to 60 inches (1525mm) high, 3 for taller gates; fork latch with gravity drop and padlock hasp; keeper to hold gate infully open position.

E. Hardware for Double Swinging Gates: 180 degree hinges, 2 for gates up to 60 inches (1525mm) high, 3 for taller gates; drop bolt on inactive leaf engaging socket stop set in concrete,active leaf latched to inactive leaf preventing raising of drop bolt, padlock hasp; keepers to holdgate in fully open position.

2.03 FINISHESA. Components (Other than Fabric): Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M, at 1.7

oz/sq ft (530 g/sq m).B. Hardware: Hot-dip galvanized to weight required by ASTM A153/A153M.C. Accessories: Same finish as framing.D. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install framework, fabric, accessories and gates in accordance with ASTM F567.B. Place fabric on outside of posts and rails.C. Set intermediate posts plumb, in concrete footings with top of footing 2 inches above finish

grade. Slope top of concrete for water runoff.D. Line Post Footing Depth Below Finish Grade: ASTM F567.E. Corner, Gate and Terminal Post Footing Depth Below Finish Grade: ASTM F567.F. Brace each gate and corner post to adjacent line post with horizontal center brace rail and

diagonal truss rods. Install brace rail one bay from end and gate posts.G. Provide top rail through line post tops and splice with 6 inch (150 mm) long rail sleeves.H. Install center brace rail on corner gate leaves.I. Do not stretch fabric until concrete foundation has cured 28 days.J. Stretch fabric between terminal posts or at intervals of 100 feet (30 m) maximum, whichever is

less.K. Position bottom of fabric 2 inches (50 mm) above finished grade.L. Fasten fabric to top rail, line posts, braces, and bottom tension wire with tie wire at maximum 15

inches (380 mm) on centers.M. Attach fabric to end, corner, and gate posts with tension bars and tension bar clips.N. Do not attach the hinged side of gate to building wall; provide gate posts.

3.02 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm).B. Maximum Offset From True Position: 1 inch (25 mm).C. Components shall not infringe adjacent property lines.

END OF SECTION